Home

AMX NXD/NXT-1200VG Computer Monitor User Manual

1. Brown Stripe FIG 66 RJ 45 wiring diagram Installation Procedures 17 Panels s Modero Touch Panels Panel Calibration Overview This section outlines the steps for calibrating the touch panel It is recommended that you calibrate the panel before its initial use and after completing a firmware download Modero panels are factory setup with specific demo touch panel pages The first splash screen that appears indicates the panel is receiving power beginning to load firmware and preparing to display the default touch panel pages When the panel is ready the AMX Splash Screen is replaced by the Initial Panel Page FIG 67 AMX Splash Screen Initial Panel Page appears during power up AMX Logo Page FIG 67 AMX splash screen and Initial Panel Page Calibrating the Modero Panel 1 Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button FIG 68 for 6 seconds passing over the Setup page to access the Calibration setup page FIG 69 The panel should first be calibrated properly Front Setup Access button grey 3 second press hold Accesses the Setup page 6 second press hold Accesses the Calibration page Single press puts the panel to sleep FIG 68 Location of grey Front Setup Access button ne NOTE 2 Press the crosshairs on the Calibration page to set the calibration points on the LCD FIG 69 Calibrate The request to touch the crosshairs is the first on screen
2. I O connector plate Screws Compact Flash card FIG 17 Location of the mini PCI card connector on main board If you have previously installed an NXA RGB card it must first be removed prior to gaining access to the mini PCI connector on the board Carefully remove the gold tipped terminal ends of the antenna from their factory default connectors on the main board The antenna is secured at this location to restrict its movement prior to connection to a wireless card Firmly grasp the NXA PCI80211G mini PCI card from the edges and insert the pins at a 25 angle into the opening on the connector FIG 18 NOTE FIG While maintaining the 25 angle alignment on the new module push it in firmly until the contact pins are completely inside the connector and the card snaps into place FIG 18 Push the card downward to the main board until the side braces snap atop the NXA PCI80211G and hold it in place Antennas connectors Connection point between the braces and the mini PCI card 18 Installation of the mini PCI card connector on main board Locate the terminal ends of the antennas and apply downward pressure to snap them onto their gold tipped counterparts on the mini PCI card FIG 18 Carefully push down on each connector to verify it is securely joined to the card It is recommended that any upgrade of internal equipment be done simultaneously in order to reduce the risk of damage
3. a NOTE Text Area Input Masking Text Area Input Masking can be used to limit the allowed correct characters that are entered into a text area For example in working with a zip code a user could limit the entry to a max length of only 5 characters but with input masking you could limit them to 5 mandatory numerical digits and 4 optional numerical digits A possible use for this feature is to enter information into form fields The purpose of this feature is to e Force you to use correct type of characters i e numbers vs characters Limit the number of characters in a text area Suggest proper format with fixed characters Right to Left e Required or Optional e Change Force a Case e Create multiple logical fields Specify range of characters number for each field With this feature it is NOT necessary to e Limit you to a choice of selections e Handle complex input tasks such as names days of the weeks or months by name Perform complex validation such as Subnet Mask validation Input mask character types These character types define what information is allowed to be entered in any specific instance The following table lists what characters in an input mask will define what characters are allowed in any given position Character Types Character Masking Rule 0 Digit 0 to 9 entry required plus and minus signs not allowed 9 Digit or space entry not requ
4. B Main NXD unit consists of the touch panel and housing A Faceplate bezel FIG 45 Wall Mount panel installation configuration for flat solid surfaces 11 Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations on either the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 12 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing an NXD into an optional Rack Mount Kit NXA RK12 or NXA RK15 1 Remove the magnetic faceplate bezel from the main NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force 2 Thread the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring through the opening in the equipment rack from their terminal locations Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1200VG and 1500VG Panels section on page 68 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 3 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter 4 Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying pow
5. FIG 71 Setup page 2 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 3 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished Clearing Password 5 from the initial Password Setup page removes the need for you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page NOTE 4 Press the red Device Number field to open the Device Number keypad FIG 72 5 Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number Keypad The default value is 10001 and the range is from 1 32000 Device Number values to each panel so that all assigned panels appear in the When using multiple panels within a NetLinx System remember to assign unique System listing for the target Master NOTE Aea NOTE 6 Press Done to close the keypad assign the number and return to the Protected Setup page Protected Setup Device Number y Reboot Panel FIG 72 Protected Setup page 7 Press the on screen Reboot button to restart the panel and incorporate any changes Before continuing open NetLinx Studio This program assists in developing a System Number Master IPIURL and Master Port number Refer to your NetLinx Master s instruction manuals for more information 8 Obtain the System Number and Master IP Address from NetLinx Studio This information must be specific for the system used with
6. 4500VG Tech Pubs Project a sine Totma Pusan Tes gt roe TST fe for Fle Rason Reman Dae Feb 2311 BB FT Uve aysam goresaten ihe narve hos Put pect Sample TPD4 Project Wizard dialog FIG 105 Project Information page shown taking information form TPD4 project file The elements of the Project Information page are described in the table below Project Information Page Elements Back Returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password File Name Displays the name of the TPDesign4 project file downloaded to the panel Designer ID Displays the designer information File Revision Displays the revision number of the file Dealer ID Displays the dealer ID number unique to every dealer and entered in TPD4 Job Name Displays the job name Sales Order Displays the sales order information Purchase Order Displays the purchase order information Build Number Displays the build number information of the TPD4 software used to create the project file Creation Date Displays the project creation date Revision Date
7. NOTE NOTE SSID field Wireless Settings m23 Mini PCI wireless card communication settings for use with a target WAP WEP 128 Generate None C edede Poor 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Fai r Changes on this page take G effect after using the BACK Very Good button to return to the Excellent Previous page FIG 81 Wireless Settings page Wireless Settings section You must first take the SSID name Current Key string value and panel MAC Address information and then later enter it into the appropriate WAP dialog fields in order to sync up the secure connection These values must be identically reproduced on the target WAP 7 Touch the Network Name SSID field and from the Service Set Identifier keyboard enter the SSID name you will be using on your target Wireless Access Point case sensitive e The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP If this field is left blank the unit will attempt to connect to the first available WAP By default all WAP200Gs use AMX as their assigned SSID value One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the SSID was not entered properly You must maintain the same case when entering the SSID information ABC is not the same as Abc e The alpha numeric string is by default AMX but can later be changed to any 32 character entry This string must be duplicated within the Network Name SSID field on the WAP e Asan
8. A Button Commands Cont ABIM Set the input mask for the specified address Syntax BIM lt vt addr range gt lt input mask gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 input mask Refer to the Text Area Input Masking section on page 236 for character types Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BIM 500 AAAAAAAAAA Sets the input mask to ten A characters that are required to either a letter or digit entry is required ABLN Set the number of lines removed equally from the top and bottom of a composite video signal The maximum number of lines to remove is 240 A value of 0 will display the incoming video signal unaffected This command is used to scale non 4x3 video images into non 4x3 video buttons Syntax BLN lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt number of lines gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state number of lines 0 240 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BLN 500 55 Equally removes 55 lines from the top and 55 lines from the bottom of the video button A Button Commands Cont BMC Button copy command Copy attributes of the source button to all the destination buttons Note that the source is a single button state Each state must be copied as a separate command The lt codes gt se
9. EF lt text effect name gt Set the text effect EC lt text effect color gt Set the text effect color ML lt max length gt Set the maximum length of a text area MK lt input mask gt Set the input mask of a text area L lt 0 1 gt Log On Log Off the computer control connection N lt network name gt Set network connection name P lt password gt Set the network connection password Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMF 500 1 B10 CFRed CB Blue SCTBlack Ptest png Sets the button OFF state as well as the Border Fill Color Border Color Text Color and Bitmap A Button Commands Cont ABMI Mask image is used to crop a borderless button to a non square shape This is typically Set the button used with a bitmap mask image Syntax BMI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt mask image gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state mask image Graphic file used Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMI 530 1 amp 2 newMac png Sets the button with variable text 530 ON OFF state mask image to newmac png ABML If this value is set to zero 0 there is no max length The maximum length available is Set the maximum length of the text area button 2000 This is only for a Text area input button and not for a Text area inpu
10. Carefully peel the protective plastic cover from the LCD If the protective plastic LCD cover is not removed the panel may not respond properly to touch points on the LCD or allow proper screen calibration Installing the Internal Components Installation of the internal components such as the NXA PCI80211G Wireless card and NXA RGB Interface card are described in detail within the following sections Step 2 Install the 802 11g mini PCI Wireless Card section on page 38 Step 3 Install the NXA RGB Card Component NXT section on page 39 Upgrading the Back Box with the MB TP17 VESA Housing Upgrading the existing back box with the new VESA Mounting Kit FG033 50 requires 3 main processes e Removing the pre existing back box and installing the new VESA back box e Threading cables through the strain relief grommet opening in the rear plastic cover e Finalizing the installation of the NXD with VESA back box and cables into the plastic cover securing both components and finalizing the strain relief grommet installation The new MB TP17 Universal VESA Mounting Box uses a standard VESA installation pattern of 75 mm between holes VESA mounts that conform to this pattern can be used on the MB TP17 Housing Removing the Original Modero Back Box 1 Detach all connectors from the side of the touch panel 2 Remove the magnetic faceplate from the NXD 1700VG unit by gripping the faceplate and pulling outwards while applying a
11. FIG 23 Location of the Compact Flash card and I O plate on NXD Step 5 Close and Resecure the NXD Panel Enclosure 1 With the components securely installed gently place the outer housing back onto the metallic panel casing with the connector opening on the right side of the panel and align the four pan head Housing Screw holes along the edges of the outer housing Q Use care not to bend or damage any antenna connections while replacing the outer housing CAUTION 2 Insert and secure the four pan head Housing Screws into the pre drilled holes along the edges of the NXD unit by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver Vr 3 Remove the previous I O plate adhesive overlay this reveals a pre drilled RGB connector opening and replace it with the new adhesive RGB overlay 53 2250 03 4 Reinstall the upgraded RGB I O connector plate by aligning all connectors to their respective locations FIG 24 FE type 6 dE iE e RGB AUDIO VIDEO ETHERNET PWR PROGRAM FIG 24 NXD1 O plate with upgraded RGB overlay 5 Secure the I O plate using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver and then twist the Stereo Output nut back onto the Stereo Output jack NXT BP Power Pack FG2255 10 The NXT BP Power Pack FIG 25 is a rechargeable Lithium Ion smart battery used to provide power to the NXT Modero panel through the NXA BASE B Battery Base This battery incorporates an on board battery life indicator The NXT BP battery can be cha
12. RJ 45 port for 10 100 Mbps communication The Ethernet port automatically negotiates the connection speed 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and whether to use half duplex or full duplex mode Audio Video connector Ethernet 10 100 port These panels communicate with the NetLinx Master using the ICSP protocol over Ethernet Ethernet 10 100 LEDs LEDs show communication activity and connection information A activity Yellow LED lights when receiving or transmitting Ethernet data packets L link Green LED lights when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly 1200VG Panel Specifications Cont Rear Panel Components Cont PWR connector Stereo Output connector USB connector 2 Mini USB connector Side panel location on NXD Wall Mount panels e 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector e Stereo output through a 3 5mm mini jack for use with external speakers e The two Type A USB ports can connect up to two external keyboard or mouse devices for use with Virtual PC applications e These ports can be used to communicate to a PC and transfer pass thru touch control from the external devices thru the NXA AVB RGB to the PC and then back again Refer to the Preparing your panel for Pass Thru Control using the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box section on page 26 e 5 pin Mini USB connector used for programming firmware update and touch panel file transfer between the PC and the
13. Syntax BCF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 185 for more information Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 12 SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 Yellow SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 F4ECOA63 SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 F4ECOA Sets the Off state fill color by color number Colors can be set by Color Numbers Color name R G B alpha colors RRGGBBAA and R G amp B colors values RRGGBB ABCT Set the text color to the specified color Only if the specified text color is not the same as the current color Note Color can be assigned by color name without spaces number or R G B value RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA Syntax BCT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 185 for more information Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BCT 500 504 amp 510 1 12 Sets the O
14. 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector for power to the touch panel Availability Front Components Green LED provides an indication of both power and activity 1 blink second indicates the unit is powered and active Multiple blinks second indicates there is currently an activity in progress such as a download Do not unplug the unit during this process RJ 45 connector provides Ethernet signals to the touch panel e RJ 45 connector provides differential audio video signals between the touch panel and the box This connector routes Composite video Stereo left right audio and microphone audio RJ 45 connector provides RGB Component video signals being routed from the rear RGB Component input ports and touch control information to the RJ 45 RGB connector on the NXA RGB card installed within the panel This connector routes VGA and Component video signals Rear Components 4 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector for out bound audio from microphone e 6 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector for in bound left right channel audio HD 15 D Sub RGB VGA Component connector used to route an RGB computer or Component DVD HDTV signal to a target Modero panel using the internal NXA RGB card Type B USB device port input connector for pass thru computer control by connecting an external keyboard or mouse device for use with different PC applications The touch signals are routed to the touch panel via the front RGB RJ 45 co
15. 65535 Address port Range 1 100 These button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels themselves NOTE Page Commands These Page Commands are used in NetLinx Programming Language and are case insensitive Page Commands APG Add the popup page to a group if it does not already exist If the new popup is added to a group which has a popup displayed on the current page along with the new pop up the Add a specific displayed popup will be hidden and the new popup will be displayed popup page toa specified popup Syntax group APG lt popup page name gt lt popup group name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page popup group name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup group Example SEND_COMMAND Panel APG Popup1 Group1 Adds the popup page Popup1 to the popup group Group1 CPG Syntax Clear all popup CPG lt popup group name gt pages from Variable specified popup group popup group name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup group Example SEND_COMMAND Panel CPG Group1 Clears all popup pages from the popup group Group1 rE Page Commands Cont DPG Delete a specific popup page from specified popup group if it exists Syntax DPG lt popup page name gt lt popup group name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page popup gro
16. Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Time Date Refresh Set This section provides you with two options The Get Time Date button retrieves the Time and Date information from the Master The Set Time Date button sets the Master to retain and save any time date modifications made on the Time and Date Setup page ea E EE NOTE Time amp Date Setup Page Elements Cont Time Display fields e These fields display the time in three formats STANDARD STANDARD AM PM and 24 HOUR Date Display fields e These fields display the calendar date information in several different formats Set Date Time This section provides a user with both UP DN arrow buttons to alter the Master s calendar date and time The blue circle indicates which field is cur rently selected Select the Year field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the year value range 2000 2037 Select the Month field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the month value range 1 12 Select the Day field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the day value range 1 31 Select the Hour field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the
17. Contrast ratio 300 1 Display area HW 183 10 mm x 247 40 mm e Display colors 256K 18 bit color depth e Dot Pixel pitch 0 297 mm Screen resolution HV 800 x 600 pixels e Video formats NTSC PAL and SECAM shown within variable size video windows Active Screen Area 9 69 x 7 26 24 60cm x 18 45cm Viewing Angles e Vertical 80 up from center and 80 down from center Features e Display of Component RGB HDTV signals done through the use of both an internal NXA RGB card and an external NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Enhanced hardware security via an externally mounted Kensington Lock system Ethernet connectivity replaced ICSNet as a method of communication e New and improved connector compartment e Pass thru Computer Control via the NXA RGB card RGB or Component input e Streaming MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 digital video support e Streaming MP2 MP3 and AAC digital audio support e Support of the latest G4 applications G4 Computer Control G4Web Contro Dynamo TakeNote and PictureFrame e USB mouse keyboard programming ports Supported Audio Sample Rates e 48000Hz 44100Hz 32000Hz 24000Hz 22050Hz 16000Hz 12000Hz 11025Hz and 8000Hz Certifications e FCC Part 15 Class B CE and EN 60950 Supported Transport Protocols RTP MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Transport Stream UDP MPEG 2 Transport Stream Supported Audio Codecs Advanced Audio Coding AAC MPEG Audio Lev
18. The Font ID is generated by TPD4 and is located in TPD4 through the Main menu Panel gt Generate Programmer s Report gt Text Only Format gt Readme txt A Button Commands Cont joystick axis and move the origin to another corner AGDI Syntax Change the AGDI lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph drag increment gt bargraph drag Variable increment variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph drag increment The default drag increment is 256 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GDI 7 128 Sets the bargraph with variable text 7 to a drag increment of 128 AGIV Parameters 1 2 and 3 will cause a bargraph or slider to be inverted regardless of Invert the orientation Their effect will be as described for joysticks Syntax 4GTV lt vt addr range gt lt joystick axis to invert gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 joystick axis to invert 0 3 0 1 0 Normal 1 Invert horizontal axis 2 Invert vertical axis 2 3 3 Invert both axis locations For a bargraph 1 Invert 0 Non Invert Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GIV 500 3 Inverts the joystick axis origin to the bottom right corner A Button Commands Cont SGLH Change the bargraph upper limit Syntax GLH lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph hi gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph limit range 1 65535 bargraph upper limit range Example SEND_
19. Time Until Charged green indicates the amount of time remaining until the batteries installed within the connected NXA BASE B are fully charged e Range 0 00 12 59 This is read in HH MM hours and minutes Panel Shutdown The Panel Shutdown UP DN buttons alter the timeout value in minutes e This value determines the number of minutes that would need to pass before the panel automatically shuts down Once shutdown the unit would have to be restarted A zero value disables this feature Range 0 240 default 0 min Low Battery Warning The Low Battery Warning UP DN buttons alter the time value in minutes available on the battery for use before the panel displays a low battery warning e Range 10 45 default 15 min NOTE Battery Base Page Elements Cont Very Low Battery Warning The Very Low Battery Warning UP DN buttons alter the time value in minutes available on the battery for use before the panel displays a very low battery warning This indicates a near term panel shutdown Range 3 15 default 5 min This value can never exceed the Low Battery Warning value When the NXT BP batteries installed within the NXA BASE B battery base reach a point where they need to be recalibrated A recalibration pop up screen appears to ask whether or not you choose to recalibrate the batteries at this time Battery Status fields This section provides the ability to
20. accessed by pressing the Video Adjustment button on the Setup page and then selecting the appropriate button from the option bar sets the Video properties of the incoming video signal from an NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Brightness 1 Gontrast j Incoming Video signal SA Once done making your screen adjustments SAVE SETTINGS FIG 110 Video Adjustment page showing default values The elements of the Video Adjustment page are described in the table below Video Adjustment Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Settings e The Default Settings button sets the video settings to their default values indicated in this table The Undo Changes button disregards any changes made on the page since the last settings were saved e The Save Settings button saves any changes made to this page Video Adjustment Page Elements Cont Video Settings e The Black amp White button toggles the Black amp White display mode Default Off The Sharpness button toggles the Interpolate Sharpness feature
21. al EA Operation Reference Guide Modero VG Series G4 Touch Panels NXD NXT 1200VG NXD NXT 1500VG and NXD NXT 1700VG RGB Video anda Composite Videa a 3 aS Touch Panels Last Revised 10 1 2008 AMX Limited Warranty and Disclaimer All products returned to AMX require a Return Material Authorization RMA number The RMA number is obtained from the AMX RMA Department The RMA number must be clearly marked on the outside of each box The RMA is valid for a 30 day period After the 30 day period the RMA will be cancelled Any shipments received not consistent with the RMA or after the RMA is cancelled will be refused AMX is not responsible for products returned without a valid RMA number Warranty Repair Policy AMX will repair any defect due to material or workmanship issues during the applicable warranty period at no cost to the AMX Authorized Partner provided that the AMX Authorized Partner is responsible for in bound freight and AMX is responsible for out bound ground freight expenses The AMX Authorized Partner must contact AMX Technical Support to validate the failure before pursuing this service AMX will complete the repair and ship the product within five 5 business days after receipt of the product by AMX The AMX Authorized Partner will be notified if repair cannot be completed within five 5 business days Products repaired will carry a ninety 90 day warranty or the balance of the remaining warr
22. e Display area HW 304 13 mm x 228 10 mm e Display colors 16 million colors 24 bit color depth e Dot pixel pitch 0 297 mm Screen resolution HW 1024 x 768 e Video formats NTSC PAL and SECAM shown within variable size video windows Viewing Angles Vertical 85 up from center and 85 down from center 1500VG Panel Specifications Cont Features Display of Component RGB HDTV signals done through the use of both an internal NXA RGB card and an external NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Enhanced hardware security via an externally mounted Kensington Lock system Ethernet connectivity replaced ICSNet as a method of communication e New and improved connector compartment Pass thru Computer Control via the NXA RGB card Pre installed 802 11g wireless card and integrated antennas NXT models only RGB or Component input Streaming MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 digital video support Streaming MP2 MP3 and AAC digital audio support Support of the latest G4 applications G4 Computer Control G4Web Control Dynamo TakeNote and PictureFrame USB mouse keyboard programming ports Wired Ethernet 10 100 and Wireless Ethernet 802 11g Supported Audio Sample Rates 48000Hz 44100Hz 32000Hz 24000Hz 22050Hz 16000Hz 12000Hz 11025Hz and 8000Hz Certifications FCC Part 15 Class B CE and EN 60950 Supported Transport Protocols RTP MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Tra
23. touch panel gt FIG 7 Pass thru control wiring configuration 3 Use an HD 15 video cable to create a connection between the computer s video output connector and the HD 15 D Sub RGB VGA Component connector on the rear of the NXA AVB RGB This HD 15 D Sub RGB VGA Component connector on the breakout box is used to route an RGB computer or Component DVD HDTYV signal to a target Modero panel using the internal NXA RGB card A Use a Type A to Type B USB cable to create a connection from USB connector on the computer to the rear Type B USB device port input connector on the rear of the NXA AVB RGB This connection routes pass thru computer control from the touch panel to the front RGB RJ 45 connector and then through the rear USB port to the PC Touch information is sent to and from the panel via this two way connector o Verify the panel has been configured to communicate by connecting an RJ 45 10 100baseT Ethernet connector from the rear Ethernet port on the breakout box to a valid Ethernet Hub 6 Connect the incoming power connector to the 12 VDC power connector on the rear of the box DO NOT CONNECT POWER UNTIL THE UNIT IS COMPLETELY INSTALLED 7 Use the NXA MTC RGB to create a connection between the NXA AVB RGB and the target VG Series touch panel Refer to the following NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top Cable CA2250 70 section on page 28 for more detailed cable information Connect a USB mouse keyboard to the avai
24. 10 Installing the CAT5 Suppression Ferrites All 1200V Series VG Series and Table Top CV10 panels require the installation of an appropriate number of CAT5 Suppression Ferrites when they use an RJ 45 cable to feed an A V signal from the breakout box 1 The CATS Suppression Ferrite is housed within a plastic enclosure shown in FIG 10 with a latch release on one side Pull to release the latch and open the enclosure 2 Grasp the Black RJ 45 Audio Video cable being connected to the panel This end of the cable is longer than the opposing end which connects to the breakout box 6 inches vs 3 inches Refer to FIG 11 for more detailed information 3 Insert the panel end of the Black RJ 45 Audio Video cable into the groove along the inside of the enclosure The CAT5 Suppression Ferrites MUST be installed onto the cable connected to the Modero s Audio Video RJ 45 connector just behind the connector 4 Snap the enclosure shut with the cable inside and you re done 5 Repeat this process again only when installing an additional CATS Suppression Ferrite model specific 3 ERP To Touch Z Panel 2 6 inches Connector 1 used for Audio Video Black Connector 3 used for Power Connector 2 used for Ethernet White Connector 4 used for RGB Blue FIG 11 Ferrite connector location on Audio Video RJ 45 cable in order to reduce the risk of damage to internal co
25. 2 eime I To Touch Panel A N OQ To Breakout Box Connector 1 used for Audio Video Black Connector 3 used for Power Connector 2 used for Ethernet White Connector 4 used for RGB Blue FIG 9 Finished NXA MTC RGB Tabletop Cable showing standard terminations NOTE V NOTE The following table provides the wiring information for each of the four 4 available connectors on each side of the NXA MTC RGB Tabletop Cable Wire Table Wire Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3 Connector 4 1 White Orange White Orange Red White Orange 2 Orange White Orange White Black Orange White 3 White Green White Green White Green 4 Blue White Blue White Blue White 5 White Blue White Blue White Blue 6 Green White Green White Green White 7 White Brown White Brown White Brown 8 Brown White Brown White Brown White Installing CAT5 Suppression Ferrites Before connecting the RJ 45 cables to the Modero Touch Panel install the necessary number of CAT5 Suppression Ferrites FIG 10 to the RJ 45 Audio Video cable These ferrites come as part of the Installation Kits mentioned in the previous Specification table page 28 No tools are required for this installation Push down on the enclosure until it snaps closed Insert the CAT5 cable and close the enclosure Release the latch to open the plastic enclosure FIG
26. 9 98 kg Panel LCD Parameters e Aspect Ratio 16 x 9 Brightness 450 cd m e Channel transparency 8 bit Alpha channel transparency Contrast ratio 600 1 e Display colors 16 million colors 24 bit color depth Dot pixel pitch 0 289 mm Screen resolution HV 1280 x 768 pixels XGA Wide 60 HZ frame frequency Video formats NTSC PAL and SECAM shown within variable size video windows Viewing Angles e Vertical 85 up from center and 85 down from center 1700VG Panel Specifications Cont Features Display of Component RGB HDTV signals done through the use of both an internal NXA RGB card and an external NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Enhanced hardware security via an externally mounted Kensington Lock system Ethernet connectivity replaced ICSNet as a method of communication e New and improved connector compartment e Pass thru Computer Control via the NXA RGB card Pre installed 802 11g wireless card and integrated antennas NXT models only RGB or Component input Streaming MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 digital video support e Streaming MP2 MP3 and AAC digital audio support e Support of the latest G4 applications G4 Computer Control G4Web Control Dynamo TakeNote and PictureFrame e USB mouse keyboard programming ports Wired Ethernet 10 100 and Wireless Ethernet 802 11g Supported Audio Sample Rates 48000Hz 44100Hz 32000Hz 24000Hz 2
27. Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active e A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Light Sensor Allows you to monitor and alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor e The Light Sensor Level field indicates the level used to report the light sensor level back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only e The Light Sensor Level Port field indicates the port used to report the light sensor level back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only e The Light Sensor Channel field indicates the level used to report the sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 It is On when you are below the Maximum dim mode level read only e The Light Sensor Channel Port field indicates the port used to report the sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only e The Light Level field provides a numeric value representing the current value of the light level detected by the on board photo sensor e The Light Level bargraph displays a horizontal bargraph indicating the current value of the light level detected by the on board photo sensor This bargraph provides a visual representation of the numeric value displayed within the Light Leve
28. Default On The Interlace button toggles the Interlacing feature Default On Status Displays whether or not a video sync signal is detected Format Allows you to press this blue field and cycle through a choice of available video formats NTSC PAL SECAM or Auto detect Default Auto Brightness Use the UP DN buttons to alter the brightness level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Contrast Use the UP DN buttons to alter the contrast level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Saturation Use the UP DN buttons to alter the color saturation level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Hue Use the UP DN buttons to alter the hue level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Video Adjustment RGB Adjustment Page The RGB Adjustment page FIG 111 accessed by pressing the Video Adjustment button on the Setup page and then selecting the appropriate button from the option bar sets the RGB properties for the detected NXA RGB card located within the target panel on Slot 2 where pass thru occurs Vi Back GB Adjustment settings DV ee Firmware version of the NXA RGB card Firmware version of the NXA AVB RGB Once you are done making your adjustments click SAVE SETTINGS Incoming signal shown in the background Pressing this area activates the Full Screen Edit mode FIG 111 RGB Adjustment page showi
29. Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOF Popup1 Main Deactivates the popup page Popup on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOF Popup1 Deactivates the popup page Popup on the current page PPOG Toggle a specific popup page on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 Toggling refers to the activating deactivating On Off of a popup page This command works in the same way as the Toggle Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPOG lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOG Popup1 Main Toggles the popup page Popup1 on the Main page from one state to another On Off Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOG Popup1 Toggles the popup page Popup1 on the current page from one state to another On Off PPON Activate a specific popup page to launch on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is already On do not re draw it This command works in the same way as the Show Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPON lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup
30. One of the issues which occurred in the past was that some 101 key foreign keyboard character sets were being incorrectly represented via the Computer Control and Take Note applications e For example Spanish keyboards consisting of Castilian character sets such as tilde were being miscommunicated by the VNC application to the source computer and as a result passwords were not properly being entered e The VNC Computer Control keyboard drivers found in earlier Modero firmware build 57 or earlier were using an English type character set which was not fully utilizing all available foreign characters e Several different countries have produced 101 key international keyboards each with their own unique set of keys occupying the keyboard Several of these keys are specific to the language they are used with Confirmation Dialog Are you sure you want to reset all system settings You have a wait time of 5 seconds before the YES option is enabled FIG 118 Protected Setup page System Recovery confirmation dialog TL Channel Code Channel Code Number h Port Channel Por Number Channel Port 7 10 l l 3 132 Address l Siider pon Port ress Level Port Button Port 2 8 3 50 Level Port Channel Code Number Address Code Channel Code Address Code Number Number Number FIG 119 Button slider Function Show example G4 Web Control Page The G4 Web Control pag
31. Point To properly setup both the WAP200G and panel for secure communication you must first prepare the Modero panel and then use the information provided to fill out the fields within the WAP s browser based Basic Wireless Configuration page Since the code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula all panels will generate identical keys for the same Passphrase The generators used on WAPs will not produce the same key as the Modero generator even if you use the same Passphrase This is why we recommend creating the Current Key FIRST on the Modero and then entering that information into the appropriate WAP200G fields 1 Power down the Modero unit and follow the wireless card installation procedures on NXD panels outlined in the Step 2 Install the 802 11g mini PCI Wireless Card section on page 38 e When configuring touch panels for wireless communication verify that no Ethernet connector is installed within the panel before the unit is power cycled 2 Power up the panel this allows it to detect the card Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished 5 Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page Locate the Wireless Settings section of the Wireless Settings page FIG 81
32. Set the computer control network port for the specified address Syntax ABVT lt vt addr range gt lt network port gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 network port 1 65535 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVT 500 5000 Sets the network port to 5000 A Button Commands Cont ABWW By default word wrap is Off Set the button Syntax word wrap BWW lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt word wrap gt feature to those buttons with a Variable defined address variable text address range 1 4000 range button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state word wrap O Off and 1 On Default is Off Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BWW 500 1 1 Sets the word wrap on for the button s Off state ACPF Syntax Clear all page flips CPF lt vt addr range gt from a button Variable variable text address range 1 4000 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel CPF 500 Clears all page flips from the button ADPF Syntax Delete page flips ADFP lt vt addr range gt lt actions gt lt page name gt from button if it already exists Variable variable text address range 1 4000 actions Stan dardPage Flip to standard page Prev iousPage Flip to previous page Show Popup Show Popup page Hide Popup Hide Popup page Togg lePopup Toggle popup state ClearG roup C
33. This gap allows the installation of the drywall sheetrock after the back box has been mounted onto the beams 1 Determine which stud beam configuration to use e Pre wall framing is done prior to the drywall installation local framing instructions vary based on location and building codes Mount the main NXD unit into a pre wall environment by fitting the right side of the box against a beam then notching the stud closest to the connectors based on FIG 61 and the depth of the drywall and using the securing screws to fasten the unit into place after the drywall has been installed A horizontal beam can be installed framed below the back box to provide lower support e With an existing wall in place continue with steps 3 and 4 to notch one or both selected beams There is no horizontal support beam framing in this method Take into account the width of the cutting blade and the thickness of the drywall surface when making the cut into the drywall 2 Locate the edges of the two studs used in this installation The location of the NXD is site dependant and could involve notching more than one beam In this sample installation the left beam is notched and the back box rests against the right beam 3 Remove any screws nails from the surface along the notched beam before beginning the cutout process 4 Follow the procedures outlined within Steps 1 5 on page 42 thru page 43 to carefully reinstall the LCD panel back into the b
34. data audio and pass thru Computer Control to Modero touch panels located up to 200 feet 60 96 m from the NXA AVB RGB box The VG Series of touch panels can be fitted for either Video Composite or RGB Component via the use of two Kit configurations Video Kit and RGB Kit Each kit comes with its own group of standard components that are specific to its configuration Although a panel can be order with either of these kits a previously fitted Video Kit panel can be later upgraded to accept and display RGB Component via the use of an RGB upgrade package called the NXA RGBKIT FG2255 11 This upgrade kit supplements the existing Video fitted panel FG225X XXV with such things as an internal NXA RGB interface card and an external NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box The Video Kit fitted units can accept either Composite or S Video from standard video devices These Composite video panels include those listed below Modero Multimedia Touch Panels VG Series with Video Kits NXD 1200VG FG2251 61V 12 Modero Multimedia WallMount Touch Panel with Video Kit NXT 1200VG FG2250 61V 12 Modero Multimedia Table Top Touch Panel with Video Kit NXD 1500VG FG2253 61V 15 Modero Multimedia WallMount Touch Panel with Video Kit NXT 1500VG FG2252 61V 15 Modero Multimedia Table Top Touch Panel with Video Kit NXD 1700VG FG2256 61V 17 Modero Widescreen WallMount Touch Panel with Video Kit NXT 1700VG FG2257 61V 17 Modero Widescreen Table Top
35. 14 3700 365 0MM BEZEL l me NO FRONT BEZEL 14 5060 368 5MM FIG 41 NXD 1500VG 15 inch Wall Mount panel dimensions using expansion clips NOTE 2 at 2140 15 4MM r 2 1640 55 0MM Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the attached connectors before being inserted into the drywall 8 Insert the four sets of drywall screws and expansion clips into the four oval notch locations along the top bottom edges of the main unit FIG 41 9 Carefully insert the main unit with expansion clips into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs on the NXD unit lie flush against the wall FIG 41 10 Tighten the drywall clip sets screws and clips until the Mounting Tabs are securely fastened and flush against the wall DP WARNING 4 notches are required if the unit is installed in drywall using the four 4 provided drywall expansion clips Install the four drywall clip sets included into these holes Mounting Tab aad as S B Main NXD unit consists of A Faceplate the touch panel and housing bezel NY FIG 42 Wall Mount panel NXD installation configuration for drywall surfaces The drywall clip set must be re ordered from AMX if the drywall clip is bent accidentally during an installation or removed during a re installation 11 Place the magnetic faceplate A in FIG 42 back onto the main
36. 41 5025 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black 80 0114 08 Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Four Drywall clips 62 5924 05 and 6 metal strips 80 0192 Installation Kit for 12 NXT panels KA2251 03 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black 80 0114 08 Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Installation Kit for 15 and 17 NXT panels KA2251 04 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black 80 0114 08 One CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Installation Kit for 10 NXT panels KA2259 01 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 One CAT5 Table Top Suppression Ferrite 04 0014 One cylindrical CATS USB Mouse Suppression Ferrite 04 0018 SA FG2251 61RGB Associated Touch Panels where used NXD 1200VG RGB KIT 12 MODERO WALLMOUNT RGB KIT FG2250 61RGB NXT 1200VG RGBKIT 12 MODERO TABLETOP RGB KIT FG2253 61RGB NXD 1500VG RGB KIT 15 MODERO WALLMOUNT RGB KIT FG2252 61RGB NXT 1500VG RGB KIT 15 MODERO TABLETOP RGB KIT FG2256 61RGB NXD 1700VG RGB KIT 17 MODERO WALLMOUNT RGB KIT FG2257 61RGB NXT 1700VG RGB KIT 17 MODERO TABLETOP RGB KIT FG2255 11 NXA RGBKIT RGB UPGRADE KIT FOR EXISTING VG PANELS Wiring and Connection Information FIG 9 shows a top view of the finished cable 3 inches 6 inches lt Red
37. 5 0 C 18 53 470 76 MM 4 drawing on www amx com for more detailed framing information FIG 58 NXD 1700VG framing installation overview e With an existing wall in place continue with steps 3 and 4 to notch one or both selected beams There is no horizontal support beam framing in this method Take into account the width of the cutting blade and the thickness of the drywall surface when making the cut into the drywall A a BACK BOX MOUNTING RIDGE TO ACCOMMODATE THE DRYWALLI SHEETROCK This gap allows the installation of the drywall sheetrock after the back WARNING box has been mounted onto the beams A INSTALLER LEAVE A GAP BETWEEN THE SURFACE OF THE STUD AND THE 2 Locate the edges of the two studs used in this installation The location of the NXD is site dependant and could involve notching more than one beam C In this sample installation the left beam is notched and the back box rests against the right beam 3 Remove any screws nails from the drywall along the notched beam before beginning the cutout process 4 Cut out the surface for the NXD 1700VG Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG 59 Be sure to cut out the four notches along the top and bottom areas to accommodate the four drywall expansion clips provided 18 09 459 44 MM BEZ 52 _ 17 03 432 66 MM 13 37 MM CUTOUT 105 22 MM 1 00 25 40 MM 1 00 25 40 MM 3 64 92 49 MM 53 13 40 MN PE ae A Near EAS E SE
38. 87 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 11 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter 12 Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly before finalizing the installation 13 Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the power supply C Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the attached connectors before being inserted into the solid surface NOTE 14 Follow the procedures outlined within Steps 1 5 on page 42 thru page 43 to carefully reinstall the LCD panel back into the back box housing 15 Carefully slide the main unit into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs of the NXD 1700VG unit lie flush against the wall 16 Insert and secure the four 6 screws into their corresponding holes located along the sides of the NXD 1700VG using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver until the unit is secure and flush against the wall 17 Place the magnetic faceplate A in FIG 62 back o
39. Activates the popup page Popup1 on the current page PPT Set a specific popup page to timeout within a specified time If timeout is empty popup page will clear the timeout Syntax PPT lt popup page name gt lt timeout gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page timeout Timeout duration in 1 10ths of a second Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPT Popup1 30 Sets the popup page Popup7 to timeout within 3 seconds PPX Close all popups on all pages This command works in the same way as the Clear All command in TPDesign 4 Syntax PPX Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPX Close all popups on all pages Page Commands Cont Set the show effect position PSE Syntax Set the show PSE lt popup page name gt lt show effect name gt effect for the Variable specified popup a page to the popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed named show On effect show effect name Refers to the popup effect name being used Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PSE Popup1 Slide from Left Sets the Popup1 show effect name to Slide from Left PSP Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect however the command will specify both This command sets the location at which the effect will begin at Syntax PSP lt popup page name gt lt x coordinate gt lt y coordinate gt Variable
40. B Refer to the NXA BASE B Battery Base Kit FG2255K section on page 45 and Installing the NXA BASE B to an NXT Modero Panel section on page 46 for more information My WEP doesn t seem to be working WEP will not work unless the same default key is set on both the panel and the AP For example if you had your access point set to default key 4 which was 01 02 03 04 05 and you set the Modero to key 1 which was also 01 02 03 04 05 it will not work You have to set key 4 on the Modero to 01 02 03 04 0 a E Troubleshooting Information Cont Symptom Solution I can t seem to completely charge my batteries from within an NXA BASE B connected to a power supply NXT BP batteries can be charged from either an external NXT CHG battery charger or from within the NXA BASE B located below an NXT panel The NXA BASE B Battery base should be updated with the latest firmware part of the Modero firmware KIT file from www amx com e The base can only charge batteries while the NXT panel is in Sleep Mode If the panel parameters are set to their highest values the priority for the power draw becomes the active panel functions and no power is routed to the base for charging Adjust the Display Timeout value to allow the panel to commence the Sleep Mode and begin charging batteries within the base drawing power from a PSN e Refer to the NXA BASE B Battery Base Kit FG2255K section on page 45 for mor
41. DBEEP Outputs a double beep Panel Runtime Operation Commands Cont EKP Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified The Prompt Text is Extend the optional Keypad Syntax EKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel EKP 33333333 Enter Password Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 33333333 with prompt text Enter Password PKEYP Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified Keypad displays a Present a private keypad instead of the numbers typed The Prompt Text is optional Syntax PKEYP lt initial text gt Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel PKEYP 123456789 Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 123456789 in PKP Present a private keypad Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified Keypad displays a instead of the numbers typed The Prompt Text is optional Syntax PKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel PKP 1234567 ENTER PASSWORD Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string ENTER PASSWORD in SETUP Syntax Send panel to S
42. Displays the last revision date for the project Last Save Date Displays the last date the project was saved Blink Rate Displays the feedback blink rate 10th of second Job Comments Displays any comments associated to the job These comments are taken from the TPD4 project file Panel Information Page The Panel Information page FIG 106 centers around Modero panel properties such as resolution used on board memory firmware address channel information and string information Panel Information Va This information is retrieved from the Modero panel gt FIG 106 Panel Information page takes its information from the touch panel The elements of the Panel Information page are described in the table below Panel Information Page Elements Back Returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Panel Type Displays the model of the Modero panel being used Firmware Version Displays the G4 firmware version being used by the panel e Verify you have the latest version from www amx com Setup Port Displays
43. Domain MAC Address Sets the host name of the panel PRIMARY DNS sets the address of the primary DNS server being used by the Modero panel for host name lookups DNS Domain Name System is software that lets users locate computers on a local network or the Internet TCP IP network by host and domain The DNS server maintains a database of host names for its domain and their corresponding IP Addresses SECONDARY DNS sets the secondary DNS value to the panel Sets the address of the primary DNS server used by the panel for host name lookups Sets the secondary DNS value to the Modero panel Sets the unique name on the Internet to the panel for DNS look up This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the wireless mini PCI Ethernet card Access Point MAC Address This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the Wireless Access Point WAP e When communicating with a WAP200G enter the MAC Address BSSID of the target WAP as the Access Point MAC Address Refer to the WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed information on the interaction between these two product lines Wireless Settings Network Name SSID Authentication Encryption Sets the communication values for the optional NXA PC1I80211G mini PCI wire less communication card if present Provides the Service Set Identifier SSID required by the panel before it is permitted to join the wireless network Th
44. Drop Shadow 6 e Medium Drop Shadow 3 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 7 e Medium Drop Shadow 4 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 8 Medium Drop Shadow 5 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 1 Medium Drop Shadow 6 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 2 Medium Drop Shadow 7 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 3 Medium Drop Shadow 8 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 4 e Hard Drop Shadow 1 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 5 e Hard Drop Shadow 2 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 6 Hard Drop Shadow 3 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 7 e Hard Drop Shadow 4 with outline e Medium Drop Shadow 8 e Hard Drop Shadow 5 with outline e Hard Drop Shadow 1 Hard Drop Shadow 6 with outline e Hard Drop Shadow 2 Hard Drop Shadow 7 with outline e Hard Drop Shadow 3 Hard Drop Shadow 8 with outline e Hard Drop Shadow 4 e Hard Drop Shadow 5 Button Query Commands Button Query commands reply back with a custom event There will be one custom event for each button state combination Each query is assigned a unique custom event type The following example is for debug purposes only NetLinx Example DEFINE_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT 3 E 5 E 3 E z 3 E 5 a Send_S Send_S Send_S Send_S Send_S
45. HOLES ARE ONLY REQUIRED WHEN MOUNTING UNIT TO A SOLID SURFACE PODIUM DESK ETC i SECURE UNIT WITH 4 SCREWS o ol CUTOUT 21485 54 6MM A 1 t ee je 2140 5 4MM 2130 5 40M be 2130 5 4MM FRONT BEZEL 11 9340 303 1MM FIG 43 NXD 12 inch Wall Mount panel dimensions using 4 mounting screws 3 4 Remove the magnetic faceplate bezel A in FIG 45 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 45 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force Thread the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any other audio video wiring from their terminal locations through the cutout opening Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1200VG and 1500VG Panels section on page 68 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel NOTE 5605 14 2MM 15 2000 386 1MM BEZ FIG 5 BEZ l 14 0790 357 6MM Sore m5590 142MM 1 A N ie T N b 2 8760 731MM NC R13 R3 2MM MAX RADIUS a a IN 4 CORNERS 13 2520 336 6MM lt CUTOUT 00 190 5MM S H OMMI s CUTOUT i 2 8760 73 1MM vy 4 mai 2 C J lt bS PA TONNIE FRONT BEZEL H 2140 15 4MM H 14 5060 368 5MM A 44 NXD 15 inch Wall Mount panel dimensions using 4 mounting screws Connect all data and power wiring to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD
46. KLB Kensington Lock Kit for NXT panels FG2259 10 optional only with NXT models e NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 This cable is not wall rated for NXD models Several items are included within both the Video and RGB Kits Any items not specifically included within those kits are considered optional e NXA PCI80211G Wireless Card FG2255 04 e NXA RGBKIT RGB upgrade kit for Composite Video touch panels FG2255 11 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NXT Table Top replacement I O plate with RGB connector opening 62 2250 59 NXD WallMount replacement adhesive overlay for existing I O plate 53 2250 03 Note The NXT replacement I O plate is a single piece which is meant to be swapped out with the pre existing plate shipped with Composite Video panels On NXD panels the RGB connector opening is pre drilled into the I O plate but can only be accessed by replacing the adhesive cover and maintaining the existing overlay When upgrading NXD panels with this kit don t replace the NXD I O plate only the adhesive cover e NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 e NXA RK15 FG2904 51 RackMount kit for 15 Wall Mount touch panels NXD models only 1500VG Panel S
47. Kit for NXT panels FG2259 10 optional only with NXT models e NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 This cable is not wall rated for NXD models e NXA PCI80211G Wireless Card FG2255 04 NXA RGBKIT RGB upgrade kit for Composite Video touch panels FG2255 11 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NXT Table Top replacement I O plate with RGB connector opening 62 2250 59 NXD WallMount replacement adhesive overlay for existing I O plate 53 2250 03 e Note The NXT replacement I O plate is a single piece which is meant to be swapped out with the pre existing plate shipped with Composite Video panels On NXD panels the RGB connector opening is pre drilled into the I O plate but can only be accessed by replacing the adhesive cover and maintaining the existing overlay When upgrading NXD panels with this kit don t replace the NXD I O plate only the adhesive cover e NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 e NXA RK12 FG2904 50 RackMount kit for 12 Wall Mount touch panels NXD models only e NXT BP FG2250 10 Battery pack for Table Top panels Provides 4 hours of continual operation NXT models only 1200VG Panel Specifications Cont Other A
48. Kits NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 Also comes included within RGB Kits NXA BASE B FG2255 Wireless base for Table Top touch panels NXT models only NXA KLB Kensington Lock Kit for NXT panels FG2259 10 optional only with NXT models NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 This cable is not wall rated for NXD models e NXA PCI80211G Wireless Card FG2255 04 e NXA RGBKIT RGB upgrade kit for Composite Video touch panels FG2255 11 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NXT Table Top replacement I O plate with RGB connector opening 62 2250 59 NXD WallMount replacement adhesive overlay for existing I O plate 53 2250 03 Note The NXT replacement I O plate is a single piece which is meant to be swapped out with the pre existing plate shipped with Composite Video panels On NXD panels the RGB connector opening is pre drilled into the I O plate but can only be accessed by replacing the adhesive cover and maintaining the existing overlay When upgrading NXD panels with this kit don t replace the NXD I O plate only the adhesive cover e NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 e NXA RK17 FG2904 52 RackMount kit for 17 Wall Mount touch panels NXD
49. Left Mouse Click AMDC Syntax Turn On the aMpc Mouse Example double click p feature for the SEND COMMAND Panel MDC virtual PC Sets the mouse double click for use with the virtual PC SHO Syntax Show or hide a button with a set variable text range SHO lt vt addr range gt lt command value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 command value 0 hide 1 show Example SEND_COMMAND Panel SHO 500 504 amp 510 515 0 Hides buttons with variable text address range 500 504 amp 510 515 A Button Commands Cont ATEC Set the text effect color for the specified addresses states to the specified color The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4 You can also assign the color by name or RGB value RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA Syntax taTEC lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 185 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel TEC 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 12 Sets the text effect color to Very Light Yellow on buttons with variable text 500 504 and 510 515 ATEF The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4 Set the text effect Sy
50. MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 media streams via the TPDesign touch panel pages These incoming media signals can utilize either a UDP or RTP Transport protocol For the purposes of these instructions we will be setting up a Modero touch panel to display an incoming media stream sent from a MAX Video Encoder To fully utilize both MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 streaming functionality you must be using the latest Modero firmware MAX CSE Media Encoder can currently stream A V signals and direct them to IP enabled devices capable of interpreting and displaying the incoming MPEG data using either RTP or UDP Transport Protocols These outgoing signals can be displayed by a VG Series Modero Touch Panel supporting MPEG 2 MPEG 4 streams e Computer running third party multi media player capable of supporting UDP RTP streaming protocols e At this time we are recommending using the open source VLC Media Player version 0 8 or higher Supported transport protocols include UDP or RTP A protocol is a convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints In this case between the MAX CSE and the target IP capable device Modero IP Multicasting is supported under both the UPD and RTP communication protocols If using RTP it is strongly recommended that this port number be an even value Using an odd numbered port value can cause the stream from a MAX CSE to not be properly recognized by the targ
51. NOTE 5 Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information NP Stine 192 99 9 40 255 255 255 0 Modero connection 192 99 99 39 IP info 192 89 89 89 192 89 89 88 s 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 11 22 33 44 55 66 FIG 79 Wireless Settings page IP Settings section 6 Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name 7 Do not alter any of these remaining greyed out fields in the IP Settings section Once the panel is rebooted these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power up a EE NOTE Vv NOTE The information can be found in either the Workspace System name gt Define Device section of your code that defines the properties for your panel or in the Device Addressing Network Addresses section of the Tools gt NetLinx Diagnostics dialog 8 Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page Refer to the Step 2 Configuring the Card s Wireless Security Settings section on page 104 for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or insecure connection Wireless communication using a Static IP Address 1 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password
52. Optional CB TP knockouts conduit wallbox Mounting Tab Install the four 4 40 Installed flush screws into the places against the indicated finished wall surface a X Do not use these a tabs to mount the conduit wallbox These are ONLY used to secure the main unit to the CB B Main NXD unit consists of A Faceplate the touch panel and backbox housing bezel FIG 39 Wall Mount panel installation configuration for pre existing conduit wallbox in a pre wall construction 2 Verify the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any other audio video cables have been properly threaded through the wiring knockouts from their terminal locations on the conduit box Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 3 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter ee NOTE Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the co
53. Panel Design program has pre set border styles that are user selectable TPD4 border styles can ONLY be changed by using the name TPD4 Border Styles by Name Border styles Border styles None Diamond 55 AMX Elite L Diamond 65 AMX Elite M Diamond 75 AMX Elite S Double Bevel L Bevel L Double Bevel M Bevel M Double Bevel S Bevel S Double Line Circle 15 Fuzzy Circle 25 Glow L Circle 35 Help Down Circle 45 Help Down Reversed Circle 55 Menu Bottom Rounded 15 Circle 65 Menu Bottom Rounded 25 Circle 75 Menu Bottom Rounded 35 Circle 85 Menu Bottom Rounded 45 Circle 95 Menu Bottom Rounded 55 Circle 105 Menu Bottom Rounded 65 Circle 115 Menu Bottom Rounded 75 Circle 125 Menu Bottom Rounded 85 Circle 135 Menu Bottom Rounded 95 Circle 145 Menu Bottom Rounded 105 Circle 155 Menu Bottom Rounded 115 Circle 165 Menu Bottom Rounded 125 Circle 175 Menu Bottom Rounded 135 Circle 185 Menu Bottom Rounded 145 Circle 195 Menu Bottom Rounded 155 Cursor Bottom Menu Bottom Rounded 165 Cursor Bottom with Hole Menu Bottom Rounded 175 Cursor Top Menu Bottom Rounded 185 Cursor Top with Hole Menu Bottom Rounded 195 Cursor Left Menu Left Rounded 15 Cursor Left with Hole Menu Left Rounded 25 Cursor Right Menu Left Rounded 35 Cursor Right with Hole Menu Left Rounded 45 Custom Frame Menu Left Rounded 55 Diamond 15 Menu Left Ro
54. Primary DNS Secondary DNS and Domain fields appear on the two separate System Settings and Wireless Settings pages the information populating these fields is identical If the information within one of these fields is altered the change is reflected on both pages within the altered field Example Domain is altered on Wireless Settings page the value is then also changed within the Domain field of the System Settings page 3 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to DHCP DHCP will register the unique MAC Address factory assigned on the panel and once the communication setup process is complete reserve an IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway values from the DHCP Server 4 Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information 5 Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name 6 Do not alter any of the remaining greyed out fields in the IP Settings section Once the panel is rebooted these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power up The information can be found in either the Workspace System name gt Define Device section of your code that defines the properties for your panel or in the Device Addressing Network Addresses in the Tools gt NetLinx Diagnostics dialog 7 Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page 8 Press the on screen Reboot button to bo
55. Send_S Send_S tring tring tring tring tring tring tring CUSTOM_EVENT device Address Custom event type P 529 1001 Text P 529 1002 Bitmap P 529 1003 Icon P 529 1004 Text Justification P 529 1005 Bitmap Justification P 529 1006 Icon Justification P 529 1007 Font P 529 1008 Text Effect Name P 529 1009 Text Effect Color P 529 1010 Word Wrap P 529 1011 ON state Border Color P 529 1012 ON state Fill Color P 529 1013 ON state Text Color P 529 1014 Border Name P 529 1015 Opacity 0 ButtonGet Id ITOA CUSTOM ID Type ITOA CUSTOM TYPE 0 Flag ITOA CUSTOM FLAG 0 VALUE1 ITOA CUSTOM VALUE1 0 VALUE2 ITOA CUSTOM VALUE2 0 VALUE3 ITOA CUSTOM VALUE3 0 TEXT CUSTOM TEXT 0 TEXT LENGTH ITOA LENGTH_STRING CUSTOM TEXT All custom events have the following 6 fields Custom Event Fields Field Description Uint Flag 0 means text is a standard string 1 means Unicode encoded string slong value button state number slong value2 actual length of string this is not encoded size slong value3 index of first character usually 1 or same as optional index string text the text from the button text length string encode button text length These fields are populated differently for each query command The text length String Encode field is not used in any command Button Qu
56. Swapping Hot swapping is not an issue on these panels as the card is installed within the unit and cannot be removed without first removing the housing In the case of DHCP there must be a DHCP server accessible before the fields are populated If the SSID Network Name and WEP fields have not previously been configured the Wireless Settings page will not work until the panel is rebooted Ethernet Communication from the panel can be direct using an Ethernet cable or indirect through the optional NXA PCI80211G AMX Wireless Card FG2255 04 communicating to a Wireless Access Point such as the NXA WAP200G In determining the Ethernet method of communication the panel will always default first to the direct Ethernet communication If no direct connection is detected the panel will first check to see if there is an installed wireless interface card and then communicate to the WAP using the Wireless Settings assigned within the Wireless Settings page The WAP communication parameters must match those of the pre installed wireless interface card installed within the panel e Wireless Access Points are the cornerstone of any wireless network A Wireless Access Point acts as a bridge between a wired and wireless network It aggregates the traffic from all the wireless clients and forwards it down the network to the switch or router One Wireless Access Point may be all you need However you could need more Wireless Access Points depending on eithe
57. Syntax Add page flip APF lt vt addr range gt lt page flip action gt lt page name gt action to a button Variable if it does not variable text address range 1 4000 page flip action Stan dardPage Flip to standard page Prev iousPage Flip to previous page Show Popup Show Popup page Hide Popup Hide Popup page Togg lePopup Toggle popup state ClearG roup Clear popup page group from all pages ClearP age Clear all popup pages from a page with the specified page name ClearA Il Clear all popup pages from all pages page name 1 50 ASCII characters already exist Example SEND COMMAND Panel APF 400 Stan Main Page Assigns a button to a standard page flip with page name Main Page A Button Commands Cont ABAT Syntax Append BAT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text gt non unicode text Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BAT 520 1 Enter City Appends the text Enter City to the button s OFF state BAU Same format as UNI Append Syntax unicode text BAU lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt unicode text gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256
58. Touch Panel with Video Kit The Video Kits include the following components Modero VG Series Touch Panel NXD or NXT FG225X XXV Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable CA2250 50 NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 These panels are capable of displaying both Composite video and High Definition Component RGB bringing together both Video and RGB capability together into one panel Modero Video RGB compatible panels utilize an internal NXA RGB interface card combined with an external NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box to accept and display high bandwidth and high quality RGB and HDTV Component video signals An existing Video Kit fitted VG Series touch panel Video only can be upgraded to display RGB input by purchasing a separate NXA RGBKIT These Video RGB panels include those listed below Modero Multimedia Touch Panels VG Series with RGB Kits NXD 1200VG FG2251 61RGB 12 Modero Multimedia WallMount Touch Panel with RGB Kit NXT 1200VG FG2250 61RGB 12 Modero Multimedia Table Top Touch Panel with RGB Kit NXD 1500VG FG2253 61RGB 15 Modero Multimedia WallMount Touch Panel with RGB Kit NXT 1500VG FG2252 61RGB 15 Modero Multimedia Table Top Touch Panel with RGB Kit NXD 1700VG FG2256 61RGB 17 Modero Widescreen WallMount Touch Panel with RGB Kit NXT 1700VG FG2257 61RGB 17 Modero Widescreen Table Top Touch Panel with RGB Kit The RGB Kits include the follow
59. USB device connections cccceeeees 98 Step 4 Using a USB to Configure a Virtual Master using NetLinx Studio 98 Step 5 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections cce 100 Wireless Settings Page Wireless Access Overview sseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 IPSROURING sses eea E NA E RERE AARE ERREN Ra 101 Hot Swapping srasni e sssaaa rases E e Eaa E eaea eaS aaie 101 Configuring a Wireless Connection cssssessssseeccceesseesssssssseeeeesesessesssesseseees 102 Step 1 Configuring the Panel s Wireless IP SettingS sssccccseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeees 102 OO Wireless communication using a DHCP Address csssssssscecessessescsssssssseseeeseesseees 102 Wireless communication using a Static IP Address csccsccccsssssescssssssesessseeessesees 103 Step 2 Configuring the Card s Wireless Security Settings csssssscccsseeeseees 104 Configuring the Modero s wireless card for unsecured access to a WAP200G 104 Configuring the Modero s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G 105 Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G 108 Configuring a Wired Ethernet Connection ccsssssssssccccceeesesssssssssseeeeeeseeeees 109 Step 1 Configuring the Panel s Wired IP SettingS ccccccsssssssssseeeesceeeeeseees 109 IP Settings section Configu
60. WAV files currently played on Modero s may not work on these panels The supported sampling rates for WAV files are Supported WAV Sampling Rates Protected Setup Page 48000 Hz 16000 Hz e 44100 Hz 12000 Hz 32000 Hz 11025 Hz e 24000 Hz 8000 Hz 22050 Hz This button opens the Protected Setup page which centers around the properties used by the panel to properly communicate with the NetLinx Master Refer to both the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section on page 153 and the Protected Setup Page section on page 154 for more detailed information Video Adjustment Slide Out Option Bar Pressing the on screen Video Adjustment button causes an option bar to slide outwards from the Navigation buttons FIG 109 This option bar provides you with three choices Video Adjustment RGB Adjustment and Streaming Adjustment Each of these options corresponds to an on board slot position where the related components reside as seen below As an example pass thru can only be enabled via slot 2 because the information is routed through the NXA RGB card residing in Slot 2 on the board Refer to the following sections for detailed information on each option m Protected m Setup EE a EE A EEE ae TE Video Video RGB Streaming Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment FIG 109 Video Adjustment Slide Out Options Bar Video Adjustment Video Adjustment Page The Video Adjustment page FIG 110
61. Web Port Number keypad 15 Within the keypad enter a unique numeric value to be assigned to the port the VNC Web Server is running on The default value is 5900 16 Press Done when you are finished entering the value The remaining fields within the G4 Web Control Settings section of this page are read only and cannot be altered 17 Press the Up Down arrows on either sides of the G4 Web Control Timeout field to increase or decrease the amount of time the panel can remain idle no cursor movements before the session is closed and the user is disconnected 18 Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page 19 Press the on screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel Verify your NetLinx Master s IP Address and System Number have been properly entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page Using your NetLinx Master to control the G4 panels Refer to your particular NetLinx Master s instruction manual for detailed information on how to download the latest firmware from www amx com This firmware build enables SSL certificate identification and encryption HTTPS communication ICSP data encryption and disables the ability to alter the Master security properties via a TELNET session In order to fully utilize the SSL encryption your web browser should incorporate the an encryption k feature This encryption level is displayed as a Cipher strength NOTE Once the Master s IP Ad
62. collapsed folder containing the state properties for that particular state On Off All 11 Double click the All States symbol to expand this folder FIG 134 and locate the Video Fill field s x Button Properties 1 selected a Button 1 general i vi Button 1 general Ni General Programming States General Programming States Text Color a Text Effect Color I 000000FF Overall Opacity 255 Video Fill Text Color Text Effect Color WE 000000FF Overall Opacity 255 Video Fill streaming video Bitmap none iey Streaming Source udp 1P Port a i composite video Bitmap Justifica componentiRGB video Bitmap Icon Slot streaming video Bitmap Justification center middle Icon Justification center middle Icon Slot Font rial 10 Icon Justification center middle Wp Apply ToAll 4 Prev gt N Ge Apply ToAll 4 Prev p Ne FIG 134 Video Fill Button Properties setting 12 Use the Video Fill drop down arrow to select the Streaming Video option A in FIG 134 13 Within the newly added Streaming Source field enter the Transport Protocol IP Address of the MAX CSE and Target Video Port B in FIG 134 When using a UDP Transport Protocol enter the following into the Streaming Source field udp IP Address of MAX CSE Target Video Port set on the UI page e Our example uses udp 192 199 99 99 5000 Refer to Step 2 Configuring the MA
63. either the panel or the breakout box both units must be power cycled for the panel to detect and display the new BOB firmware version NOTE Firmware Pages and Descriptions Overview This section describes each firmware page and their specific functional elements Setup Navigation Buttons The Setup Navigation Buttons FIG 103 appear on screen when the Setup page is active Exit TO Project D Information EER Panel Information ie eae Time Adjustment TOT Ts Audio Adjustments Modero Setup Navigation Buttons AEA Protected Setup e s TEE Video Adjustment Battery Base AMX FIG 103 Setup Navigation Buttons These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include the specific elements described in the following table Setup Navigation Button Elements Project Information Press the Project Information button to access the Project Information and view the TPD4 project file properties currently loaded on the selected panel read only e Refer to the Project Information Page section on page 136 for more detailed information Panel Information Press the Panel Information button to access the Panel Information page and view panel specific information such as resolution memory etc read only Refer to the Panel Information Page section on page 137 for more detailed information Time Adjustment Press the Time Adjustment button to access the Time Adjustment pa
64. enter the System Number of the NetLinx Master This mode instructs the Modero to search for a Master that uses the same System Number assigned within the Master Connection section and resides on the same Subnet as itself 1 Toggle the blue Type field until Ethernet is selected from the Master Connection section of the System Settings page Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word Auto Press the System Number field to launch a Keypad and enter the value for the system number of the NetLinx Master This value can be obtained from the NetLinx Studio program gt OnLine Tree of the Workspace window Do not alter the IP Settings section of the System Settings page as these fields are not applicable to this connection mode Enter a username and password into their respective fields if the target Master has been previously secured Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page and confirm there is an active connection The NetLinx Master and the Modero panel must both be on the same Subnet NOTE NOTE Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel The G4 Web Control feature allows you to use a PC to interact with a G4 enabled panel via the web This feature works in tandem with the new browser capable NetLinx Security firmware update build 300 or higher G4 Web Control is only avail
65. example if you use TECHPUBS as your SSID you must match this word and the case within both the Network Name SSID field on the touch panel s Network Name SSID field and on the WAP s Basic Wireless Configuration page 8 Leave the Authentication field reading Open System default e Open System Authentication allows any device to join the network if the panel s SSID matches the WAP s SSID An Open System is recommended for communication between Modero panels and an NXA WAP200G e Shared Key Authentication requires that the panel and the Wireless Access Point have the same WEP Key to authenticate 9 Toggle the Encryption field FIG 81 until it reads WEP64 or WEP128 The 64 128 selection reflects the bit level of encryption security This WEP encryption level must match the encryption level being used on the WAP WEP will not work unless the same Default Key is set on both the panel and the Wireless Access Point For example if you have your Wireless Access Point set to default key 4 which was 01 02 03 04 05 you must set the panel s key 4 to 01 02 03 04 05 10 Toggle the Default Key field until the you ve chosen a WEP Key value from 1 4 that matches what you ll be using on your target WAP200G These WEP Key identifier values must match for both devices 11 With the proper WEP Key value displayed press the Generate button to launch the WEP Passphrase keyboard If you are wanting to have your target WAP oth
66. field If a character is typed and that characters appear in the Next Field list the keyboard should move the focus to the next field For example when entering time a is used as a next field character If you hit 1 2 the 1 is entered in the current field hours and then the focus is moved to the next field and 2 is entered in that field When entering time in a 12 hour format entry of AM and PM is required Instead of adding AM PM to the input mask specification the AM PM should be handled within the NetLinx code This allows a programmer to show hide and provide discrete feedback for AM and PM Input mask output examples The following are some common input masking examples Output Examples Common Name Input Mask Input IP Address Quad 0 255 Any value from 0 to 255 Hour 1 12 Any value from 1 to 12 Minute Second 0 59 Any value from 0 to 59 Frames 0 29 Any value from 0 to 29 Phone Numbers 999 000 0000 555 555 5555 Zip Code 00000 9999 75082 4567 NOTE URL Resources A URL can be broken into several parts For example the URL http www amx com company info home asp This URL indicates that the protocol in use is http HyperText Transport Protocol and that the information resides on a host machine named www amx com The image on that host machine is given an assignment by the program name of company info home asp Active Server Page The exact meaning of this nam
67. field and press Done when finished Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page FIG 79 Check with your System Administrator for a pre reserved Static IP Address assigned to the panel This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel continues 4 2 FP PN g 11 12 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to Static The IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway fields then become user editable red Press the ZP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address provided by your System Administrator Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard enter the Primary DNS Address provided by your System Administrator and press Done when compete Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS field Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard enter the resolvable domain Address this is provided by your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel and press Done when complete Setup the security a
68. field displays the current number of users connected to the target panel via the web This value cannot exceed the Maximum number field G4 Web Control Timeout Sets the length of time in minutes the panel can remain idle no cursor movements before the session is closed and the user is disconnected e Minimum value 0 minutes panel never times out Maximum value 240 minutes panel times out after 240 minutes 4hours tm a Manage WebControl Connections A G4 Web Control Cee aw Settings G4 Web Control Timeout TY ep 7 FIG 121 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and Mange WebControl Connections window Refer to the Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel section on page 116 for more detailed instructions on how to use the G4 Web Control page with the new web based NetLinx Security application Sensor Setup Page The Sensor Setup page FIG 122 allows you to adjust the Light and Motion Sensor parameters on a Modero touch panel gt Dim Mode Minimum Bnahtness S IN on ep VA 1 A FIG 122 Sensor Setup page average light level The DIM mode Min Level can never exceed the DIM Mode Max A light level value between the Minimum and Maximum DIM Mode values delivers an Level NOTE The elements of the Sensor Setup page are described in the table below Sensor Setup Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page
69. in the System Tray A Virtual NetLinx Master VNM is used when the target panel is not connected to a physical NetLinx Master In this situation the PC takes on the functions of a Master via a Virtual NetLinx Master This connection is made by either using the PC s NOTE Ethernet Address via TCP IP using a known PC s IP Address as the Master or using a direct mini USB connection to communicate directly to the panel 10 Navigate back to the System Settings page Step 3 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections 1 Navigate to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt and double click the System icon to launch the System Properties dialog 2 Select the Hardware tab and click on the Device Manager button to launch the Device Manager dialog e Within the Device Manager dialog the AMX USBLAN device appears under Network Adapters FIG 76 and has a unique name such as AMX USB LAN LINK 2 The number changes depending on which recognized panel is currently connected Device Manager Action view e gt am 2 oe Computer H E Disk drives H Display adapters 23 DVD CD ROM drives H Floppy disk controllers Network adapters qratedtFesk Ethernet Controller 3C905C TX Compatible USB connected touch E A Ports tome panel showing the E a SCSI and RAID controllers recognized panel EQ Sound video and game controllers H Storage volumes System devices H z Universal Serial
70. into the Target Audio Port field This field corresponds to the port on the destination device where the audio only portion of the stream is being directed to This value can not match the value entered into the Target Port field above If using UDP as a Transport Protocol this field becomes greyed out and unused since the both the audio and video content is being combined into a single stream e For the purposes of these procedures we are not required to enter a Target Audio Port value because the A V content is not begin streamed separately FIG 130 Aey M cancer Encoder Profile Profile Home Theater Max MPEG2 6Mbps 485Kbps e ive 192Kbps te Stream Transport Upp Protocol Target 192 99 99 99 Address These port values must use Ti ti Por E2 even numbers Target 5 Audio Port FIG 130 Stream Profiles page showing a sample configuration NOTE NOTE 14 Click the Apply button to save the encoding profiles to the MAX CSE If using RTP both the Target Port and Target Audio Port must be different and should use even numbers Step 3 Configuring the MAX CSE audio video inputs 1 Complete the MAX CSE connection and wiring procedures outlined within the Wiring the MAX CSE connectors and cables section of the MAX CSE Instruction Manual Access the A V Setup page FIG 131 by clicking the A V Setup link from withi
71. is sent from the on board microphone on the front panel Selecting audio files for playback is configured through TPDesign4 RJ 45 port for 10 100 Mbps communication The Ethernet port automatically negotiates the connection speed 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and whether to use half duplex or full duplex mode Ethernet 10 100 port These panels communicate with the NetLinx Master using the ICSP protocol over Ethernet Ethernet 10 100 LEDs LEDs show communication activity and connection information A activity Yellow LED lights when receiving or transmitting Ethernet data packets L link Green LED lights when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly PWR connector 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector Stereo Output connector Stereo output through a 3 5mm mini jack for use with external speakers ee 1500VG Panel Specifications Cont Rear Panel Components Cont USB connector 2 Mini USB connector Side panel location on NXD Wall Mount panels e The two Type A USB ports can connect up to two external keyboard or mouse devices for use with Virtual PC applications e These ports can be used to communicate to a PC and transfer pass thru touch control from the external devices thru the NXA AVB RGB to the PC and then back again Refer to the Preparing your panel for Pass Thru Control using the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box section on page 26 e 5 pin Mini USB c
72. monitor the current battery charge levels and charge qualities The Combined Charge Status bargraph indicates the combined power charge available from both internal battery connection slots bargraph range 0 100 The Battery One Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge available on the Slot 1 internal battery connection bargraph range 0 100 The Battery One Quality bargraph indicates the physical capacity quality of the battery Quality is the percentage of actual capacity vs its rated capacity For optimal performance a battery should be replaced when the quality rating drops below 80 The Battery Two Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge available on the Slot 2 internal battery connection range 0 100 The Battery Two Quality bargraph indicates the physical capacity quality of the battery Quality is the percentage of actual capacity vs its rated capacity The Base Version field indicates the firmware version being used by the NXA BASE B Battery Base connected to the NXT Modero panel The Battery Level Port field indicates the port being used to report the combined charge status level back to the NetLinx Master on set in TPD4 The Battery Level field indicates the level being used to report the combined charge status level back to the NetLinx Master on set in TPD4 Battery Power Brightness Limit The DISABLE DISABLED button acts as a power save feature with t
73. of the Workspace window A in FIG 95 pies 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FIG 95 Using USB for a Virtual Master transfer ponpon Modero femware w2 57 16 Buk on 067 12007 12006 15006 1700 6 ermar MIPS Rocthome for Moeder vit 0205 14 mge MIPS anme Lira Keerd for NOGe 1 200 NOSE 200VG t y J De saon enr aR T y P a Sen lnm Select the panel s KIT file from the Files section Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window The Port field is greyed out Click the Reboot Device checkbox This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update process is complete The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has finished Click Send to begin the transfer The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom right of the dialog B in FIG 95 As the panel is rebooting temporarily unplug the USB connector on the panel until the panel has completely restarted Reconnect the USB connector to the panel Right click the associated System number and select Refresh System This causes a refresh of all project systems establishes a new connection to the Master and populates the System list with devices on your particular system Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version Upgrading the Modero Firmw
74. on the Setup page Use the Wake Panel UP DN buttons to alter the sensitivity value Range 0 100 e The horizontal WAKE PANEL SENSITIVITY bargraph indicates the current motion sensitivity value associated with waking the panel from a timeout Dim Mode Minimum Allows you to alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor Brightness Toggle the Enable Enabled button to either active inactive the DIM Mode feature Enable activates this feature Once active by receiving a value below the Dim Mode Min Level value the current light level ramps to the DIM Mode value within a few seconds Enabled illuminated when selected deactivates this feature Use the DIM Mode Brightness UP DN buttons to alter the DIM level Range 0 100 The lower the value the darker a room must be before the LCD Brightness value changes to conform to a DIM room and vice versa with a higher value The DIM Mode Minimum Brightness bargraph indicates the current DIM Mode Brightness level This level corresponds to the brightness level of the LCD used when the DIM Mode is active The Brightness value of the panel in a DIM room low light is much less than that of a Non DIM well to brightly lit where the LCD Brightness must be higher to display the screen content clearly There is a relationship between the motion sensor and the panel sleep feature If a panel is set to Sleep Mode there is a time delay before
75. panels and FIG 23 for Wall Mount panels Outer Housing NXA PC180211G wireless card location I O connector plate Eight Housing Screws FIG 20 Location of the Compact Flash card and I O plate on NXT 2 Insert the tip of a grounded flathead screwdriver into one of the card removal grooves located on either side of the card and gently pry the card out of the slot FIG 21 Repeat this process on the opposite card removal groove This alternating action causes the card to wiggle away from the on board connector pins 3 Grip the old card by its sides and then carefully pull it out of the slot er Oa Card removal grooves On board Compact Flash connector with pins Insert with arrow facing towards the pins Connector opening FIG 21 Removing installing a Compact Flash Memory card 4 Remove the new CF memory card from it s anti static bag 5 Grip the sides of the new CF memory card and firmly insert it into the slot opening with the arrow facing towards the pins until the contact pins are completely inside the flash card and it is then securely attached to the pin sockets 6 To complete the upgrade process close and resecure the panel enclosure using the procedures in the following step Any new internal component upgrade is detected by the panel only after power is cycled NOTE Step 5 Close and Resecure the NXT Panel Enclosure 1 Obtain the new RGB I O conne
76. phono connectors DIN plugs sockets and 0 25 6 3mm or 3 5mm jack plugs sockets Unbalanced audio is adequate for most domestic environments and for line level signals in a typical broadcast studio Problems may occur if the signals are carried over long distances especially if the source and destination have separate main supplies Use the following wiring drawing FIG 5 to configure an unbalanced audio connection When using unbalanced audio for the AUDIO IN connector FIG 5 the and the GND terminals should be connected together and then connected to the GND of the unbalance audio signal When connecting to an unbalanced audio input from the MIC OUT connector FIG 5 wire the terminal to the signal input and the GND terminal to the signal ground Unbalanced IN Left Channel Jumper IN to GND Unbalanced IN Right Channel Jumper IN to GND AUDIO IN MIC OUT GND OUT OUT Microphone Unbalanced OUT FIG 5 Wiring the rear AUDIO IN and MIC OUT for use with Unbalanced Audio Wiring the NXA AVB RGB for Balanced Audio Professional audio equipment will often use balanced audio inputs and outputs usually on 3 pin XLR connectors A balanced audio signal consists of a pair of wires carrying the audio signal in anti phase with each other if one wire carries a positive voltage the other carries an equal and opposite negative voltage The advantage of balanced audio over unbalanced audio is its
77. select from several location and size adjustment settings Press the Adjust button to open the RGB Geometry popup dialog e Use the Hide button to close the popup Range 0 255 default 0 H Position Use the UP DN buttons to alter the horizontal position level Range 0 255 default 0 H Size Use the UP DN buttons to alter the horizontal size level Range 0 255 default 0 V Position Use the UP DN buttons to alter the vertical position level Range 0 255 default 0 RGB Adjustment Page Elements Cont All Brightness Red Brightness Green Brightness Blue Brightness Provides an on screen RGB Brightness popup dialog that allows you to select from several brightness level adjustment settings The bargraph only serves to give the user a visual indication of the individual brightness levels and launch the RGB Brightness popup dialog Use the UP DN buttons to alter the overall RGB brightness levels of the NXA RGB card e Press the All Brightness bargraph to open the RGB Brightness popup dialog e Use the Hide button to close the popup Range 0 255 Use the slider bar to alter the brightness of the red color value Range 0 255 default 115 For more accurate control you will have to go into the Full Screen Edit Mode described in the following section Use the slider bar to alter the brightness of the green color value Range 0 255 default 120 e
78. the Program information is optional and not picked up by the panel 4 With the panel now loaded with the new TPD4 project containing the streaming media page popup button navigate from the initially displayed main page to the page containing the Streaming Video Fill button which we created in the previous step It should now be displaying the audio and video from the incoming stream e Ifthe audio level is not sufficient you can either go back and create a volume control button or go to the Modero s Audio firmware page and adjust the value assigned to the Master Volume for the panel e If there is no video being displayed on the page e Navigate to the firmware pages by pressing the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page and then press the on screen Video Adjustment button causing an option bar to slide outwards from the Navigation buttons e Click on the Streaming Adjustment button to launch the Streaming Video Adjustment page and confirm that the panel is at least receiving the signal FIG 136 ZON Video Adjustment Settings Video Settings See Brngntness Gontrast Incoming Video signal Once done making your screen adjustments SAVE SETTINGS FIG 136 Video Adjustment page showing default values e If there is no signal displayed return to the MAX CSE UI pages and from the Encoder Profiles page confirm that the correct panel IP Address and target port where entered int
79. the configured Modero panel 9 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page 10 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page 11 Press the System Settings button located on the Protected Setup page to open the System Settings page FIG 73 and begin configuring the communication settings on the panel to match those of the target Master ra Back System Settings Modero IP Settings v Master Connection NetLinx Master s connection connection information C cp information 19216216232 OoJ 1921621622 d 192162297 d 192 162 29 9 MACA O eee azos aa eyes factory set to a unique address N yN FIG 73 System Settings page There are 2 possible Master Connection Types available USB or Ethernet A USB connection type is a direct connection from the panel s mini USB port to a corresponding USB port on the PC acting as a Virtual Master NOTE An Ethernet connection type involves indirect communication from the panel to a Master via an Ethernet connection to the network and only when the panel is connected to a power supply If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade the panel flash file system may become WARNING corrupted A It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct connection The mini USB connector MUST be plugged into an already active panel before the C PC c
80. the device is operated at a minimum separation distance from the user and nearby persons Operation of this device at closer distances should be avoided Certifications FCCID CWU WN2301A CE EN 60950 EN 300 328 and RSS 210 FIG 14 FCC Statement Product Specifications NXA PCI80211G Specifications Dimensions HWD e 0 02 x 2 13 x 4 66 5 0 mm x 54 0 mm x 118 4 mm Description Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS CCK 802 11g Wireless mini PCI card with detachable antennas Weight 1 05 oz 30g Antenna Type e Dual antenna connector Bus Interface e mini PCI card Typelll B Certifications e FCCID CWU WN2301A CE EN 60950 EN 300 328 and RSS 210and FCCID CWU WN2301A NXA PCI80211G Specifications Cont Features Contains integrated power amplifier PA and low noise amplifier LNA e Diversity Antenna Connectors automatically select the best available signal e Enhanced transmit and receive chains Field installable e Increased sensitivity and multipath tolerance Operates from 2 300 2 500 GHz Operate at ISM frequency bands 2 4GHz with 54Mbps data rate e Pre configured to communicate with current AMX Wireless Access Points e Support for IEEE 802 11b and 802 119 e Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP 64 bit and 128 bit data encryption Frequency Range e Using 802 11b amp g communication 2 412 2 462 GHz North America 2 412 2 484 GHz Japan 2
81. the motion sensor is activated to detect motion By creating a time delay to the detection this allows a user to set the sleep mode and leave the panels detection range In this way the panel doesn t awake immediately after the sleep is active and you move away Using the Automated Brightness Control feature DIM Mode Please follow the steps below to set up Automated Brightness Control 1 Set the lighting conditions in the room to maximum turn On all the lights 2 Set the Maximum Panel Brightness from the Setup page to a comfortable level Sitting in front of the panel you should be able to comfortably see someone sitting behind the panel without being blinded by the panel NOTE NOTE 3 Open the Sensors Setup page FIG 122 on page 158 from the Protected Setup menu sections 4 Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your body Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your movements 5 Set the Maximum brightness of the Dimmer Dim Mode Max Level below the detected drop This will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a normal working environment The maximum upper level of the dimmer should be at least 15 lower than the maximum detected level 6 Set the minimum lighting conditions in the room not complete darkness but the minimal lighting setup unless complete darkn
82. the right side of the panel 3 Re install and secure the four pan head Housing Screws into their pre drilled holes along the edges of the MB TP17 back box FIG 52 and secure them using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver Place the I O connector plate back over the connector opening and align the connector locations 5 Resecure the I O connector plate using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver and resecure the Stereo Output nut on the Stereo Output jack Ten 6 32 screws 4 Internal panel casing amp amp amp amp x DO NOT REMOVE securing amp MB TP17 back box 62 0033 50 Strain relief grommet Clip facing up Rim of the strain relief grommet should lie flush against enclosure hole locations 2 on each side S Four pan head Housing Screws Four 8 32 screws Rear plastic cover 60 0033 50 j FIG 52 Location of the attachment screws on the NXD back box and VESA housing Cable Installation for the MP TP17 Back Box 1 Connect the cable connectors RJ 45 Ethernet and any other audio video wiring to their respective locations along the side of the touch panel Use the tie wrap 45 0009A to wrap the cables together inside the VESA Mount enclosure This cable tie is used to insure the cable will not pull through or work itself through the new larger strain relief grommet 45 0032 01 over time Thread th
83. their original locations so they can fit into their provided openings on a Battery Base 3 While holding the outer housing and base plate at a 45 to prevent it from sliding use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to remove the eight Housing Screws Unscrew these eight Housing Screws to remove the circuit board housing DO NOT REMOVE these screws They secure the speakers to the main board Base plate Outer housing Hinge Brackets 2 FIG 15 Location of the attachment screws on an NXT panel 4 Rotate the panel back over while gripping the entire unit with outer housing and rest the base back on a flat surface 5 Gently tilt the LCD backward to a 45 angle u CAUTION Eight Housing In a single motion carefully pull the outer housing up and then out away from the LCD panel to expose the internal circuit board FIG 19 The NXA RGB card is available within both the optional RGB Kit and NXA RGBKIT upgrade Unscrew the Stereo Output nut from the Stereo Output jack Firmly grab the existing connector plate and slide it up and away from the base This part is later replaced with the RGB connector plate Step 2 Install the 802 11g mini PCI Wireless Card Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object 2 Locate the mini PCI card connector on the main board FIG 16 and FIG 17 Outer Housing NXA PC180211G wireless card location
84. to internal components If you are also installing an NXA RGB card as part of an NXA RGBKIT refer to the installation procedures on page 22 before replacing the outer housing Step 3 Install the NXA RGB Card Component NXT 1 2 Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object Locate the RGB card s slot connector on the main board and align it with its counterpart on the bottom of the NXA RGB card Carefully but firmly insert the NXA RGB card into the RGB connector slot on the main board until both the card rests atop the four raised securing holes and the RGB RJ 45 connector is evenly aligned with the other RJ 45 connectors on the back of the panel Use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to secure the four NXA RGB pan head securing screws to the raised securing holes on the main board To complete the upgrade process either upgrade the remaining component Step 3 or close and re secure the enclosure using the procedures in Step 5 Close and Resecure the NXT Panel Enclosure section on page 41 Outer Housing NXA RGB card screw locations 4 RGB I O connector plate FIG 19 Location of the NXA RGB card and I O plate Step 4 Install the Compact Flash Memory Card upgrade 1 Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object and then locate the existing Compact Flash card factory shipped with 128 MB on the main board FIG 20 for Table Top
85. to prevent repetition of the installation Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the attached connectors before being inserted into the conduit box 6 Carefully slide the main NXD unit B in FIG 57 into the conduit box so the Mounting Tab lies flush against the conduit box C in FIG 57 Insert and secure four securing 8 flat head Mounting Screws into their corresponding holes located along the sides of the NXD FIG 57 These 8 screws are not included within the CB Installation Kit and must be provided by the installer Place the magnetic faceplate A in FIG 57 back onto the main NXD unit B in FIG 57 Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations outside the conduit box on either the NXA AVB RGB Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 10 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing the NXD 1700VG into drywall using Expansion Clips Expansion clips are mounted through the four oval holes located along the rim of the NXD 1700VG As the screw is tightened the clip bends toward the insertion hole and into the wall This bending creates a grip on the wal
86. touch panel e Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly before finalizing the installation Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the necessary connectors before being inserted into the solid surface 8 10 Carefully slide the main unit into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs of the NXD unit lie flush against the wall Insert and secure the four 4 screws into their corresponding holes located along the sides of the NXD using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver until the unit is secure and flush against the wall Reinstall the magnetic faceplate A in FIG 45 back onto the main NXD unit B in FIG 45 Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate Attachment is done along the edges of the cutout Flat surface can include a wall podium or other flat surface Install the four 4 mounting screws into the holes screws not included
87. you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the Calibrate button through your VNC window This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above where you can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures Wireless Settings Page The Wireless Settings page FIG 125 sets the communication information for the installed wireless interface card This information includes its corresponding IP communication parameters wireless communication settings and read the device number assigned to the Modero panel These panels can use the optional NXA PCI80211G wireless card for wireless communication This card also supports Wired Encryption Protocol WEP encryption of 64 bit and 128 bit key lengths Refer to both the Wireless Settings Page Wireless Access Overview section on page 101 and Configuring a Wireless Connection section on page 102 for more detailed information of setting up the Modero panel for wireless network access Wireless Settings IP Settings v Wireless Satngs IP Settings section Wireless Settings section Red fields are user editable Blue fields cycle through choices Grey fields are read only FIG 125 Wireless Settings page showing default values The elements of the Wireless Settings page are described in the table below Wireless Settings Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection St
88. 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 TEC Syntax Get the current oTEC lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text effect color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1009 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel TEC 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text effect color information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1009 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT 5088F2AE TEXT LENGTH 9 Button Query Commands Cont TEF Syntax Get the current TEF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text effect name Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1008 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Zero Text String that represents the text effect name Text length Text effect name length Example SEND COMMAND Panel TEF 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text effect name information The result sent to the Mast
89. 12 143 8F Num Lock 144 90 Caps Lock 145 91 Insert 146 92 Delete 147 93 Home 148 94 End 149 95 Page Up 150 96 Page Down 151 97 Scroll Lock 152 98 Pause 153 99 Break 154 9A Print Screen 155 9B SYSRQ 156 9C Tab 157 9D Windows 158 9E Menu 159 9F Up Arrow 160 A0 Down Arrow 161 A1 Left Arrow 162 A2 Right Arrow 192 C0 CTRL key up 193 C1 ALT key up 194 C2 Shift key up ee l Panel Setup Commands These commands are case insensitive Panel Setup Commands AMUT Syntax Set the panel MUT lt mute state gt mute state Variable mute state 0 Mute Off and 1 Mute On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel MUT 1 Sets the panel s master volume to mute PWD PWD sets the level 1 password only Set the page flip Syntax password PWD lt page flip password gt Variables page flip password 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel PWD Main Sets the page flip password to Main PWD Password level is required and must be 1 4 Set the page flip Syntax password PWD lt password level gt lt page flip password gt Variables password level 1 4 page flip password 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel PWD 1 Main Sets the page flip password on Password Level 1 to Main RPP RPP resets the protected password to its default 1988 Reset the Syntax
90. 128 Refer to the Displaying Stream Content section on page 169 for the procedures used to configure the TPD4 touch panel pages and media stream source using MAX CSE for example purposes Battery Base Page This page FIG 115 allows you to alter set the power warning preferences monitor battery status information and alter the display times for the battery warnings The fields on this page are populated with information after the panel is connected to an optional NXA BASE B Battery Base containing up to two NXT BP batteries a Back Battery Base Gharge Status gt 4 38 Time Until Charged PRaneliSnutdown Low Battery Warning b FIG 115 Battery Base page This page is ONLY available on Modero Table Top panels NXT using an NXA BASE B The elements of the Battery Base page are described in the table below Battery Base Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active e A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Charge Status Time Remaining blue indicates the amount of charge time use remaining on the batteries within the connected NXA BASE B
91. 2 60 Hz e IBM 3472 800 x 600 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 80 Hz e SVGA 900 x 720 60 Hz Power PC 7 and Power PC 8 1024 x 768 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz XGA 1280 x 768 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz e WXGA 1280 x 800 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz e WXGA 1152 x 864 60 Hz 70 Hz 75 Hz XGA 1280 x 1024 60 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz SXGA 1600 x 1200 60 Hz e UXGA Component HDTV Compatible signals 720 x 483 e HD 480p SMPTE 293M 1280 x 720 e HD 720p SMPTE 296M 1920 x 1080 e HD 1080i SMPTE 27 4M RGB RJ 45 connection and wiring information This RJ 45 connector is used to route the signals connected to the RGB Component input port on the rear of the AVB RGB Breakout Box to the VG Series Modero panel Standard CATS cable can be used for this connection with short cable runs under 50 feet 15 24 m For cable runs over 50 feet 15 24 m AMX recommends using the Belden Brilliance VideoTwist 7987 This Belden cable is not CATS compliant but is designed to control skew between the red green and blue video signals Therefore for longer cable runs the video quality will be much higher using the Belden VideoTwist 7987 cable versus standard CATS or other Ethernet compliant cables The pinout of this RGB connector is given in the table below The Belden cable only adjusts for RGB skew but may still need to be configured properly for cable length by using the Cable Variance setting on the RGB Adjustment page Video Adjustment RGB Adjustment Page section on
92. 2050Hz 16000Hz 12000Hz 11025Hz and 8000Hz Certifications e FCC Part 15 Class B CE and EN 60950 Supported Transport Protocols RTP MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Transport Stream UDP MPEG 2 Transport Stream Supported Audio Codecs Advanced Audio Coding AAC MPEG Audio Level 2 MP2 MPEG Audio Level 3 MP3 Supported Video Codecs MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Button Assignments Button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels Button channel range 1 4000 button push and Feedback per address port Button variable text range 1 4000 per address port Button states range 1 256 General Button 1 Off State 2 On State Level range 1 600 default level value 0 255 can be set up to 1 65535 Address port range 1 100 1700VG Panel Specifications Cont Front Panel Components Light sensor e Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness a dim room results in a dimmer LCD display and a bright room results in a brighter LCD display Note The light sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup Page section on page 158 Motion sensor PIR e Proximity Infrared Detector to wake the panel when the panel is approached e Activation range 20 vertically from center and 45 horizontally from center Note The motion sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup Page section on page 158 Front setup ac
93. 412 2 472 GHz Europe ETSI 2 457 2 462 GHz Spain 2 457 2 472 GHz France Media Access Technique e CSMA CA with ACK Modulation e Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM Complementary Code Keying CCK Network Architecture Ad hoc mode Peer to Peer e Infrastructure mode Network Standard e IEEE Compliant 802 11b and 802 11g Operating Channels e Using 802 11b amp g communication 11 Ch 1 11 North America 14 Ch 1 14 Japan 13 Ch 1 13 Europe ETSI 2 Ch 10 11 Spain 4 Ch 10 13 France Operating Environment e Temperature 0 C 55 C 32 F to 131 F operating and 20 C 70 C 4 F to 158 F storage e Humidity non condensing 5 90 RH operating and non condensing 5 95 RH storage Operating Voltage e 3 3V 5 I O supply voltage Power Consumption 802 11b communication RX 300 mA TX 64 mA Sleep 12mA 802 11g communication RX 330 mA TX 575 mA Sleep 12mA Radio Data Rate e 802 11g compliant 1 2 5 5 11 DSSS CCK 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 OFDM Mbps data rates Receiver Sensitivity e Using 802 11b communication 1 Mbps 86 dBm max 2 Mbps 84 dBm max 5 5 Mbps 83 dBm max 11 Mbps 80 dBm max e Using 802 11g communication 1 Mbps 86 dBm max 2 Mbps 84 dBm max 5 5 Mbps 83 dBm max 11 Mbps 80 dBm m
94. 5 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 5 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 2JSI Syntax Get the current 23SI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt icon ar Variable justification variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1006 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 1 9 justify Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel JSI 529 1 Gets the button OFF state icon justification information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1006 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 6 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 Button Query Commands Cont JST Syntax Get the current 2JST lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text ae Variable justification variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1004 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 1 9 justify Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel JST 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text justification information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1004 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 1 VALUE3
95. 7 back box and attached cables rotate the entire unit over and lie it on a flat level surface 7 Note the available mounting contact surface area on the rear plastic cover FIG 53 This area represents the space available for use with a VESA connector plate 83 21MM mi 3 83 97MM p ff PSH i paw a Le 1 84 47MM 4 06 103MM ___ 1 FIG 53 MB TP17 Mounting contact surface area 8 Insert and secure the ten 6 32 securing screws into their pre drilled holes along the edges of the NXD unit FIG 52 This step secures the NXD unit to the rim of the rear plastic cover 9 Align a VESA mount connector purchased separately to the four 8 32 screw holes on the back of the rear plastic cover FIG 53 10 Insert the four provided 8 32 screws through the VESA mount s four holes and then into the pre drilled holes on the rear plastic cover When installing a VESA mount to the rear plastic cover use only the AMX provided 8 32 screws CAUTION 11 Secure these four 8 32 screws to the rear plastic cover by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver This step secures the VESA mount to the rear of the panel er a Rear plastic cover rear view __ Rim of the strain relief grommet should lie flush against enclosure CLIP FACING UP a VESA mount connection location II p USE ONLY AMX PROVIDED 8 32 scre
96. Adjustments page these RGB image controls provide you with UP DN arrows for accurate value entry adjustments These controls allow you to set the RGB properties of the incoming image video on the NXA RGB One of the first things to look at when trying to adjust your image is the Phase value Adjustments to this value can help troubleshoot most image issues Use the UP DN Phase buttons to alter the RGB tracking signal level of the incoming image video These values cycle back thru 0 and on after reaching 31 Use the UP DN H Position buttons from the RGB Geometry popup dialog to adjust the horizontal location and move the image left right on the screen These values cycle back thru 0 and on after reaching 255 Use the UP DN H Size buttons from the RGB Geometry popup dialog to adjust the horizontal height and stretch the image on the screen These values cycle back thru 0 and on after reaching 255 Use the UP DN V Position buttons from the RGB Geometry popup dialog to adjust the vertical location and move the image up down on the screen These values cycle back thru 0 and on after reaching 255 Use the UP DN Brightness buttons from the RGB Brightness popup dialog to adjust either the overall or individual Red Green and Blue brightness of the incoming image video The All Brightness bargraph gives a visual representation of the overall brightness level and cycles through an entire turn 8 Use the UP DN Contrast buttons from t
97. Bus controllers FIG 76 Device Manager dialog showing USB device To remove the USB driver association from a previously connected touch panel you must navigate back to the Device Manager right click on the panel s USB driver example AMX USB LAN LINK 2 and select Uninstall from the context menu and then OK e Once the system completes the removal of the device the Device Manager window will refresh and the device will no longer appear e The next time this device is connected to the computer it will appear as a new hardware device and will need to be associated again with the driver refer to Step 2 Confirming the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC section on page 96 Step 4 Using a USB to Configure a Virtual Master using NetLinx Studio PC ONLY the USB connection option must be selected within the Type field Since When configuring your panel to communicate via USB with a Virtual Master on your this is a direct connection the PC s IP Address is not needed NOTE Before beginning 1 Verify the panel has been configured to communicate via USB within the System Settings page and that the USB driver has been properly configured Refer to the previous section for more information 2 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 3 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Maste
98. C Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement This transmi
99. CHG SLOT 1 of the NXT CHG has the ability to completely discharge and recharge recalibrate a battery Recalibration improves the reporting accuracy of the battery charge back to the a Modero panel NOTE Powering the NXT CHG The NXT CHG Smart Battery Charger uses an included power supply to charge inserted batteries 1 2 3 Connect the rear of the NXT CHG to the power adapter Connect the power adapter to the provided power cord with plug Provide power to the unit by connecting the power cord with plug into a power outlet that meets the requirements outlined in the Specifications section for the NXT CHG Reading NXT CHG LED Indicator FIG 32 shows the components on the NXT CHG Smart Battery Charger Slot 1 recalibration Slot 1 Slot 2 LED Slot 2 LED Recalibrate Pushbutton FIG 32 Component locations on the NXT CHG There is one LED indicator on the front of each battery slot that indicates the status of that slot The blink patterns for these LEDs are described in the following table Off No battery detected e Green Flashing Fast charging e Green Solid Fully charged e Yellow Flashing Recalibration in process e Yellow Green Recalibration complete Yellow Solid Standby waiting for other battery to charge e Red Flash Error problem with either the battery connection to the internal slot or with the battery itself Charging the NXT BP batteries using the NXT C
100. COMMAND Panel GLH 500 1000 Changes the bargraph upper limit to 1000 GLL Change the bargraph lower limit Syntax GLL lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph low gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph limit range 1 65535 bargraph lower limit range Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GLL 500 150 Changes the bargraph lower limit to 150 GRD Change the bargraph ramp down time in 1 10th of a Syntax GRD lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph ramp down time gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph slider color or joystick cursor color second bargraph ramp down time In 1 10th of a second intervals Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GRD 500 200 Changes the bargraph ramp down time to 20 seconds AGRU Syntax Change the GRU lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph ramp up time gt bargraph Variable ramp up time in 4 10th of a variable text address range 1 4000 second bargraph ramp up time In 1 10th of a second intervals Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GRU 500 100 Changes the bargraph ramp up time to 10 seconds AGSC A user can also assign the color by Name and R G B value RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA Change the Syntax GSC lt vt addr range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 185 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel
101. Dark Pink 95 0 48 72 White 255 255 255 73 Grey1 238 238 238 74 Grey3 204 204 204 75 Grey5 170 170 170 76 Grey7 136 136 136 77 Grey9 102 102 102 78 Grey4 187 187 187 79 Grey6 153 153 153 er aS NOTE RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors Cont Index No Name Red Green Blue 80 Grey8 119 119 119 81 Grey10 85 85 85 82 Grey12 51 51 51 83 Grey13 34 34 34 84 Grey2 221 221 221 85 Grey11 68 68 68 86 Grey14 17 17 17 87 Black 0 0 0 255 TRANSPARENT 99 53 99 Font styles and ID numbers Font styles can be used to program the text fonts on buttons sliders and pages The following chart shows the default font type and their respective ID numbers generated by TPDesign4 Default Font Styles and ID Numbers Font ID Font type Size Font ID Font type Size 1 Courier New 9 19 Arial 9 2 Courier New 12 20 Arial 10 3 Courier New 18 21 Arial 12 4 Courier New 26 22 Arial 14 5 Courier New 32 23 Arial 16 6 Courier New 18 24 Arial 18 7 Courier New 26 25 Arial 20 8 Courier New 34 26 Arial 24 9 AMX Bold 14 27 Arial 36 10 AMX Bold 20 28 Arial Bold 10 11 AMX Bold 36 29 Arial Bold 8 32 Variable Fonts start at 32 You must import fonts into a TPDesign4 project file The font ID numbers are assigned by TPDesign4 These values are also listed in the Generate Programmer s Report Border styles The TPDesign4 Touch
102. Device E xi r Location CA w r Eiles File Name Modified 5 5 53 5 55 5555555 2010_ki v2_30_130 kit 03 08 2004 10 5 Description Madero Firmware v2 40 60 03 03 04 2250_10D_v2_40_60 kit 03 03 2004 05 2 onene 2250_504_V2 kit 03 09 2004 10 0 Firmware C Boot Version v0 20 21 Target PPC Firmware C Kernel Firmwar whl Mersion v2 4 17 35 X are do oad 4 gt status m Target Progress Device 10001 Port 7 System ia Sending file amx2250kernel_v2_4_1 4 a Comm TCPAIP 192 192 192 99 1319 File 2 of 6 Please Wait M Reboot Device t Device value and System number must match the values listed in the Workspace window FIG 98 Send to NetLinx Device dialog showing Modero firmware update via IP 11 Click Close after the panel reboots to return to the main program 12 Right click the associated System number and select Refresh System This causes a refresh of all project systems establishes a new connection to the Master and populates the System list with devices on your particular system Upgrading Accessory Devices via an IP Address The following accessory devices are firmware upgradeable e NXA BASE B Battery Base FG2255 10 e NXA RGB card FG2260 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 These devices are not given a unique device numbers which would ordinarily appear within the Online Tree tab of NetLinx Studio They appear below the target which they are either communicating with NXA AVB
103. Devices 5 00000 NXC ME260 64M AMX Corp v3 00 316 Showing the current Modero J 10501 1200 Touch Panel AMX Corp v2 55 78 lt i panel firmware version and JB 10506 1700VG Touch Panel AMX Corp 2 56 12 device number H E 32001 NSX Application AMX Qorp 2 30 Shows NetLinx Studio Masters Devices Ports version number J 1 J 4 J 13 Display Cy Workspace TE online Tree FIG 94 NetLinx Workspace window showing panel connection via a Virtual NetLinx Master The panel firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel Download the latest firmware file from www amx com and then save the KIT file to your computer NOTE Ble Gdt yew Boet bjd Qegnostkcs Cebus Tools Settings Window Hebb Dos tuga see PRR aA SEO Rees If the panel firmware being used is not current download the latest Kit file by first logging in to www amx com and then navigate to Tech Center gt Firmware Files and from within the Modero section of the web page locate your Modero panel Click on the desired Kit file link and after you ve accepted the Licensing Agreement verify you have downloaded the Modero Kit file to a known location From within Studio select Tools gt Firmware Transfers gt Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog B in FIG 95 Verify the panel s System and Device number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab
104. ENTS icant sescensdvcecdnatsenli taveta saanane re neasa naaa eas e isean 179 Page Commands oss5cssvccratastxnicscenscaabaneccagentieuesansencasanbesannansetaugusds cauestupmesnenmnentaaesce 179 Programming NUMBEMS ssiccsiccsescsvcncssceiscacsassscenssnctoussscascestssecvetesensost rav issss tessi ses 185 RGB triplets and names for basic 88 colors essseeesesseessessresseereeesreeeresseereesseeereeeeeeresss 185 Font styles and ID NUMbDeGrS s 00 scccccescticeceeecdvessecesessesceteeseusecevesdeacecseseccerssseedv essecoubesees 187 Border Eia C E E E E E 188 An Button Commands oi 5s csises vaeveasosindeaudencaepedsaxeavatiepsents bens ndeossadabernadenten rs eiie 190 Text Effect Names a siasssssssessscassisissinveniensissvacsdancsans etansasessobdamnvenussaseiapbeanksanneeieneanssu 211 Button Query Commands cciceciscssscesccesssesecvascuntivsnassnnssoubsnnsssnnenens sedeivaessashvssaivetenss 212 Panel Runtime Operations sseseseseseesosesosesosssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessseseceeeeeseeeeeoe 221 INPUT COMMANGS sas ssicdncciiosesaiecasancysnsavedeswatones ssvevenndavod ansdoonvernsascecessndesssaotorsenrsesvens 225 e Embedded Codes ccccsccscccsccsccscccsccscssccscceccescccccscesccsccsccscccsccsccccesccsccsccscesees 227 Panel Setup Commands sos score nsecnucsnsens naan vceccons cond vcdedecestacsivadevens pana coedous asensi 228 Dynamic Image COMMIS oi caccrerscntesescccentsetsecersdeaens es cosvnsedevevespooswersscteb
105. ETUP SETUP page Example SEND COMMAND Panel SETUP Sends the panel to the Setup Page SHUTDOWN Syntax Shut down the SHUTDOWN batteries providing Example power to the SEND COMMAND Panel SHUTDOWN anel i Shuts down the batteries feeding power to the panel This function saves the battery from discharging SLEEP Syntax Force the panel SLEEP into screen saver Example mode SEND COMMAND Panel SLEEP Forces the panel into screen saver mode Panel Runtime Operation Commands Cont SOU Play a sound file Syntax SOU lt sound name gt Variables sound name Name of the sound file Supported sound file formats are WAV amp MP3 Example SEND COMMAND Panel SOU Music wav Plays the Music wav file TKP Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified The Prompt Text is Present a optional telephone Syntax keypad TKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel TKP 999 222 1211 Enter Phone Number Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 999 222 1211 with prompt text Enter Phone Number TPAGEON This command turns On page tracking whereby when the page or popups change a Turn On page string is sent to the Master This string may be captured with a CREATE_BUFFER tracking command for
106. FG2254 11 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 Included within the Video Kit FGxxxx xV is the following Modero VG Touch Panel NXD NXT 1200 1500 1700VG Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable CA2250 50 NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 1700VG Panel Specifications Cont Other AMX Equipment Several items are included within both the Video and RGB Kits Any items not specifically included within those kits are considered optional CB TP17 FG034 10 17 metallic conduit box for Wall Mount installations e CC USB Type A to Mini B 5 Wire programming cable FG10 5965 e Kensington Lock Bracket FG2259 10 optional only with NXTs e MAX CSE MAX Video Encoder FG2178 70 e MB TP17 Universal VESA Mounting Box for 17 WallMount panels FG033 50 Black metallic VESA back box 62 0033 50 Black plastic cover with grommet opening 60 0033 50 Four Phillips pan head screws 8 32 x 0 50 Black 80 0146 02 Tie Wrap Large 45 0009A for use with NXA MTC RGB Ten Under cut Phillips head screws 6 32 x 0 500 Black 80 0139 Strain relief grommet 45 0004 03 for use with CA2250 50 Universal VESA Mount grommet 45 0032 01 for use with NXA MTC RGB NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 Also comes included within Video
107. For more accurate control you will have to go into the Full Screen Edit Mode described in the following section Use the slider bar to alter the brightness of the blue color value Range 0 255 default 100 For more accurate control you will have to go into the Full Screen Edit Mode described in the following section All Contrast Red Contrast Green Contrast Blue Contrast Provides an on screen RGB Contrast popup dialog that allows you to select from several contrast level adjustment settings The bargraph only serves to give the user a visual indication of the individual contrast levels and launch the RGB Contrast popup dialog Use the UP DN buttons to alter the overall RGB contrast levels of the NXA RGB card Press the All Brightness bargraph to open the RGB Brightness popup dialog Use the Hide button to close the popup Range 0 255 Use the slider bar to alter the contrast of the red color value e Range 0 255 default 60 e For more accurate control you will have to go into the Full Screen Edit Mode described in the following section Use the slider bar to alter the contrast of the green color value Range 0 255 default 60 For more accurate control you will have to go into the Full Screen Edit Mode described in the following section Use the slider bar to alter the contrast of the blue color value Range 0 255 default 60 For more acc
108. GSC 500 12 Changes the bargraph or joystick slider color to Yellow A Button Commands Cont GSN Change the bargraph slider name or joystick cursor name Slider names and cursor names can be found in the TPDesign4 slider name and cursor drop down list Syntax GSN lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph slider name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph slider name See table below Bargraph Slider Names None Ball Circle L Circle M Circle S Precision Rectangle L Rectangle M Rectangle S Windows Windows Active Joystick Cursor Names None Arrow Ball Circle Crosshairs Gunsight Hand Metal Spiral Target View Finder Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GSN 500 Bal1 Changes the bargraph slider name or the Joystick cursor name to Ball ICO Set the icon to a button Syntax TCO lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt icon index gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state icon index range 0 9900 a value of 0 is clear Example SEND_COMMAND Panel ICO 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the icon for On and Off states for buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 A Button Commands Cont JSB Set bitmap picture alignme
109. HG 1 Review the Checking the NXT BP battery charge section on page 46 to confirm the percentage of charge remaining on the batteries Provide power to the charger as outlined in the Powering the NXT CHG section on page 50 Align the battery connector with the corresponding charge slot within each of the two NXT CHG slots Firmly insert the battery into the desired slot until the battery is both securely located within the slot and there is activity from the corresponding Slot LED Refer to the Reading NXT CHG LED Indicator section on page 50 section for LED information NOTE Recalibrating the batteries The recalibration process increases the accuracy of the battery charge level Recalibration of the batteries is only done upon request from the Modero on screen Battery Base page Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 151 for more detailed Battery Base page information Recalibration can only be done with Slot 1 on the NXT CHG 1 Place the selected battery securely into Slot 1 left slot until there is activity on the Slot 1 LED 2 Push the Recalibration pushbutton located between the two slots to initiate recalibration in the left bay only Touch Pa el Accessories Installation Procedures 12 and 15 Panels NOTE V NOTE V NOTE Overview NXT panels are mounted onto flat horizontal surfaces in either a stand alone or combo NXT atop an NXA BASE B battery base configuration N
110. IS EEE ESE A E E O 1 y J f L 3 l 5 3 17 MM MAX RADIUS ALLOWED l k RNERS OF NOTCHES NC 125 3 17 MM MAX RADIUS i IN 4 CORNERS iH a i Top notches are l HESE NOTCHES ARE ONLY REQUIRED not symmetrical F S INSTALLED USING i Aa x Connectors 1 N re wK i a i CUTOUT J A f LJ a Left Side BEL Right Side 4 14 105 22 MM 3 64 92 49 MM FIG 59 NXD 1700VG Wall Mount panel dimensions using expansion clips 5 Remove the magnetic faceplate bezel A in FIG 60 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 60 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force 6 Follow the procedures outlined within Steps 1 5 on page 42 thru page 43 to carefully reinstall the LCD panel back into the back box housing Four notches are required if the gt unit is installed in drywall using the four provided Install the four dr i ywall expansion n drywall clip clips 13 554 sets included into 34 43 cm these holes Mounting Tab Notching of one or more stud beams may be required if the unit is not framed into the wall B Main NXD unit consists of the LCD panel and back box housing A Faceplate bezel FIG 60 Wall Mount panel NXD installation using expansion clips 7 Carefully lay the separated LCD from the main unit onto a soft cloth resting on a level surfa
111. LY AFTER the base has been installed onto the bottom of the NXT panel Having batteries in the base before connection can damage the battery base e Verify your NXA BASE B is securely attached to the bottom of the NXT panel Once the base is secured side out the battery compartment and install the batteries into the battery base Once the batteries are installed close the compartment e Reconnect all rear connectors to the NXT panel 1 Complete the instructions for configuring the NetLinx Master for IP communication found in the Step 1 Prepare the Master for communication via an IP section on page 125 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page 3 Press the Battery Base button to open the Battery Base page FIG 100 NOTE Battery Base Charge Status y a3 Panel Shutdown vY o 4 Battery Rower Bngitness Lint S Y ap i Very Low Battery Warming Aa io ae 4 b Low Battery pyas 4 b A A A FIG 100 Battery Base page The battery base firmware is shown on the right of the Battery Base page Verify you have downloaded the latest firmware file from www amx com and then save the KIT file to your computer Step 2 Upgrade the NXA BASE B firmware via an IP 1 Click on the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System The default System value is one 2 Right click the associated System number from the Workspace and select Refresh System to
112. MX Equipment Cont e NXT CHG FG2250 50 Battery charger for NXT BP batteries Charges batteries in 8 hours Upgrade Compact Flash factory programmed with firmware NXA CFTPV256M 256 MB V VG compact flash card FG2116 43 NXA CFTPV512M 512 MB V VG compact flash card FG2116 44 NXA CFTPV1G 1 GB V VG compact flash card FG2116 45 Product Specifications NXD 1500VG and NXT 1500VG The following table outlines the specifications for VG Series of 15 Modero panels 1500VG Panel Specifications Dimensions HWD NXD 1500VG with faceplate 14 37 x 15 20 x 3 31 36 50 cm x 38 61 cm x 8 40 cm e NXT 1500VG Fully raised 12 94 x 14 95 x 11 73 32 87 cm x 37 97 cm x 29 78 cm NXT 1500VG Fully lowered 7 45 x 14 95 x 11 72 18 92 cm x 37 97 cm x 29 77 cm CB TP15 conduit wallbox 13 48 x 14 18 x 3 49 34 24 cm x 36 00 cm x 8 85 cm MB TP15 VESA mounting box 14 37 x 15 19 x 3 59 36 50 cm x 38 59 cm x 9 12 cm Power Requirements e Constant current draw 3 7 A 12 VDC stand alone Startup current draw 5 5 A 12 VDC stand alone Memory factory default 256 MB on board memory 128 MB Compact Flash upgradeable to 1 GB factory programmed Weight NXD 1500VG 13 45 Ibs 6 10 kg e NXT 1500VG 17 15 Ibs 7 78 kg Panel LCD Parameters Aspect Ratio 4 x 3 Brightness luminance 400 cd m e Channel transparency 8 bit Alpha channel transparency Contrast ratio 300 1
113. N RELIEF GROMMET IS CLOSED IT IS DIFFICULT TO RE OPEN 4 Carefully apply pressure to close the strain relief grommet over the desired cable location Verify the Strain Relief Grommet is securely closed over the cables and the clip is facing the correct direction upwards The process of securing the strain relief grommet may require the use of pliers Also verify the length and location of the inserted cables Once the strain relief grommet is closed it is difficult to re open 5 80 20MM Firmly push the Strain Relief Grommet into the opening toward the inside until the rim is securely flush against the back of the rear plastic cover FIG 34 Securely grasp both sides of the NXD panel with LCD MB TP12 15 back box and attached cables rotate the entire unit over and lie it on a flat level surface Note the available mounting contact surface area on the rear plastic cover of the MB TP12 FIG 35 and MB TP15 FIG 36 This area represents the space available for use with a VESA connector plate 4 2 52 64M M L 2 61 66MM 3 55 90MM Lag FIG 35 MB TP12 Mounting contact surface area 8 10 Insert and secure the twelve 6 32 securing screws into their pre drilled holes along the edges of the NXD unit FIG 34 This step secures the NXD unit to the rim of the rear plastic cover Align a VESA mount connector purchased separate
114. NXD unit B in FIG 42 Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate 12 Connect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations on either the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 13 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing the NXD into a Flat Surface using 4 screws Mounting screws 4 not included are secured through circular holes located at the left and right sides of the NXD panel The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD is that the outer frame Mounting Tabs must be installed flush against the mounting surface e Itis recommended that you cutout the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments 1 Prepare the area by removing any screws or nails from the surface before beginning the cutout process 2 Cut out the surface for the 12 inch Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG 43 and for the 15 inch Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG 44 ie 12 5850 319 7MM 11 5070 292 3MM T Tes iM ya 1 T i 2 1485 54 6MM o o _ R13 R3 2MM MAX RADIUS IN 4 CORNERS 11 2970 286 9MM lt CUTBUT 12 3750 314 3MM 7 0000 177 8MM BEZEL THESE 4
115. Panel ADBEEP Outputs a double beep even if beep is Off AKB Pop up the keyboard icon and initialize the text Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost The Prompt Text is optional Syntax AKB lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt keyboard icon and initialize the text string to that specified Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKB Texas Enter State Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string Texas with prompt text Enter State AKEYB Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost Pop up the Syntax AKEYB lt initial text gt keypad icon and initialize the text string to that Variables specified initial text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKEYB This is a Test Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string This is a Test AKEYP The keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost Pop up the Syntax AKEYP lt number string gt string to that Variables specified number string 0 9999 Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKEP 12345 Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 12345 AKEYR Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using AKEYB AKEYP PKEYP Remove the AKB AKP PKP EKP or TKP commands Keyboard Syntax Key
116. RGB or a part of NXA BASE B or NXA RGB card as seen below in FIG 99 The only way to upgrade the firmware of an accessory item is to send the accessory s firmware through a target panel Its this panel s device number which is entered within the Send to NetLinx Device transfer dialog in Studio NOTE DP WARNING Target Panel Device Back RGB Adjustment Settings v NXA RGB firmware NXA AVB RGB BOB version NetLinx Studio Online Tree tab Accessory s corresponding firmware page FIG 99 Location of Firmware version information within NetLinx Studio Firmware can also be downloaded to accessory items via a direct USB connection using the PC as a Virtual Master Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port section on page 121 In this case you will still need to know the System and Device Number information of the target panel For a more detailed description of how to setup this type of connection refer to the Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master section on page 95 Step 1 Prepare the NXA BASE B for firmware transfer Before beginning with this section e Unplug any connectors from the rear of the NXT panel power Ethernet etc e Refer to the Installing the NXA BASE B to an NXT Modero Panel section on page 46 for installation procedures to mount the NXT atop the battery base DO NOT PLACE BATTERIES IN THE BASE BEFORE CONNECTING IT TO THE NXT PANEL Insert batteries into the NXA BASE B ON
117. SB connector 7 ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page THEN insert the mini USB connector into the Program Port on the panel It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the PC indicated by a green System Connection icon e Ifa few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green complete the procedures in the following section to setup the Virtual Master and refresh the System from the Online Tree This action sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication turning the System Connection icon green 8 Navigate back to the System Settings page Step 2 Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication via the USB port 1 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 2 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master Communication Settings dialog FIG 93 Avadable Syed Corgon Settings Gp No Acive SptemOeled Setingn gt Tetra Setterge The Vitani Nel ra Master comnecton allows GE kuch panel to onrat deact to Nerline Stato inead of a phyncal Natira Mates os tke knees IP Address of computer not needed as this is a direct USB connection NOTE Charges bo the System Number of the Vetusl NetLirw Master val net take effect ure al commurvesnont have been wopped and mL 1a FIG 93 Ass
118. SB connector is securely inserted into the PC s USB port The panel must be powered on before connecting the mini USB connector to the panel latest NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 applications will cause a failure in the USB driver installation WARNING This driver must first be saved to the PC as part of the new NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 application installations A Establishing a USB connection between the PC and the panel prior to installing the Step 1 Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type 1 After the installation of the USB driver has been completed confirm the proper installation of the large Type A USB connector to the PC s USB port and restart your machine 2 After the panel powers up press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page 3 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page 4 Toggle the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to USB a a ALL fields are then greyed out and read only but still display any previous network information NOTE 5 Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page 6 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that the panel s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the U
119. V Series or VG Series of panels 4 Choose the default language agree to the Licensing information and choose the location for the file installations C Program Files AMX USBLAN 5 From within the Choose Components dialog select the features you wish to install The Driver option is selected by default and is the only item required 6 Click the Install button to continue with the installation 7 Once the application begins the installation of the corresponding USB driver files it may encounter cases where previous versions of these files already exist This can occur if you have previously installed release versions of NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 e If you are prompted to replace the AXBLAN INF file select YES e If you are prompted to replace the Checked driver file select NO e If you are prompted to replace the AXBLAN SYS and AXFILT SYS files select Yes 8 Continue the setup process by following these OS related processes e For machines running Windows 2000 simply click the Next button when the installation is complete Creating a restore point is not an available option in 2000 es NOTE NOTE e For Windows XP machines the setup program asks if you would like to create a restore point It is always a good idea to create restore points prior to installing new software Click the Next button when done 9 At the end of the installation press the Finish button Step 2 Confirming the Installation of t
120. VB RGB to the PC and then back again Refer to the Preparing your panel for Pass Thru Control using the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box section on page 26 5 pin Mini USB connector used for programming firmware update and touch panel file transfer between the PC and the target panel Note When connecting the panel to PC using a CC USB or compatible cable be sure to power the panel On before attempting to connect the USB cable from the PC to the mini USB port on the panel Refer to the Step 5 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections section on page 100 for more information Operating Storage Environment Operating Temperature 10 C 50 F to 40 C 104 F Operating Humidity 20 to 85 RH e Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 to 85 RH Included Accessories e Installation Kit for 12 and 17 NXD panels KA2251 01 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Four Drywall clips 62 5924 05 and 6 sheet metal screws One CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black e Installation Kit for 15 and 17 NXT panels KA2251 04 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 One CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black e Included within the RGB Kit FGxxxx xxRGB is the following Modero VG Touch Panel NXD NXT 1200 1500 1700VG NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box
121. X CSE for communication section on page 172 The MAX CSE is available from either the front LCD FIG 135 or from the IP Settings page of the UI FIG 135 Example of the current display e When using an RTP Transport Protocol determine whether you are using an MPEG 2 or MPEG 4 stream and enter the following into the Streaming Source field rtpmpeg IP Address of MAX CSE Target Video Port e Although our example doesn t use RTP you could enter the following for MPEG 2 rtpmpeg2 192 199 99 99 5000 for MPEG 4 rtpmpeg4 192 199 99 99 5000 field because the firmware already assumes the audio port value to be 2 greater than Modero doesn t require that an audio port be entered within the Streaming Source the value set for the video port NOTE 14 Create buttons on both this project s main page and within this Video page which can allow the user to navigate between both pages 15 Save these pages and after establishing a connection upload this project to the target Modero panel Step 5 Establishing the final connection between the two units 1 Start playing the media at its source DVD VCR camera etc 2 While in the UI pages log back in if not already connected navigate to the Administration page by clicking on the Admin link from the left Navigation frame 3 Locate the Mode section of this page and click the Play button to begin streaming the incoming media content to the targeted Modero panel For these procedures
122. X Com 01 02 05 13 gm 010 5 Sensor AMX Corp 0 48 gm 010 6 Opt File System AMX Corp v01 02 18 J 010 6 Frogs AMX Corp v0 14 BB 010 10 Video DSP CPU AMX Corp 2 02 09 BB 010 14 RGB HCS12 AMX Corp v1 11 A 010215 RGB FPGA AMX Corp 71 01 JA 010 18 RGB BOB AMX Corp Q aaee Statua Frain Flos Png ries Fin Toned Ready Ron Paton Pust Disabled f_Vatual NetLinx MasterSys1_ FaW FIG 78 Using USB for Virtual Master communication Wireless Settings Page Wireless Access Overview IP Routing The behavior of the wireless routing is largely dependent on the wired network interface Although the panel can be connected to two networks simultaneously it may only have one gateway If the wired network was successfully set up and a gateway was obtained then the default route for all network traffic will be via the wired network In the event that the wired network was not configured then the default route for all network traffic will be via the wireless network The wired network connection always takes priority As an example e Imagine a panel connected to two networks A amp B A is the wired network and B is the wireless network If the Master controller is on either of these networks then it will be reached However if the Master controller is on a different network C then determining which network interface wired or wireless that will be used is dependent on the gateway Hot
123. XD panels are installed into either a pre wall surface using a CB TP12 CB TP15 conduit wallbox or a solid surface using either solid surface or drywall screws It is recommended that if you are planning on upgrading your panel components flash wireless RGB card you do so before beginning any panel installations Unpacking the Panel 1 Inspect and confirm the contents of the shipment box to verify that you have all specified parts Refer to the Specifications sections on page 2 and page 7 for more information about included accessories and other AMX equipment 2 Carefully remove the panel from the shipping box Carefully peel the protective plastic cover from the LCD If the protective plastic LCD cover is not removed the panel may not respond properly to touch points on the LCD or allow proper screen calibration Installing Internal Components Installation of the internal components such as the NXA PCI80211G Wireless card and NXA RGB Interface card are described in detail within the following sections Step 2 Install the 802 11g mini PCI Wireless Card section on page 38 Step 3 Install the NXA RGB Card Component NXT section on page 39 Upgrading to the MB TP12 MB TP15 VESA Mounting Kit Upgrading the existing back box with the new VESA Mounting Kit on both the 12 FG031 50 and 15 panel FG032 50 is identical and requires 3 main processes e Removing the pre existing back box and installing the new VESA back bo
124. a border value for those buttons with a defined address range Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 188 for more information Syntax BOR lt vt addr range gt lt border style name or border value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 border style name Refer to the TPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 188 border value 0 41 Examples SEND_COMMAND Panel BOR 500 504 amp 510 515 10 Sets the border by number 10 to those buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 SEND_COMMAND Panel BOR 500 504 amp 510 AMX Elite M Sets the border by name AMX Elite to those buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 The border style is available through the TPDesign4 border style drop down list Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 188 for more information BOS Set the video window slot ID to the new Slot ID The new Slot ID is set only if the specified slot is not the same as the current slot selected Pass thru sets the pass thru mode to On This is an optional parameter and ONLY passes data to the PC Syntax BOS lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt slot number gt lt pass thru gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state slot number 0 No V
125. ability to reject external interference added as the signal is carried over the wire The receiving equipment takes the voltage difference between the two wires as the input signal Interference will usually get added to both wires equally and so gets cancelled by the receiving equipment The 3 wires used in a typical XLR lead are often referred to as Ground Live Hot and Return Cold Live and Return carry the in phase and out of phase versions of the audio respectively The pins of the XLR plug socket are as follows X Ground e L Live Hot R Return Cold When connecting the MIC OUT connector to a balanced audio input FIG 6 use all three audio terminals and GND then connect the terminal to the live signal the terminal to the return signal and the GND terminal to the ground signal Ground signal GND OUT OUT Return signal Balanced OUT Line signal FIG 6 Wiring the rear MIC OUT connector for use with Balanced Audio NOTE NOTE Preparing your panel for Pass Thru Control using the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Pass thru control allows the NXA AVB RGB to act as a control bridge between the USB input signals coming from a touch panel via the NXA RGB card and a target computer e The pass thru is routed from the USB Input device through the panel then through internal NXA RGB card and to the front RGB RJ 45 connector on the NXA AVB RGB From there the signal is routed
126. able with the latest Modero panel firmware Refer to the G4 Web Control Page section on page 156 for more detailed field information Verify your NetLinx Master ME260 64 or NI Series has been installed with the latest firmware KIT file from www amx com Refer to your NetLinx Master Instruction Manual for more detailed information on the use of the new web based NetLinx Security 1 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page 2 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 3 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field 1988 is the default password Clearing Password 5 from the initial Password Setup page removes the need for you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page 4 Press Done when finished 5 Press the G4 Web Control button to open the G4 Web Control page FIG 88 G4 Web Control G4 Web Control Settings y G4 Web Control Timeout a3 WY FIG 88 G4 Web Control page 6 Press the Enable Enabled button until it toggles to Enabled light blue color 7 The Network Interface Select field is read only and displays the method of communication to the web Verify you have selected the proper interface connection as this field does not auto detect the connection type being used see below e Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being u
127. ack box housing 5 Cut out the surface for the Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG 61 18 09 459 44 MM BEZEL p52 13 37 MM 17 03 432 66 MM 53 13 40 MM CUTOUT gt A aac E A ae J t T 1 i if iT l 12 94 74 79 MM i _ 125 3 17 MM MAX RADIUS f IN 4 CORNERS al Ce _ 1 f 14 44 366 88 MM i l BEZEL i THESE 4 HOLES ARE ONLY REQUIRED WHEN MOUNTING UNIT TO A SOLID 13 39 340 08 MM ODIUM DESK Se ECU i SECURE UNIT WITH 4 S f u 4 i 17 50 190 50 MM i i i i i i i 1 i i i i i I I i l ach 1 l i i i aumai 12 94 74 79 MM i F CUTOUT I J ik Fi l l i T oE SEES EE E EPEE EE ESA eee eet oe eee ee EE eee 7 i 17 4 32 MM NO 17 4 34 MM BEZEL 17 37 441 33 MM FIG 61 NXD 1700VG Wall Mount panel dimensions using 4 mounting screws 6 Remove the magnetic faceplate bezel A in FIG 62 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 62 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force Notching of one or more stud beams may be required if the unit is not 13 554 framed into the wall 34 43 cm Install the four 6 Mounting Screws into the holes screws not included Mounting Tab B Main NXD unit consists of A Faceplate the touch panel and housing bezel FIG 62 Wall Mount panel NXD installation us
128. an recognize the connection and assign an appropriate USB driver This driver is part of the latest TPDesign4 software application installation NOTE Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master NetLinx Studio can be setup to run a Virtual Master where the PC acts as the Master by supplying its own IP Address for communication to the panel The PC is first equipped with the USB driver the panel is then configured for USB communication and then Studio is configured to act as the Master For a personal computer to establish a connection to a Modero panel via USB the target computer must have the appropriate AMX USB driver installed This installation is bundled into the latest TPDesign4 software setup process or can be downloaded independently from the main Application Files page on www amx com Step 1 Setting up the USB Driver on the PC 1 Ifyou do not currently have the latest version of TPDesign4 navigate to www amx com gt Tech Center gt Downloadable Files gt Application Files gt NetLinx Design Tools section of the website and locate the AMX USB Driver executable AMX USBLAN Setup exe Download this executable file to a known location on your computer 3 Launch the file by double clicking on it and follow the on screen prompts to complete your installation Note that even if you have loaded the latest AMX Studio or TPD4 software you will still need to download and install this file if you are working with either the 1200
129. and Excellent Green color text indicates better communication quality It reports the quality of the signal over the air direct sequence spread spectrum Even when the link quality is at its lowest you still have a connection and with it the ability to transmit and receive data even if at much lower speeds Note Both Link Quality and Signal Strength are applicable to the RF connection only It is quite possible to have an RF signal to a Wireless Access Point but be unable to communicate with it because of either incorrect IP or encryption settings Signal Strength SNR Signal Noise Ratio is a measure of the relative strength of a wireless RF connection This indicator displays a description of the signal strength from the Wireless Access Point connection The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent Green color text indicates better signal strength e Given this value and the link quality above a user can determine the noise level component of SNR Ex If the signal strength is high but the link quality is low then the cause of the link degradation is noise However if the signal strength is low and the link quality is low the cause would simply be signal strength Data Rate The data rate in Mbps at which the panel is currently communicating with a target WAP at dynamic e As you move closer to the target WAP and both the signal strength quality the data
130. anel RMF Sports_Image ALab_Test Images Ftest jpg Changes the resource Sports_Image file name to test jpg and the path to Lab_Test Images RSR Change the refresh rate for a given resource Syntax RSR lt resource name gt lt refresh rate gt Variable resource name 1 50 ASCII characters refresh rate Measured in seconds Example SEND_COMMAND Panel RSR Sports_Image 5 Sets the refresh rate to 5 seconds for the given resource Sports_Image Dynamic Image Commands Cont RAF Add new resources Adds any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data Syntax RAF lt resource name gt lt data gt Variable resource name 1 50 ASCII characters data Refers to the embedded codes see table below Embedded Codes Parameter Embedded Code Description protocol P lt Q 1 gt Set protocol HTTP 0 or FTP 1 user U lt user gt Set Username for authentication password S lt password gt Set Password for authentication host H lt host gt Set Host Name fully qualified DNS or IP Address file F lt file gt Full path to the location of the file or program that will return the resource The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus the protocol and host The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape sequences and in the case of the FTP protocol regular exp
131. anel and contains e The Enable Enabled button allows you to toggle between the two G4 activation settings Enable deactivates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel Enabled activates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel and allows an external PC running a VNC client to access the panel after the remaining fields are configured Displays the detected method of communication to the web e Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being used for communication to the web This is a default setting if no wireless interface card is detected by the panel e Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card slot This method provides an indirect communication to the web via a pre configured Wireless Access Point Allows you to enter a unique alpha numeric string that is used as the display name of the panel within the Manage WebControl Connections window of the new NetLinx Security browser window e This Web Control tab displays a G4 icon alongside the link to the Web Control Name given to this panel FIG 121 Allows you to enter the G4 Authentication session password associated for VNC web access of this panel Allows you to enter the port value that the VNC Web Server runs on Default value is 5900 This read only field displays the maximum number of users that can be simultaneously connected to the target panel via the web e Default value is 1 This read only
132. anty whichever is greater Products that are returned and exhibit signs of damage or unauthorized use will be processed under the Non Warranty Repair Policy AMX will continue to provide Warranty Repair Services for products discontinued or replaced by a Product Discontinuance Notice Non Warranty Repair Policy Products that do not qualify to be repaired under the Warranty Repair Policy due to age of the product or Condition of the prod uct may be repaired utilizing this service The AMX Authorized Partner must contact AMX Technical Support to validate the failure before pursuing this service Non warranty repair is a billable service Products repaired under this policy will carry a ninety 90 day warranty on material and labor AMX will notify the AMX Authorized Partner with the cost of repair if cost is greater than the Standard Repair Fee within five 5 days of receipt The AMX Authorized Partner must provide a Purchase Order or credit card number within five 5 days of notification or the product will be returned to the AMX Authorized Partner The AMX Authorized Partner will be responsible for in bound and out bound freight expenses Products will be repaired within ten 10 business days after AMX Authorized Partner approval is obtained Non repairable products will be returned to the AMX Authorized Partner with an explanation See AMX Non Warranty Repair Price List for minimum and Standard Repair Fees and policies FC
133. are via an IP Address Before beginning with this section verify that your panel is powered and connected to the NetLinx Master through an Ethernet connection direct or wireless Step 1 Prepare the Master for communication via an IP 1 Obtain the IP Address of the NetLinx Master from your System Administrator If you do not have an IP Address for the Master refer to your particular Master s instruction manual for more information on obtaining this IP Address using NetLinx Studio 2 e From the Online Tree tab of the Workspace window select the NetLinx Master Follow steps outlined in either the Obtaining or Assigning the Master s IP Address sections from your particular NetLinx Master instruction manual to use an address e Note the IP Address and Gateway information 2 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 3 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master Communication Settings dialog FIG 96 Oneri Setro TCPAP Ades 0000 New Por pas D Automatically Prg thee Maie Cortsciles to Ermua Avaiitiy Litt of AdSesset TOVPURL Descaption Pot Ping Hout vaoo n9 TAE Select New TOPP Setting g or es TCPAP asses ME Pon ISIS F Aionaticaty Prg ihe Mater Concerto ensure aves TTET Pisti Saloction Tharepert Co
134. ase Firmware file Description field for selected KIT file Send to NetLinx Device r Location _100_v2_40_60 kit 03 03 2004_05 2 Jo tens 2250_504_V2 kit 03 09 2004 10 0 onten s Firmware Battery Base Firmware Version 2 07 0 Firmware download status m Target Progress Sending file vtg_v2_03_44 tsk Sa File 4 of 6 Please Wait Device value and System number must match the values listed in the Workspace window FIG 101 Send to NetLinx Device dialog showing NXA BASE B firmware update via IP The firmware for the battery base can not be downloaded directly Download of the KIT file to the BASE B is done through the panel The procedures for updating firmware to the base are nearly identical to those for updating panel firmware except that the KIT file selected must be that of the BASE B 9 Click the Reboot Device checkbox This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update process is complete The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has finished 10 Click Send to begin the transfer The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom right of the dialog FIG 101 11 Click Close on the Send to NetLinx dialog window after the panel reboots to return to the main program 12 Right click the associated System number and select Refresh System This causes a refresh of all project systems establishes a new connection to th
135. ating externally the encryption status of the communicating Master what connection type is being used Ethernet or USB and what System the panel is a part of This visual display of the connection status is also reflected at the upper right of each firmware page This allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active e When a connection is established the message displayed is either Connected via Ethernet or Connected via USB If no connection can be established by the Modero panel it will continue to try and establish a connection while displaying Attempting via The word Encrypted appears only when an encrypted connection is established with a target Master The panel must be rebooted before incorporating any panel communication changes and detecting any active Ethernet connections The Ethernet connection is not detected until after a reboot Display Panel Timeout Sets the length of time the panel can remain idle before activating the sleep mode When the device goes into sleep mode the LCD is powered down Press the UP DN buttons to increase decrease the time until the panel times out Range 0 240 minutes Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the sleep mode Note Display timeout values affect battery performance Small timeout values increase the life of the battery charge Greater timeout
136. atus icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password IP Settings Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel and contains DHCP STATIC Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol assigns IP Addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network from a DHCP server e Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP IP network Note If DHCP is selected the following fields become read only IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS and Domain IP Address Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel Subnet Mask Sets a subnetwork address to the panel e Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages into a particular network segment subnet Gateway Sets a gateway value to the panel e Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between different types of networks applications or acts as a go between for two or more networks that use the same protocols Wireless Settings Page Elements Cont IP Settings Cont Host Name Primary DNS Secondary DNS
137. avec ESEE 229 TROUDIGSHOGLING sassnsissisnnssinnsuatebandsnnnavanunasthansassannssnsowennthinnevoubeuaneennonneenmuauioues 231 APpendiXK sesoreoraneisi e osen ioa nse einen nae ites 235 Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs Joysticks ccccsssscssssssssessseesseeeesseees 235 Text Area Input MASKING weirsiccscasecednenccsnccsactbendoecasereddipscssesenesueteneled isere esiratas iiss 236 Input mask character types e s 0 0 seaceccsecssessoucdescesseateeecesapenseatsesedes pausa ssid Kioii saei eNA 236 jpputmaskranges secasses eeii essee Eeen ease E SEa aara a NE saaa 237 Input mask next field characters cc s iccccccsssssecdcccastencccecesssctidececsoesttvvessctuacsteeseecdorenavsuns 237 Inp t mask OPeratlONns cscccciscscces cess deecsagesecneetvesseessatvectsssstuedeveataigicavesacdencdcusseeetec cesses 237 Input itnask literals s ccoc tessiccsc ssenccyscesssices desvescedteauvussesuctesdussi EE SEA Eee TEE area E SNOREN 237 Input imask output examples ccisccccescs sete cidecssiuecesciscebcecetscetiscesestenizedscteseusstacevenuesssvenss 238 URL RESOURCES ac ssis cressesatwaseasrecaceeseuesacnuseucsnnesauarsnutnmansseneoaseuacubveausamgneunivaesenatoseinee 239 Special escape SOQuences cenieni aeniea eE aie Ee EE aa EESTE ESEE 239 Introduction AMX has taken a quantum leap forward with the release of their new VG Series of Modero touch panels These panels offer streaming MPEG video high definition Component RGB input and display USB suppo
138. ax ee lt EE NXA PCI80211G Specifications Cont Security 64 bit and 128 bit WEP Availability All 1200V Series and VG Series NXT Table Top panels can be field upgraded for wireless communication using the optional NXA PCI80211G mini PCI card Optional to the following NXD panels NXD 1200V NXD 1200VG NXD 1500VG NXD 1700VG Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXT Components Upgrading the components within each of the Table Top panels involves removing the outer housing with speaker plate removing and or installing an existing component and then placing the outer housing back onto the NXT panel as described in the following sections gt Do not use Ethernet cables containing mounting boots These boots could make removal of the Ethernet connectors from the panel difficult and cumbersome NOTE Step 1 Remove the existing NXT Outer Housing 1 Carefully detach all connectors from the rear of the touch panel and then gently place the touch panel LCD facedown onto a soft cloth to expose the under side of the base FIG 15 This step helps prevent scratching of the LCD 2 Tilt the base forward so that both the bottom surface and Housing Screws are easily accessible and then carefully remove the four plastic adhesive feet Reference the location of the four plastic adhesive feet Once the outer housing is placed back onto the panel these feet must be placed back in
139. be recognized by the panel D The battery base cannot be hot swapped A panel receiving power through a 5 Gently apply downward pressure until the panel is securely mounted to the battery base FIG 29 Top view Bottom view Interface connector male lianment Panel Interface 9 connector pegs female Captive fasteners FIG 29 NXA BASE B shown aligning with NXT panel 6 Firmly grip both the panel from the side and battery base from below together 7 Gently place the touch panel LCD facedown onto a soft cloth this prevents scratching of the LCD while the battery base is being secured 8 Locate the captive fasteners on the underside of the battery base by angling the base combo slightly forwards 9 Secure each captive fastener head using a grounded flat head screwdriver until the NXA BASE B is securely attached to the underside of the NXT Modero touch panel 10 Firmly grip the panel LCD base combo and gently rotate the unit back onto the base Installing an NXT BP into the NXA BASE B The battery base does not directly connect to a power supply but rather receives its power directly from the Modero panel through the Panel Interface connector with the installation of the batteries Power can only be supplied after the batteries Remove any connectors from the rear of the Modero NXT panel before continuing have been installed NOTE 1 With the panel mounted on the battery base open th
140. be separated by a colon e Press Done to accept any changes and save the new value e Ex 01 0A 67 F3 56 although this is not necessary and the key may be entered by omitting the colons A 64 bit key will be 10 characters in length while a 128 bit key will be 26 characters in length The length of the key entered determines the level of WEP encryption employed Either 64 bit or 128 bit 128 bit keys may also be entered and are used if supported by the internal wireless card Current Key Displays the current WEP key in use Keys may also be examined by touching the key buttons and noting the keyboard initialization text When working with a single panel and a single WAP it is recommended that you manually enter the Current Key from the WAP into the selected WEP Key e When working with a single WAP and multiple panels it is recommended that you generate a Current Key using the same passphrase on all panels and then enter the panel produced WEP key manually into the Wireless Access Point er Oa Wireless Settings Page Elements Cont Wireless Settings Cont Channel The RF channel being used for connection to the WAP read only e This is determined through the WAP Link Quality Displays the current quality of the link as descriptive colored text from the wireless NIC to the Wireless Access Point in real time The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions None Poor Fair Good Very Good
141. beam Knockouts should be located on the left side of the conduit box alongside the connectors Stud fastening holes Conduit Box can be fastened to both studs Use four 8 flat head Mounting Screws to secure the NXD to the CB re Secure Beam to block Depth depends on the thickness of the Drywall Mounting tabs for NXD Wall Mount panel lt Sal should be flush oe with the outside RN RO of the sheetrock m Notched stud Xe FIG 56 Screw locations for conduit box attachment in a pre wall installation Installation of an NXD 1700VG The NXD 1700VG can be installed either directly into the optional CB TP17 or other solid surface environment using the two different mounting options drywall clips or solid surface screws The following sections describe mounting the touch panel directly into an installed pre wall Conduit Box a solid surface or drywall and optional NXA RK17 Rack Mount Kit Installing the NXD 1700VG within a CB TP17 Conduit Box The conduit box must be mounted prior to continuing this section Refer to the procedures in the Pre wall Installation of the CB TP17 Conduit Box section on page 75 for detailed pre wall installation instructions Verify that all necessary cables have been threaded through the knockouts on the conduit box and the connections have been tested prior to installation of the NXD 1700VG 1 Remove the magnetic faceplate
142. bezel A in FIG 57 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 57 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force 2 Verify the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet and any other audio video cables have been properly threaded through the wiring knockouts on the left of the conduit box Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 3 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter NOTE secure the NXD to A Faceplate Stud od C Optional CB TP17 conduit wallbox Support block Four 8 flat head Mounting Screws Mounting Tab not included the Conduit Box Do not use these tabs to mount the conduit wallbox These are ONLY used to secure the main unit to the CB B Main NXD unit consists of the touch panel and backbox housing bezel FIG 57 Wall Mount panel installation configuration of a CB TP17 in a pre wall construction 4 Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly
143. cation method the NetLinx Master must first or your System Administrator NOTE Before beginning 1 Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable connected from either the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub or to a wirelessly to the Wireless Access Point WAP H Before commencing verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master firmware WARNING 2 Verify that the NetLinx Master is receiving power and is communicating via an Ethernet connection with the PC running NetLinx Studio 3 Connect the terminal end of the 12 VDC compliant power supply cable to the power connector on the rear side of the touch panel 4 Verify the green Ethernet LED from the rear Ethernet port on the Master is illuminated indicating a proper connection 5 Verify the yellow LED from the rear Ethernet port on the Master is blinking indicating communication 6 After the panel powers up press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to proceed to the Setup page 7 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page FIG 84 ra Back System Settings gt IP Settings DA Master Connection 192 162 162 32 255 255 255 0 192 162 1622 Obtained 192 162 29 7 from i 192 162 29 9 NetLinx Master FIG 84 System Settings page Master Connection Virtual Master communication over Ethernet When configuring your panel to communicate with a Virtua
144. ce to prevent scratching of the LCD 8 Insert the back box into the cutout to check for fit Make any adjustments to the dimension of the cutout to accommodate the back box 9 Cutout the notched beam FIG 59 using a height of 13 554 34 43 cm and a depth using the following guideline This notched beam is located on the side of the NXD unit furthest away from the connectors e Calculate the distance from the edge of the mounting ridge FIG 59 to the rear point on the box where the beam touches the back box Our example uses 1 3 8 inches on the deepest point of the rear back box Calculate the thickness of the drywall sheetrock Our example uses 5 8 inches The depth of the notch 1 3 8 minus 5 8 6 8 inches This value reflects the cutout depth necessary for the mounting ridge on the back box to be flush against the surface drywall The MOUNTING TAB MUST BE FLUSH against the drywall and therefore YF The determining factor in the depth of the cut into the beam is the thickness of the the depth of the notch depends on that thickness WARNING 10 Thread the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet and any other audio video wiring from their terminal locations through the cutout opening Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1700VG Panels section on page 87 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel f NOTE O WARNING 11 12 13 Connec
145. cess button Provides both access to the Setup and Calibration pages and toggles the panel between a sleep and wake state When wired sleep status means the backlight is Off When battery operated wireless sleep status means the touch panel base is either Off or suspended Microphone e Used for intercom applications requires an optional NXA AVB RGB or NXA AVBIETHERNET Breakout Box Speakers Stereo output with a frequency response of 450 Hz 7 KHz Rear Panel Components Side panel location on NXD Wall Mount panels RGB connector e This connector is only made available only by using an NXA RGB interface card installed within the touch panel This card is sold either as part of an RGB Kit configuration or within the NXA RGBKIT upgrade kit for previous Video Kit fitted VG Series panels Routes RGB and computer control pass thru signals to from a Modero panel up to 200 ft 60 9 m RJ 45 connector provides RGB Component video signals being routed from the rear RGB Component input ports and touch control information to the RJ 45 RGB connector on the NXA RGB card installed within the panel This connector routes VGA and Component video signals RJ 45 connector for communication of differential audio video signals to from the touch panel panel type dependant This connector receives Composite video Stereo left right audio and microphone audio Video is received via the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Conf
146. ch Panel NXD NXT 1200 1500 1700VG Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable CA2250 50 NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 included only on NXT models optional with NXD models 1200VG Panel Specifications Cont Other AMX Equipment Several items are included within both the Video and RGB Kits Any items not specifically included within those kits can be considered as optional accessories CB TP12 FG031 10 12 metallic conduit box for Wall Mount installations e CC USB Type A to Mini B 5 Wire programming cable FG10 5965 Kensington Lock Bracket FG2259 10 optional only with NXTs MAX CSE MAX Video Encoder FG2178 70 e MB TP12 Universal VESA Mounting Box for 12 WallMount panels FG031 50 Black metallic VESA back box 62 0031 50 Black plastic cover with grommet opening 60 0031 50 Four Phillips pan head screws 8 32 x 0 50 Black 80 0146 02 Tie Wrap Large 45 0009A for use with NXA MTC RGB Twelve Under cut Phillips head screws 6 32 x 0 500 Black 80 0139 Strain relief grommet 45 0004 03 for use with CA2250 50 Universal VESA Mount grommet 45 0032 01 for use with NXA MTC RGB NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 Also comes included within Video Kits NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 Also comes included within RGB Kits e NXA BASE B FG2255 Wireless base for Table Top touch panels NXT models only NXA KLB Kensington Lock
147. coming RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any other audio video wiring from their terminal locations through the cutout opening Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1200VG and 1500VG Panels section on page 68 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 5 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter 6 Test the incoming wiring by attaching the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation 7 Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply 5605 14 2MM 2 6650 67 7MM 15 2000 _ 386 1MM BEZEL _ 14 0790 357 6MM lt CUTDUT 1 0000 25 4MM 1 0000 25 4MM TYP TY TYP 55 0MM w a 5 57 14 2MM I 2500 adil TYF 2130 5 4MM 2 6650 67 7MM AJ R13 R3 2MM MAX RADIUS A R13 R3 2MM MAX RADIUS ALLOWED IN CORNERS OF NOTCHES IN 4 CORNERS Notches are NOT SYMMETRICAL CUTOUT 13 2520 336 6MM CUTOUT
148. communicate to a target WAP such as the NXA WAP200G it is still necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be communicating with This pointing to a Master is done via the System Settings page where you configure the IP Address System Number and Username Password information assigned to the target Master Step 1 Configuring the Panel s Wireless IP Settings The first step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the IP Settings section on the Wireless Settings page The section configures the communication parameters from the Modero panel to the web Wireless communication using a DHCP Address 1 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 2 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished 3 Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page FIG 79 4 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to DHCP This action causes all fields in the IP Settings section other than Host Name to be greyed out DHCP will register the unique MAC Address factory assigned on the panel and gt once the communication setup process is complete assign IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway values being communicated to the panel
149. crews Unscrew these four Housing Screws to remove the back box These make direct contact with the black outer housing FIG 33 Location of the attachment screws on the NXD back box DO NOT REMOVE THE FOUR PANEL SECURING SCREWS These screws secure the LCD to the metallic casing underneath WARNING 7 Lift the back box housing to separate it from the internal panel casing Installing the MP TP12 15 Back Box 1 Unscrew the four pan head Housing screws 8 32 from the MP TP12 15 rear plastic cover 2 Gently place the MP TP12 15 back box over the internal panel casing with the cable routing hole on the right side of the panel 3 Re install and secure the four pan head Housing Screws into their pre drilled holes along the edges of the MB TP12 15 back box FIG 34 and secure them using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver Place the I O connector plate back over the connector opening and align the connector locations Resecure the I O connector plate using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver and resecure the Stereo Output nut on the Stereo Output jack ra amp amp amp amp gi S DO NOT REMOVE Twelve ST 6 32 securing y gt amp S MB TP12 15 back box S Connector Opening f i A Strain relief grommet Clip facing up Rim of the strain relief grommet should lie flush against enclosure Securing hole locations 3 on each side Internal pane
150. cted stud beams Most beams have a distance of about 14 to 16 This is too narrow to accommodate the 17 072 43 36 cm wide CB TP17 conduit box 2 Determine whether one or both of the selected stud beams must be notched FIG 55 The determining factor is the flush alignment of the mounting tabs along the outside of the post wall sheetrock ee NOTE 3 Cutout the notched beam using a height of 13 554 34 43 cm as shown below in FIG 55 and a depth equal to the thickness of the drywall Before After gt Use a block to secure the wA Conduit Box to the 14 to 16 2 Va notched stud F gt a d SN we DN Se gt ae NP f i NN BO 13 554 l 34 43 cm A lal i n aa Pu l I 17 07 43 36 cm Mounting Horizontal _ tabs flush on ae the OUTSIDE upp of sheetrock hle FIG 55 CB TP17 conduit box installation into a notched stud showing before and after installation The determining factor in the depth of the cut into the beam is the thickness of the drywall The mounting tabs MUST BE FLUSH against the drywall and therefore the depth of the notch depends on that thickness 4 10 11 12 Insert one side of the conduit box into the indention on the notched stud and rest the other side of the box against the opposite beam Install and secure a shorter horizontal beam below the c
151. ction represents what attributes will be copied All codes are 2 char pairs that can be separated by comma space percent or just ran together Syntax BMC lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt source port gt lt source address gt lt source state gt lt codes gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state source port 1 100 source address 1 4000 source state 1 256 codes BM Picture Bitmap BR Border CB Border Color CF Fill Color CT Text Color EC Text effect color EF Text effect FT Font IC Icon JB Bitmap alignment JI Icon alignment JT Text alignment LN Lines of video removed OP Opacity SO Button Sound TX Text VI Video slot ID WW Word wrap on off Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMC 425 1 1 500 1 BR Or SEND_COMMAND Panel BMC 425 1 1 500 1 BR Copies the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 500 onto the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 425 Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel BMC 150 1 1 315 1 SBR amp FTSTX BM ICSCFSCT Copies the OFF state border font Text bitmap icon fill color and text color of the button with a variable text address of 315 onto the OFF state border font Text bitmap icon fill color and text color of the button with a variable te
152. ctor plate similar to the original but containing the added RGB connector opening to the newly installed NXA RGB and slide it back into position 2 Resecure the Stereo Output nut back onto the new Stereo Output jack onto the new RGB T O plate With the components securely installed tilt the LCD back to a 45 and then gently slide on the outer housing towards the LCD until the it is aligned over the installation holes and the tilt bracket prevents any further forward movement FIG 19 4 Gently press down on the housing toward the base until it is securely positioned over the circuit board and cover base Use caution when re installing the outer housing Improper re installation can cause damage to the internal speakers CAUTION 5 While holding the circuit board cover in place turn the panel back over until the LCD lies facedown on a soft cloth and the under side of the base is exposed 6 Insert and secure the eight Housing Screws using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver into their respective locations FIG 15 7 Replace any adhesive plastic feet that might have been removed during the removal process of the outer housing These feet must be placed back onto their original locations so they can fit into their provided openings on the Battery Base ee CAUTION 8 Grasp both the LCD and housing and then rotate the entire unit back onto a flat surface 9 Insert all connectors and apply power Installatio
153. d TCP IP Settings for a Virtual Master 4 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog 5 Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate that you are working as a NetLinx Master 6 Click on the Virtual Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate with a panel Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed out because you are not going through the Master s UI 7 Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog FIG 85 8 From within this dialog enter the System number default is 1 and note the IP Address of the target PC being used as the Virtual Master This IP Address can also be obtained by following these procedures On your PC click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog e Enter cmd into the Open field and click OK to open the command DOS prompt e From the C gt command line enter ipconfig to display the IP Address of the PC This information is entered into the Master IP URL field on the panel 9 Click OK three times to close the open dialogs save your settings and return to the main NetLinx Studio application er Oa 10 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 11 Right click on the E
154. d beam on the right and the connector side of the unit pressed into the notched beam on the left Replacement drywall clip sets must be ordered from AMX 17 18 19 20 Tighten the drywall clip sets screws and clips until the Mounting Tabs are securely fastened and flush against the wall Place the magnetic faceplate A in FIG 60 back onto the main NXD unit Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet and any optional audio video wiring to their respective terminal locations on either the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power DP WARNING NOTE Installing the NXD 1700VG into a Flat Surface using 6 screws Mounting screws 6 not included are secured through two sets of circular holes located at the left and right sides of the NXD 1700VG The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD Wall Mount is that the outer frame Mounting Tabs must be installed flush against the mounting surface Most beams have a distance of about 14 to 16 This is too narrow to accommodate the 17 03 43 26 cm wide outer housing back box of the NXD 1700VG INSTALLER LEAVE A GAP BETWEEN THE SURFACE OF THE STUD AND THE BACK BOX MOUNTING RIDGE TO ACCOMMODATE THE DRYWALLI SHEETROCK
155. d the network Wiring the NXA AVB RGB connectors and cables The inputs and outputs on this breakout box are separated into front and rear connectors The rear connectors are used to input external signals The front connectors are used to communicate signals between the NXA AVB RGB and a target Modero panel The front RGB RJ 45 connector both receives one way RGB video signals from the breakout box and uses this same connector as a two way communication point for pass thru control data from the panel s USB connector through to the communicating computer The NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top cable CA2250 70 provides an RJ 45 Ethernet connector for data an RJ 45 connector for Audio Video and a third RJ 45 connector for both pass thru control and RGB signal feed to the panel s internal NXA RGB input card FIG 4 provides a layout of the wiring connection both into and from the breakout box RGB Component In HD 15 GND os a a Microphone Out 4 pin captive wire Audio In Left Channel 6 pin captive wire jnoyealg 5y SAV VXN Audio In Right Channel RGB CATS Audio Video CAT5 6 pin captive wire im Ethernet 12 VDC power out CATS supply Ethernet RJ 45 Power to touch panel Comp Y BNC C BNC FIG 4 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box connector wiring diagram The rear panel wiring connections are described below from left to ri
156. ded Accessories Five pan head securing screws NXA AVB RGB Ethernet RGB Breakout Box QSG 93 2260 This unit is also available within the NXA RGBKit FG2255 11 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top cable CA2250 70 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NXT Table Top replacement I O plate with RGB connector opening 62 2250 59 NXD WallMount replacement adhesive overlay for existing I O plate 53 2250 03 Other AMX Equipment Included within the RGB Kit FGxxxx xxRGB is the following Modero VG Touch Panel NXD NXT 1200 1500 1700VG NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top cable CA2250 70 NXA PC180211G FG2255 04 Table Top Kits ONLY NXA RGB internal RGB VGA card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 e NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 e NXA MTC RGB Modero cable CA2250 70 e NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NOTE Supported Component VGA Video Resolutions and Formats NXA RGB Supported Resolutions and Formats Resolutions Refresh Rates Descriptions VGA Compatible signals 560 x 192 60 Hz e Apple II 560 x 384 60 Hz e MAC 12 640 x 350 60 Hz EGA HP 12 640 x 416 60 Hz DOS machines 640 x 480 60 Hz 72 Hz 75 Hz 85 Hz VGA 720 x 53
157. deo for broadcast quality DECoder or COmpressor signals The MPEG 2 is enhanced by using MPEG 1 s audio MP2 DECompressor component to allow the coding of audio programs with more than two channels Video quality is noticeably higher with MPEG 2 vs MPEG 4 MPEG 4 is currently used as a standard for the web streaming media and CD distribution conversational videophone and broadcast television The biggest difference between these two encoding types is that MPEG 4 uses about 1 3 to 1 2 less bandwidth for the same quality of video Resolution This relates to the display size resolution used by the incoming video stream e Available resolutions D1 default or SIF D1 is a resolution standard In the NTSC system Full D1 means 720x480 pixels 30 fps and in PAL systems full D1 is 720x576 24 fps e SIF Source Interchange Format is a resolution standard defined as 352x240 30fps for NTSC and 352x288 24 fps for PAL Scaling This is the ability of the Modero panel to scale the incoming NTSC or PAL video stream into the following pixel resolutions NTSC format 12 VG Modero panel 360x240 SIF 720x480 D1 and 800x600 15 VG Modero panel 1024x768 17 VG Modero panel 1280x768 PAL format 12 VG Modero panel 360x288 SIF 720x576 D1 and 800x600 15 VG Modero panel 1024x768 17 VG Modero panel 1280x768 Streaming Video Adjustment Page Elements Cont Audio Codec Sh
158. deo signals between the panel and the AVB RGB Breakout Box e 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix power connector to route power from the external breakout box to the target panel Included Accessories One NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top Cable CA2250 70 e One black tie wrap used to join the Ethernet and Power cables Other AMX Equipment Note All 1200V VG Series and CV10 Table Top panels routing an Audio Video signal from a breakout box must use the appropriate number of CAT5 Suppression Ferrites which are included as part of installation kits accompanying your particular Modero panel Each of the following Installation Kits come with the appropriate number of CAT5 Suppression Ferrites These ferrites must be installed onto their appropriate locations e Installation Kit for 12 and 17 NXD panels KA2251 01 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black 80 0114 08 One CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Four Drywall clips 62 5924 05 and 6 metal strips 80 0192 e Installation Kit for 15 NXD panels KA2251 02 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black 80 0114 08 Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Four Drywall clips 62 5924 05 and 6 metal strips 80 0192 i E NXA MTC RGB Specificati Other AMX Equipment ons Cont Installation Kit for 15 NXD panels KA2251 02 2 pin mini Phoenix connector
159. detect of all devices on the current system establish a new connection to the Master and refresh the System list with devices on that system 3 After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the PC and the Master verify the target panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window The default Modero panel value is 10001 The NXA BASE B will not appear on the system listing 4 Locate the latest Kit file by first logging in to www amx com and then navigate to Tech Center gt Firmware Files and from within the Modero section of the web page locate the Modero Battery Base section of the website 5 Click on the desired Kit file link and after you ve accepted the Licensing Agreement verify you have downloaded the Modero Battery Base Kit file to a known location 6 From within Studio select Tools gt Firmware Transfers gt Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog FIG 101 Verify the panel s System and Device number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window 7 Select the battery base s KIT file ending in VXX kit from the Files section FIG 101 8 Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window The Port field is greyed out NOTE NOTE Selected Battery B
160. dless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password In Panel Password Accesses the alphanumeric values associated to particular password sets Change PASSWORD 1 2 3 4 5 protected buttons open a keyboard where you can enter alphanumeric values associated to a selected password group e Clearing Password 5 removes the need to enter a password before accessing the Protected Setup page Calibration Page This page FIG 124 allows you to calibrate the input touch device touch panel using the pre selected touch driver e Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button below the Modero LCD for 6 seconds to access the Calibration page e Press the crosshairs to calibrate the panel and return to the last active firmware page Calibrate The request to touch the crosshairs is the first on screen message Calibration successful is the second on screen message that appear Touch each target in ae f 5 ge ina ppe S turn to calibrate after the calibration process is completed On screen crosshairs used for calibration of the touch device FIG 124 Calibration page actually 3 separate screens If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration page through the panel s firmware you can access this firmware page via G4 WebControl where
161. dress has been set through NetLinx Studio 1 Launch your web browser 2 Enter the IP Address of the target Master ex http 198 198 99 99 into the web browser s Address field 3 Press the Enter key on your keyboard to begin the communication process between the target Master and your computer e Initially the Master Security option is disabled from within the System Security page and no username and password is required for access or configuration Both HTTP and HTTPS Ports are enabled by default via the Manage System gt Server page e Ifthe Master has been previously configured for secured communication click OK to accept the AMX SSL certificate if SSL is enabled and then enter a valid username and password into the fields within the Login dialog 4 Click OK to enter the information and proceed to the Master s Manage WebControl Connections window 5 This Manage WebControl Connections page FIG 90 is accessed by clicking on the Manage connections link within the Web Control section within the Navigation frame Once activated this page displays links to G4 panels running the latest G4 Web Control feature previously setup and activated on the panel Compatible devices field showing G4 WebControl links G4 panels Compression Options FIG 90 Manage WebControl Connections page populated with compatible panels en EEE 6 Click on the G4 panel name link associa
162. e FIG 120 centers around enabling and disabling both the display and control of your panel via the web An external PC running a VNC client installed during the initial communication to the G4 panel makes this possible ranm G4 Web Control ontro Timeout 4 G4 Web Control Settings y G FIG 120 G4 Web Control page Each panel supports the open standard Virtual Network Computing VNC interface These panels contain a VNC server that allows them to accept a connection from any other device running a VNC client Once a connection is established to that target device the client can control the touch panel remotely The elements of the G4 Web Control page are described in the table below G4 Web Control Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active e A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password G4 Web Control Page Elements Cont G4 Web Control Settings Enable Enabled Network Interface Select Web Control Name Web Control Password Web Control Port Maximum Number of Connections Current Connection Count Sets the IP communication values for the touch p
163. e It is recommended that you be in the Full Screen Edit Mode when adjusting skew e Press the Adjust button to open the RGB Skew Adjustment popup dialog e Use the Hide button to close the popup Range 0 63 default 0 Note If you are using a cable run over 50 ft 15 24 meters this can cause the image s RGB colors to become misaligned and your image to appear blurry The skew control then becomes a method or re aligning the delivery times of the individual signals to the terminal NXA RGB card Red skew Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the Red signal delay time in nano seconds Skew Delay 0 63 default 0 Green skew Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the Green signal delay time in nano seconds Skew Delay 0 63 default 0 Blue skew Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the Blue signal delay time in nano seconds Skew Delay 0 63 default 0 Full Screen Edit Mode Pressing the incoming signal area FIG 111 activates the Full Screen Edit mode The on screen popup provides each field with UP DN buttons to more accurately adjust the values for all of the above mentioned RGB parameter fields e This mode causes the incoming signal to be displayed at full screen and places an RGB Adjustments bar on the bottom of the screen e Pressing the bar launches a draggable popup of the RGB adjustment section over the full screen image e This popup allows you to view a full screen version of the signal a
164. e Master and populates the System list with devices on your particular system 13 Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button below the LCD for 3 seconds to access the Setup page 14 Press the Battery Base button to open the Battery Base page and confirm that the version is no longer 0 00 If the Base Version field displays 0 00 this means there was an error in the firmware download process Re install the base firmware and re confirm that the new base version no longer reads 0 00 Upgrading the NXA RGB and NXA AVB RGB Firmware 1 Identify the Device number of the target panel being used for firmware routing to the accessories 2 Complete the instructions for configuring the NetLinx Master for IP communication found in the Step 1 Prepare the Master for communication via an IP section on page 125 3 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page 4 Press the Video Adjustment gt RGB Adjustment buttons to open the RGB Adjustment page FIG 102 This page displays the firmware for both the internal NXA RGB card and the communicating external NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box BOB Firmware version of the NXA RGB card Firmware version of the NXA AVB RGB Incoming signal shown in the background FIG 102 RGB Adjustment page showing the default values 5 Follow the procedures outlined within the Step 2 Upgrade the NXA BASE B firmware via an IP section on page 130 If firmware is updated to
165. e SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicat ing to the same target WAP It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network Toggles between the two authentication modes Open System or Shared Key An Open system network allows connections from any client without authenticating whether that client has permission to associate with the network A Shared key network requires the client to submit a key which is shared by the network Wireless Access Point before it is given permission to associate with the network In this case the key is the same as the WEP encryption key In both cases even after association has taken place if WEP encryption has also been enabled then the client will still require the WEP key to encrypt and decrypt packets in order to communicate successfully with the network Cycles through the available encryption options Clear Text WEP64 and WEP128 Wired Equivalent Privacy is an 802 11 security protocol for wireless networks The WEP encryption method is designed to provide the equivalent security available in wireline networks e Clear Text causes network packets to be sent out as unencrypted text WEP64 enab
166. e TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab Slots section l lt icon 01 9900 0 clear gt Set the icon using values of 01 9900 icon numbers are assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab Slots section J lt alignment of text 1 9 gt As shown the following telephone keypad alignment chart 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 8 JT lt alignment of text 0 9 gt As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart BUT the 0 zero is absolute and followed by lt left gt lt top gt JB lt alignment of bitmap picture 0 9 gt As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart BUT the 0 zero is absolute and followed by lt left gt lt top gt J lt alignment of icon 0 9 gt As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart BUT the 0 zero is absolute and followed by lt left gt lt top gt A Button Commands Cont ABMF Cont For some of these commands and values refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 185 CF lt on fill color gt Set Fill Color CB lt on border color gt Set Border Color CT lt on text color gt Set Text Color SW lt 1 or 0 gt Show hide a button SO lt sound gt Set the button sound EN lt 1 or 0 gt Enable disable a button WW lt 1 or 0 gt Word wrap On Off GH lt bargraph hi gt Set the bargraph uppe
167. e Verify there is an active Ethernet connection attached to the rear of the Modero before beginning these procedures Select Diagnostics gt Network Address from the Main menu and verify the System number If the IP Address field is still empty give the Modero a few minutes to negotiate a DHCP Address and try again My NXT BP battery pack is blinking when I check the battery life indicator A blinking battery life LED indicates that there is less than 10 power charge remaining on the battery It is recommended that you fully charge the battery either in the NXA BASE B battery base or in the NXT CHG battery charger Refer to the NXA BASE B Battery Base Kit FG2255K section on page 45 for more information I was using the power from PSN and when connected my NXA BASE B battery base to the active panel my screen went blank Modero battery bases can not be hot swapped or replaced without powering down the Modero and removing the PSN connector If you are currently using a direct power connection to the panel and then wish to connect an NXA BASE B First power down the panel and detach the rear power connection Then remove any batteries from within the NXA BASE B and connect the battery base to the underside of the panel After connecting the base to the un powered panel then run power to the panel by either reconnecting the power cable to the rear of the panel or inserting the NXT BP batteries into the NXA BASE
168. e battery compartment FIG 30 by pulling the handle outwards This compartment houses two NXT BP batteries 2 Install the NXT BP battery label side down ee NXT BP Battery 2 Battery Connectors Interface connector Battery Connector NXT BP Battery 1 Battery Compartment FIG 30 Battery installation procedure 3 Align the battery connectors with the corresponding battery connector port located inside the battery compartment as shown in FIG 30 Insert the NXT BP battery until the connectors securely fit into the battery connector port Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other battery 6 Apply a small amount of pressure to close the battery compartment until the compartment latches e After a few seconds the panel will turn On and the AMX logo will appear indicating the panel is receiving power Charging the NXT BP batteries with the NXA BASE B 1 Follow the procedures from the previous sub section to attach the NXT touch panel to the NXA BASE B Insert each battery into the battery compartment shown in FIG 30 3 Insert a 2 pin connector from a power supply to the rear PWR connector on the NXT Modero panel e The charge status bargraph indicators on the Battery Base page indicate when the batteries are fully charged The NXA BASE B will only charge batteries when the NXT panel is in Sleep mode NOTE NXT CHG Battery Charger Kit FG2255 50K The NXT CHG Kit includes one charge
169. e incoming cables through the hole on the rear plastic cover and then through the strain relief grommet Slide the grommet along the cable and securely insert it into the opening on the rear plastic cover FIG 52 Finalizing the installation 1 2 Gently place the rear plastic cover over the NXD panel with LCD and MB TP17 back box Insert the protruding cables coming out from the opening on the rear plastic cover into the open strain relief grommet Allow some slack length on these cables as a service loop This service loop provides enough cable length so you can later remove the NXD with connected cables from the rear plastic cover VERIFY THE LENGTH AND LOCATION OF THE INSERTED CABLES ONCE THE STRAIN RELIEF GROMMET IS CLOSED IT IS DIFFICULT TO RE OPEN WARNING 4 Carefully apply pressure to close the strain relief grommet over the desired cable location facing the correct direction upwards The process of securing the strain relief grommet may require the use of pliers Also verify the length and location of the CAUTION inserted cables Once the strain relief grommet is closed it is difficult to re open D Verify the Strain Relief Grommet is securely closed over the cables and the clip is 5 Firmly push the Strain Relief Grommet into the opening toward the inside until the rim is securely flush against the back of the rear plastic cover FIG 53 6 Securely grasp both sides of the NXD panel with LCD MB TP1
170. e information NetLinx Studio only detects one of my connected Masters Each Master is give a Device Address of 00000 e Only one Master can be assigned to a particular System number If you want to work with multiple Masters open different instances of NetLinx Studio and assign each Master its own System value e Example a site has an NXC ME260 64 and an NI 4000 In order to work with both units The ME260 64 can be assigned System 1 and the NI 4000 can then be assigned System 2 using two open sessions of NetLinx Studio 2 I can t seem to connect to a NetLinx Master using my NetLinx Studio 2 From the Settings gt Master Comm Settings gt Communication Settings gt Settings for TCP IP uncheck the Automatically Ping the Master Controller to ensure availability The pinging is to determine if the master is available and to reply with a connection failure instantly if it is not Without using the ping feature you will still attempt to make a connection but a failure will take longer to be recognized Some firewalls and networks do not allow pinging though and the ping will then always result in a failure e When connecting to a NetLinx Master controller via TCP IP the program will first try to ping the controller before attempting a connection Pinging a device is relatively fast and will determine if the device is off line or if the TCP IP address that was entered was incorrect If you decide NOT to ping
171. e on the host machine is both protocol dependent and host dependent The information normally resides in a file but it could be generated dynamically This component of the URL is called the file component even though the information is not necessarily in a file A URL can optionally specify a port which is the port number to which the TCP connection is made on the remote host machine If the port is not specified the default port for the protocol is used instead For example the default port for http is 80 An alternative port could be specified as http www amx com 8080 company info home asp Any legal HTTP syntax can be used Special escape sequences The system has only a limited knowledge of URL formats in that it transparently passes the URL information onto the server for translation A user can then pass any parameters to the server side programs such as CGI scripts or active server pages However the system will parse the URL looking for special escape codes When it finds an escape code it replaces that code with a particular piece of panel button or state information For example http www amx com img asp device DV would become http www amx com img asp device 10001 Other used escape sequences include Escape Sequences Sequence Panel Information DV Device Number SY System Number IP IP Address HN Host Name MC Mac Address ID Neuron ID PX X Resol
172. e simultaneously in order to reduce the risk of damage to internal components NXA PCI80211G Wireless Card FG2255 04 The 1200V Series and VG Series Modero touch panels can connect to an internal NXA PCI80211G mini PCI Wireless Card FIG 13 connected to two antennas 57 2250 10 FIG 13 NXA PCI80211G mini PCI Wireless Card The NXA PCI80211G card functions using a 2 4GHz bandwidth with a maximum data transfer rate of 54Mbps This card is compatible with IEEE 802 11 standards such as 802 11b and 802 11g The NXA 80211G allows the end user to take advantage of larger bandwidth to utilize features such as streaming digital video and audio wireless intercom Motion JPEG networked video and standard wireless Ethernet communication to both a NetLinx controller and networked computers Please follow your particular Wireless Access Point s instruction manual for the correct procedures to setup either a secured or unsecured connection FCC Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device must not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept all interference including interference that interferes with the operation of this device Modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer will void the user s authority to operate the equipment WARNING This device has been evaluated and found to be compliant with the FCC Rules for RF Exposure when
173. e the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PHP Popup1 75 0 Sets the Popup1 hide effect x coordinate value to 75 and the y coordinate value to 0 PHT Set the hide effect time for the specified popup page Syntax PHT lt popup page name gt lt hide effect time gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On hide effect time Given in 1 10ths of a second Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PHT Popup1 50 Sets the Popup1 hide effect time to 5 seconds er Oa Page Commands Cont PPA Close all popups on a specified page If the page name is empty the current page is used Same as the Clear Page command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPA lt page name gt Variable page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPA Pagel Close all popups on Page PPF Deactivate a specific popup page on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is part of a group the whole group is deactivated This command works in the same way as the Hide Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPF lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the
174. e to begin configuring the communication parameters for the target Master Step 2 Choosing a Master Connection Mode Setting There are three Ethernet MODE settings used in the Master Connection section of the System Settings page URL is the most common method e Master Connection MODE options URL Uniform Resource Locator is the address that defines the route to a file on the Web or any other Internet facility In this system the panel acts as a Client and the Master acts as a Server in that Clients attach to it e LISTEN sets the Modero panel to listen for broadcasts from the Master using the panel IP from its URL list In this system the panel acts as a Server in that Clients attach to it and the Master acts as a Client e AUTO is used to instruct the Modero to search for a Master that uses the same System Number assigned within the Master Connection section and resides on the same Subnet as itself In this case the Master has its UDP feature enabled This UDP User Datagram Protocol is a protocol within the TCP IP protocol suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable delivery is not required This UDP enabling is done through a Telnet session on the Master Refer to the particular NetLinx Master manual for more detailed information Step 3 Configuring the Ethernet Connection Type be setup with either a Static IP or DHCP Address obtained from either NetLinx Studio Q When using Ethernet as your communi
175. ecses stub ennea enen EES EsP EER RASAP PAA EERE ea EKES E nao ENRERE 20 RGB RJ 45 connection and wiring information essssessseeesseseessseereessseeerreeeerersseeeeeesseee 21 Using the HD 15 high density connector ccsssssssssscceseesssecssessssseesecesesessessessssseeees 22 Installing the NXA AVB RGB 0 lt s ccssseccecceseeveoosceetecesceeressssccssvsenssoccoscensesassesesssaceoseses 22 Wiring the NXA AVB RGB connectors and cables cccccscssssssseseeceeeseesesssesssseeeees 23 Wiring the NXA AVB RGB for Unbalanced Audio ccssecccccssseccescesseeeesesssseeessonsees 24 Wiring the NXA AVB RGB for Balanced Audio cccccssseeeeeccssstccescsseeeeesssssseeeesessees 25 Preparing your panel for Pass Thru Control using the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box 26 Wiring for Pass Thru Computer Control sccccccssssscsssssssscesscsssseesessssseesescesseeeseoeees 27 NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top Cable CA2250 70 ssssscecececcecesssssseeceees 28 PrOdUct Specifications ss s sccccdssshccecisseacscfesecdeentesexvetneccevsedbeceseeeasastevenstecdsesvshestuczegessse 28 Wiring and Connection Information sscccscsssseccescessseccessssseeecsescsseesessssseeseessoeees 29 Installing CATS Suppression Ferrites ccccscssssssssssseccesesssesssssssssssesecesssessesssessseeees 30 NXA RGB RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 cccssscsssscccssscessscecssecesseceecseees 31 PFOGUCE SPeCificatiOn
176. ecssnssanstaupasensndpsesasseosboouscosesnesesanscusoeese 71 Installing the Internal Components 0 csccccssseesesssscssnvesscessssssssasconsassanscessesenseansucoanons 71 Upgrading the Back Box with the MB TP17 VESA Housing ccccccssssssseeeeeeeees 71 Removing the Original Modero Back Box cccsssssssssscceseecseccesessssseeseceessessscsesseseeeees 71 Installing the MP TP17 Back BoXx ccccccccscsssscsssssssssscecsssesscssssssssesseecesessssssssessseeeees 72 Cable Installation for the MP TP17 Back Box ssseeeseeseseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeessscceeeeeeeeeeees 73 Finalizing the installationisccsci c sssiescceresscpiteceecescnevehccescdecnisecsadeesoevsuccostedasecnedsessvaccscndens 73 Pre wall Installation of the CB TP17 Conduit Box ccesessseseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 Installation of an NXD 1700VG vovessussnsncsessnsswesnaicseswsensnswas nnsasissensinns snes sceedoesesesesceentees 77 Installing the NXD 1700VG within a CB TP17 Conduit Box ceccecseceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 77 Installing the NXD 1700VG into drywall using Expansion Clips ccssessssesssseeeees 79 Installing the NXD 1700VG into a Flat Surface using 6 SCrEWS csssseeeesssesseeeeneees 83 Installing an NXD into an optional Rack Mount Kit NXA RK17 scccccccesceeeeeereeeseee 86 Wiring Guidelines for the 1700VG Panels csscssssssseeceeceeesesssesssssseseeeeeeeenes 87 Preparing captive WIRES sii
177. ed pair cable to the from the rear RGB Component DB 15 connector rear of the box through the front RGB RJ 45 connector and then to the panel via the RJ 45 connector on the installed NXA RGB card i a 3 Product Specifications NXA RGB Specifications Dimensions HWD 0 88 x 3 50 x 6 50 2 22 cm x 8 89 cm x 16 51 cm Weight 0 85 Ibs 0 39 kg Power 240 mA 12 VDC Certifications e FCC Part 15 Class B CE and EN 60950 Features e Accepts RGB or Component inputs via NXA AVB RGB e Included with 1200VG 1500VG 1700VG RGB Kits e Integrates output of keyboard and mouse data via RGB port On screen RGB display window is resizable all the way up to full screen Provides RGB connectivity to the panel over CAT5 cables up to 200 ft 60 9 m e Receives VGA and Component video signals from the RGB connector on the front of the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Routes RGB and computer control pass thru signals from the USB connectors on the Modero panel to the RGB connector on the front of the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Availability This component is available separately or as part of NXA RGBKIT upgrade kit FG2255 11 for Modero VG Series touch panels Connector RJ 45 connector provides RGB Component video signals being routed from the rear RGB Component input ports and touch control information to the RJ 45 RGB connector on the NXA RGB card installed within the panel Inclu
178. edium Lime 80 159 0 22 Dark Lime 64 127 0 23 Very Dark Lime 48 95 0 24 Very Light Green 0 255 0 25 Light Green 0 223 0 26 Green 0 191 0 27 Medium Green 0 159 0 28 Dark Green 0 127 0 29 Very Dark Green 0 95 0 30 Very Light Mint 0 255 128 31 Light Mint 0 223 112 32 Mint 0 191 96 33 Medium Mint 0 159 80 34 Dark Mint 0 127 64 35 Very Dark Mint 0 95 48 RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors Cont Index No Name Red Green Blue 36 Very Light Cyan 0 255 255 37 Light Cyan 0 223 223 38 Cyan 0 191 191 39 Medium Cyan 0 159 159 40 Dark Cyan 0 127 127 41 Very Dark Cyan 0 95 95 42 Very Light Aqua 0 128 255 43 Light Aqua 0 112 223 44 Aqua 0 96 191 45 Medium Aqua 0 80 159 46 Dark Aqua 0 64 127 47 Very Dark Aqua 0 48 95 48 Very Light Blue 0 0 255 49 Light Blue 0 0 223 50 Blue 0 0 191 51 Medium Blue 0 0 159 52 Dark Blue 0 0 127 53 Very Dark Blue 0 0 95 54 Very Light Purple 128 0 255 55 Light Purple 112 0 223 56 Purple 96 0 191 57 Medium Purple 80 0 159 58 Dark Purple 64 0 127 59 Very Dark Purple 48 0 95 60 Very Light Magenta 255 0 255 61 Light Magenta 223 0 223 62 Magenta 191 0 191 63 Medium Magenta 159 0 159 64 Dark Magenta 127 0 127 65 Very Dark Magenta 95 0 95 66 Very Light Pink 255 0 128 67 Light Pink 223 0 112 68 Pink 191 0 96 69 Medium Pink 159 0 80 70 Dark Pink 127 0 64 71 Very
179. eeeceeascessseseeeseeeesseseenees 158 Using the Automated Brightness Control feature DIM Mode ccceseseeeeeeeeees 159 Password Setup Page ciee cuscccciisssesesutescececstedeetessseottnsitececesestecusvossscusnteseedesssencsesoesesnece 160 Calibration Pag e esc ccisceccccsvcessdics cepecevcateetes sudsecce scocdcesesesscusudsesvecescescpydceedetosesscadesoeseceetes 161 Wireless Settings Page veiveis cccsess cee cecetccrcasecsessiesssivccceceetessssesssebesteecteecesdssaesesssesteesecee 162 System Settings Page ssccssssccsseceeseeseeseeeceseeseceaceeceesccseeseesesesceesessseseseeseeeaees 166 Displaying Stream Content enesis ierann e E r Es 169 COVEN VIEW E E T E E A T 169 Requirements for Receiving Streamed Content ccccccccssssssssseeseeceeeseesssseeseees 170 Setting up a Modero Panel to Receive and Display a Stream cccccseeseeeeees 171 Step 1 Obtaining the IP Address of the target panel ccsssccsccssssrcesessssseeesessee 171 Step 2 Configuring the MAX CSE for communication ccsssssccccssssessessssssseeeeseees 172 Step 3 Configuring the MAX CSE audio video inputs csssecccsssseecseessseeeeesseeees 174 Step 4 Setup a streaming page within TPDesign4 ccc ecscceceesessscesessssseeeseeeeenes 175 Step 5 Establishing the final connection between the two units 2 esseeeeeeeee 177 Programming osse sssrini srar a ESE Eais 179 B tton ASSiI9NM
180. el 2 MP2 e MPEG Audio Level 3 MP3 Supported Video Codecs e MPEG 2 e MPEG 4 Button Assignments Button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels Button channel range 1 4000 button push and Feedback per address port e Button variable text range 1 4000 per address port e Button states range 1 256 General Button 1 Off State 2 On State e Level range 1 600 default level value 0 255 can be set up to 1 65535 Address port range 1 100 1200VG Panel Specifications Cont Front Panel Components Light sensor e Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness a dim room results in a dimmer LCD display and a bright room results in a brighter LCD display Note The light sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup Page section on page 158 Motion sensor PIR e Proximity Infrared Detector to wake the panel when the panel is approached e Activation range 20 vertically from center and 45 horizontally from center Note The motion sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup page Sensor Setup Page section on page 158 Front setup access button Provides both access to the Setup and Calibration pages and toggles the panel between a sleep and wake state When wired sleep status means the backlight is Off When battery operated wireless sleep status means the touch panel base is either Of
181. ellent The signal strength field provides some descriptive text regarding the strength of the connection to a Wireless Access Point If there is no signal or no IP Address displayed configuration of your network could be required Refer to the NXA WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration procedures Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G 1 For each communicating touch panel complete all of the steps outlined within the previous Configuring the Modero s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G section on page 105 e Those procedures walk you through assigning an SSID selecting a WEP encryption level and obtaining a Current Key string value for a specific WEP Key on a target panel 2 Navigate back to the Wireless Wireless Settings page on each panel Verify that all communicating Modero panels are using the same SSID encryption level Default Key and an identical Current Key value e As an example all panels should be set to Default Key 1 and be using aa bb cc as the Current Key string value This same Key value and Current Key string should be used on the target WAP 4 Repeat steps 1 3 on each panel Using the same passphrase generates the same key for all communicating Modero panels DP WARNING O NOTE NOTE Configuring a Wired Ethernet Connection It is necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be communicating with This point
182. ent volume level The Mute button toggles the Mute feature e The Play Test button plays a test WAV MP3 file over the panel s internal speakers Default Panel Sounds Sets the Modero panel to play either the default Button Hit sound when you touch an active button and or the default Button Miss sound when you touch a non active button or any area outside of the active button Internal Sound Level This section allows you to adjust the current sound level on the internal panel speaker e Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the volume output on the internal speakers range 0 100 e The Internal Sound Level bargraph indicates the current sound level e The Mute button mutes the volume Line In Level Allows you to adjust the current Line In volume level being received from the communicating breakout box e Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the Line In volume level range 0 100 e The Line In Level bargraph indicates the current Line In level e The Mute button mutes the Line In volume Mic Out Level Allows you to adjust the current Microphone volume level being received from the communicating breakout box e Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the Microphone volume level range 0 100 e The Mic Out Level bargraph indicates the current Mic Out level Supported sampling rates for WAV The following is a listing of supported sampling rates associated for WAV files played on these panels Some
183. er Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation 5 Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the necessary connectors before being inserted into the equipment rack NOTE 6 Insert the main 12 inch Modero unit into an NXA RK12 FIG 46 or the 15 inch Modero into an NXA RK15 FIG 47 e 19 000 482 60 94 6 27 3 f a a Irn j 2 oO 13 970 354 84 l ro fo H Rack mount Faceplate frame NXA RK12 FIG 46 NXD 12 inch Wall Mount panel installed into an NXA RK12 Rack Mount Kit H 19 000 482 60 0 494 12 56 e e 2 753 69 93 peoe f i AZ O S HO I iL l F ROU g 7 i E i i n li I i i f i i 13 970 354 84 i i i ii H o i o f E i i J i I i i ita Io O Mo i i 3 A i iI jo Nell Qa t Rack mount frame Faceplate NXA RK15 FIG 47 NXD 15 inch Wall Mount panel installed into an NXA RK15 Rack Mount Kit 7 Secure the panel to the NXA RK frame by first inserting and then tightening the four 4 40 screws provided Line up the four mounting holes and use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to tighten the sc
184. er than a 200G generate the Current Key Do not press the Generate button and continue with Step 14 e This keyboard allows you to enter a Passphrase such as AMXPanel and then AUTOMATICALLY generate a WEP key which is compatible only among Modero panels The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula Therefore this same Passphrase generates identical keys when done on any Modero because they all use the same Modero specific generator The Passphrase NOTE generator is case sensitive 12 Within this on screen WEP Passphrase keyboard FIG 82 enter a character string or word such as AMXPanel and press Done when you have finished WEB Bassphrase AMXPanel_ 2 Back Clear 7 Delete 4 Enter Home i T FIG 82 WEP Passphrase Keyboard e As an example enter the word AMXPanel using a 128 bit hex digit encryption After pressing Done the on screen Current Key field displays a long string of characters separated by colons which represents the encryption key equivalent to the word AMXPanel e This series of hex digits 26 hex digits for a 128 bit encryption key should be entered as the Current Key into both the WAP and onto other communicating Modero panels by using the WEP Key dialog FIG 83 WEB KEY 1 3e 22 fb 22 9b 38 22 c8 22 60 22 5b fa_ SSPTPPISCF TCIM I _ Sp nnn an Enter Tome She End IFP Done FIG 83 WEP Key Keyboard A a NOTE 13 Write do
185. er would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1008 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 18 VALUE3 0 TEXT Hard Drop Shadow 3 TEXT LENGTH 18 2TXT Syntax Get the current OTXT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt optional index gt text information Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state optional index This is used if a string was too long to get back in one command The reply will start at this index custom event type 1001 Flag Zero Value Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Index Text Text from the button Text length Button text length Example SEND COMMAND Panel TXT 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1001 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 14 VALUE3 1 TEXT This is a test TEXT LENGTH 14 a E Panel Runtime Operations Serial Commands are used in the AxcessX Terminal Emulator mode These commands are case insensitive Panel Runtime Operation Commands ABEEP Output a single beep even if beep is Off Syntax ABEEP Example SEND COMMAND Panel ABEEP Outputs a beep of duration 1 beep even if beep is Off ADBEEP Output a double beep even if beep is Off Syntax ADBEEP Example SEND COMMAND
186. ered up e This information is taken from the TPD4 project file e Most projects begin with a Main page Start Up String Displays the start up string Wake Up String Displays the wake up string used after an activation from a timeout Sleep String Displays the sleep string used during a panel s sleep mode File System Displays the amount of Compact Flash memory available on the Modero panel RAM Displays the available RAM or Extended Memory module on the Modero panel Time amp Date Setup Page The Time amp Date Setup page FIG 107 allows you to alter set the time and date information on the NetLinx Master If either the Time Date is modified on this page then updated to the Master by pressing the Set Time button all devices communicating to that target Master will then be updated to reflect the new information Back Time amp Date Setup b Time Date Retreshiset V4 we Date Display FH cts Time Display i fields D Serpatenime CD Sa d CD CED 4 lt Currently selected lt gt FIG 107 Time and Date Setup page The only way to modify a panel s time without altering the Master is to use NetLinx Code NOTE The elements of the Time amp Date Setup page are described in the table below Time amp Date Setup Page Elements Back Returns you to the previously active touch panel page without saving changes to save changes use the Set Time button
187. ery Commands BCB Syntax Get the current 2BCB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt border color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1011 Flag zero Value Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BCB 529 1 Gets the button OFF state border color information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1011 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT 222222FF TEXT LENGTH 9 Button Query Commands Cont BCF Syntax Get the current fill 2BCF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1012 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BCF 529 1 Gets the button OFF state fill color information The result sent to the Master would be Bu
188. ese sources attached USB keyboard or Virtual keyboard AMPS Syntax Set the mouse 4MPS lt pass data gt pass thru Variables pass data lt blank empty gt Disables the mouse 0 Pass thru disable 1 Not used 2 pass thru enable 3 5 Not used Example SEND COMMAND Panel MPS 2 Sets the mouse pass thru via the NXA RGB card Note When this command is given it causes all mice connected to the G4 product and any mice on a computer connected via a card with USB output to reset to position 0 0 Input Commands Cont ASLT Send a command to a given slot These commands are directed at the video card subsystems Slot commands contain a series of name value pairs separated by commas These commands are case insensitive Syntax SLT lt slot number gt lt slot command gt Variables slot number 1 3 each of these options corresponds to an on board slot position where the related components reside Slot 1 Composite Video common to both 1200 V and VG Series Slot 2 RGB Component Video only available on the VG Series Slot 3 Streaming MPEG Video only available on the VG Series slot command see list below Interlace lt 0 or 1 gt where 0 Deselects Interlace and 1 Selects Interlace Sharpness lt 0 or 1 gt where 0 Disables Sharpness and 1 Enables Sharpness SyncOn Green lt 0 or 1 gt where 0 Disables SyncOnGreen and 1 Enables SyncOnGreen Examp
189. esedesseveets 55 Pre wall Installation of the Conduit Boxes sssssssscsssecesssesssssssssssseeeeceseesosseees 58 Installation of the NXD Touch Panel oiccsscciccceccissnsicecses cuthesdeveceiavsuonsnenscbssccesecsesveseaten 59 Installing the NXD panel within a Conduit Box cccsssssssssseececeeesescsescessnssseseeeeeseees 59 Installing the NXD into drywall using Expansion Clips csscssccecesesessesessnssssseceeees 60 Installing the NXD into a Flat Surface using 4 Screws cssscccecsssseeeessesssseceesssseeens 63 Installing an NXD into an optional Rack Mount Kit NXA RK12 or NXA RK15 66 Wiring Guidelines for the 1200VG and 1500VG Panels ccssssscseesssseeeseeeee 68 Preparing Captive WIIeS sccsssssscssecsceseceeesseseesseesseeseesaaceasaceesceesseussssesseeeseeeeeeeaes 68 Wiring a power CONNECTION cccceeeeeseesssessceecceceeessesseesceseceesaceseeeseesseaseesseeseeeseeeeees 68 Audio Video Port Connections and Wiring ccsccsssssssssssseseeeceeeeseessssssesseeeees 69 I Ethernet RJ 45 Port Connections and Wiring sssssssssssssececeeeesesssssssssseeeeeees 69 Installation Procedures 17 Panels siccssersnssnsicscosoanscesssmossanensarsavsnnicassansevumnioiess 71 OVENVIGW sss rctnsnnsiesendedagesnascnneadandsendenendbondvandehonusbscdentcornenbeds maabaueeenihannabaaeevansieastins 71 Unpacking the Panel ssicccscssaicsssssvsts onseasensssstax
190. ess is an operational option for the room 7 Set the Minimum Dimmer Brightness Dim Mode Min Level to a comfortable level by sitting in front of the panel You should be able to comfortably see someone sitting behind the panel without being blinded by the panel 8 Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your body Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your movements 9 Set the Minimum brightness of the Dimmer Dim Mode Max Level below the detected drop This will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a normal working environment The minimum lower level of the dimmer should be at least 10 lower than the minimum detected level ex lower dimmer level at 30 if the detected lighting of the room is at 40 Password Setup Page The Password Setup page FIG 123 centers around the properties used to assign passwords for the Modero panel pages ra Back Password Setup b In Panel Password Change FIG 123 Password Setup page NOTE The elements of the Password Setup page are described in the table below Password Setup Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regar
191. et Modero panel e UDP User Datagram Protocol is a connectionless protocol such as TCP that runs on top of IP networks Unlike TCP IP UDP IP provides a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network It s primarily used for broadcasting messages over a network Data is sent as a Transport Stream by using only the MPEG 2 codec e Ina UDP stream only a Target video Port is needed since both the audio and video information are transported together to the same port on the destination device e RTP Real Time Transport Protocol is an Internet protocol used for transmitting real time data such as audio and video as separate entities Data is sent as an Elementary Stream which can use both the MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 codecs e In an RTP stream both a Target video Port and Target Audio Port are required because the audio and video are delivered to a destination as separate data elements These elements are then directed to two separate ports where they are then synced up by target device application If using RTP both the Target Port and Target Audio Port must be different NOTE NOTE e IP Multicasting is a method of sending out large amounts of data IP Multicast allows a server to broadcast a message to many recipients simultaneously Unlike traditional Internet communication that requires separate connections for each source destination pair IP Multicasting allows several recipients to share data from the same source This
192. etup Page This page FIG 104 centers around basic Modero panel properties such as Connection Status of the panel Display Timeout Inactivity Page Flip Time Inactivity page file and the Panel Brightness x Exit Setup Connection Status Red Connection Status icon i asi Status indicates no connection to a Master Fo Project Information Panel Inf ti 5 A am Green Connection Status icon No Encryption fs Time Jy b 4 indicates communication to a Master Adjustment Connected via Ethermet Marivi Page Flip ime Adjustments Aue amo Aad Connected To System 4071 v GED A Protected sii Video Adjustment button doesn t te appear on Non Video CA panels COn Battery Base button doesn t appear Pese until NXT is connected to a BASE B LaAMX FIG 104 Setup page The elements of the Setup page are described in the table below Setup Page Elements Exit Returns you to the Main touch panel page In this case the previous page is the default Main page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Setup Page Elements Cont Connection Status Displays whether the panel is communic
193. f or suspended Microphone e Used for intercom applications requires an optional NXA AVB RGB or NXA AVBIETHERNET Breakout Box Speakers Stereo output with a frequency response of 450 Hz 7 KHz Rear Panel Components Side panel location on NXD Wall Mount panels RGB connector e This connector is only made available only by using an NXA RGB interface card installed within the touch panel This card is sold either as part of an RGB Kit configuration or within the NXA RGBKIT upgrade kit for previous Video Kit fitted VG Series panels Routes RGB and computer control pass thru signals to from a Modero panel up to 200 ft 60 9 m RJ 45 connector provides RGB Component video signals being routed from the rear RGB Component input ports and touch control information to the RJ 45 RGB connector on the NXA RGB card installed within the panel This connector routes VGA and Component video signals RJ 45 connector for communication of differential audio video signals to from the touch panel panel type dependant This connector receives Composite video Stereo left right audio and microphone audio Video is received via the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Configuring video windows for playback is done using TPDesign4 In bound audio from the Breakout Box gets directed to the speakers Out bound audio is sent from the on board microphone on the front panel Selecting audio files for playback is configured through TPDesign4
194. ff state border color to 12 Yellow Colors can be set by Color Numbers Color name R G B alpha colors RRGGBBAA and R G amp B colors values RRGGBB A Button Commands Cont BDO Set the button draw order Determines what order each layer of the button is drawn Syntax BDO lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state layer assignments Fill Layer 1 Image Layer 2 Icon Layer 3 Text Layer 4 Border Layer 5 Note The layer assignments are from bottom to top The default draw order is 12345 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BDO 530 1 amp 2 51432 Sets the button s variable text 530 ON OFF state draw order from bottom to top to Border Fill Text Icon and Image Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel BDO 1 0 12345 Sets all states of a button back to its default drawing order BFB Set the feedback type of the button ONLY works on General type buttons Syntax BFB lt vt addr range gt lt feedback type gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 feedback type None Channel Invert On Always on Momentary and Blink Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BFB 500 Momentary Sets the Feedback type of the button to Momentary
195. firmware The version 2 xx firmware should only be loaded onto box s running 2 xx series firmware To confirm the box s current firmware version you can either navigate to the BOB Version field on the RGB Adjustment page or launch NetLinx Studio and open the Online Tree tab Modero VG touch panel firmware 2 60 27 or higher is required to download v2 xx firmware into the break out box NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 The NXA AVB RGB Ethernet RGB Breakout Box allows any of AMX s VG Series Modero Touch Panels to accept and display both RGB or HDTV Component signals directly from an external source Through this single connection point the 12 15 and 17 VG Series Modero panels experience comprehensive connectivity for audio video distribution power Ethernet connectivity and RGB FIG 2 shows the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box i i S Video Chroma F Mic Out Audio Composite RGB to internal NXA RGB card rear front RGB Component In Power Ethernet Audio Video USB Power Ethernet In to panel to panel to panel FIG 2 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box front and rear views The NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box is available either separately or as part of AMX s exclusive RGB Kit NXA RGBKIT The RGB Breakout Box combined with the panel s internal NXA RGB interface card allows the Modero to accept and display high bandwidth and high quality RGB and HDTV Component video signals The NXA AVB RGB stands out amongst all
196. for availability and the controller is off line or you have an incorrect TCP IP address the program will try for 30 45 seconds to establish a connection Note If you are trying to connect to a Master controller that is behind a firewall you may have to uncheck this option Most firewalls will not allow ping requests to pass through for security reasons have more that one Modero panel connected to my System Master and only one shows up Multiple NetLinx Compatible devices such as Modero panels can be associated for use with a single Master Each Modero panel comes with a defaulted Device Number value of 10001 When using multiple panels it can become very easy to overlook the need to assign different Device Number values to each panel e Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page e Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page enter 1988 into the on screen Keypad s password field and press Done when finished e Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number Keypad The default is 10001 and the range is from 1 32000 Troubleshooting Information Cont Symptom Solution After downloading a panel file or firmware to a G4 device the panel behaves strangely Symptoms include e Having to repeat the download e Inability to make further downloads to the panel May get directory errors graphics hie
197. for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state unicode text 1 50 ASCII characters Unicode characters must be entered in Hex format Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BAU 520 1 00770062 Appends Unicode text 00770062 to the button s OFF state BCB Only if the specified border color is not the same as the current color Set the border Note Color can be assigned by color name without spaces number or R G B value color to the RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA specified color Syntax BCB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 185 for more information Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BCB 500 504 amp 510 1 12 Sets the Off state border color to 12 Yellow Colors can be set by Color Numbers Color name R G B alpha colors RRGGBBAA and R G amp B colors values RRGGBB Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 185 A Button Commands Cont ABCF Set the fill color to the specified color Only if the specified fill color is not the same as the current color Note Color can be assigned by color name without spaces number or R G B value RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA
198. for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state unicode text Unicode HEX value Example SEND_COMMAND Panel UNI 500 1 0041 Sets the button s unicode character to A Note To send the variable text A in unicode to all states of the variable text button 1 for which the character code is 0041 Hex send the following command SEND_COMMAND TP UNI 1 0 0041 Note Unicode is always represented in a HEX value TPD4 generates through the Text Enter Box dialog unicode HEX values Refer to the TPDesign4 Instruction Manual for more information Text Effect Names The following is a listing of text effects names This list is associated with the TEF command on page 209 e Glow S Hard Drop Shadow 6 Glow M e Hard Drop Shadow 7 Glow L Hard Drop Shadow 8 Glow X Soft Drop Shadow 1 with outline Outline S Soft Drop Shadow 2 with outline Outline M Soft Drop Shadow 3 with outline Outline L Soft Drop Shadow 4 with outline Outline X Soft Drop Shadow 5 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 1 Soft Drop Shadow 6 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 2 Soft Drop Shadow 7 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 3 Soft Drop Shadow 8 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 4 e Medium Drop Shadow 1 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 5 Medium Drop Shadow 2 with outline Soft
199. from the external source must be connected to their corresponding locations on the connector FIG 64 PWR GND Power Supply To the Touch Panel FIG 64 NetLinx power connector wiring diagram 1 Insert the PWR and GND wires on the terminal end of the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix cable Match the wiring locations of the on both the power supply and the terminal connector 2 Tighten the clamp to secure the two wires Do not tighten the screws excessively doing so may strip the threads and damage the connector 3 Verify the connection of the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix to the power supply Audio Video Port Connections and Wiring The following table shows the signal and pinout pairing information used on the RJ 45 Audio and Video connections Audio Video RJ 45 Pinout Information Pin Wire Color Function Polarity 1 Orange White Right Audio In pe 2 Orange Right Audio In Pal 2 Pair Fa 4 3 Green White Video In 4 Blue Mic Out 5 White Blue Mic Out 6 Green Video In 7 White Brown Left Audio In TIA 568B 8 Brown Left Audio In C CEE MM 12345678 i male h ed RJ 45 connector pin configurations Refer to the Installing CATS Suppression Ferrites section on page 30 for detailed information on how to install the necessary number of CAT5 Suppression Ferrites on the Black A V RJ 45 cable connected to the panel Et
200. g Video Adjustment Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Settings The Default Settings button sets the streaming video settings to their default values indicated in this table The Undo Changes button disregards any changes made on the page since the last settings were saved e The Save Settings button saves any changes made to the Video Setup page Video Settings The Sharpness button toggles the Interpolate Sharpness feature Default On The Interlace button toggles the Interlacing feature Default On Streaming Video Adjustment Page Elements Cont Video This read only field displays the video stream information Video Streaming format and resolution e The properties of this incoming detected stream is given as Video Codec and Resolution An example would be MPEG2 720x480 This means that the incoming video is an MPEG2 video stream with resolution 720x480 Codec e Supported MPEG codecs MPEG 2 or MPEG 4 Short for enCOder e MPEG 2 is typically used to encode audio and vi
201. g locations 0 J 415 l6 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 8 J9 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel JSI 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the Off On state icon alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 A Button Commands Cont AJST Set text alignment using a numeric keypad layout for those buttons with a defined address range The alignment of 0 is followed by lt left gt lt top gt The left and top coordinates are relative to the upper left corner of the button Syntax 7ST lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text alignment gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text alignment Value of 1 9 corresponds to the following locations 0 1 2 13 4 5 6 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel JST 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the text alignment to the upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 MBT Set the Mouse Button mode On for the virtual PC Syntax MBT lt pass data gt Variable pass data 0 None 1 Left 2 Right 3 Middle Example SEND COMMAND Panel MBT 1 Sets the mouse button mode to
202. ge where you can alter the time and date settings on the Master e Refer to the Time amp Date Setup Page section on page 138 for more detailed information Audio Adjustments Press the Audio Adjustments button to access the Volume page where you can alter the audio parameters on the Modero panel Refer to the Volume Page section on page 139 for more detailed information Protected Setup Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page section that provides access to the panel s sensors calibration features and connection settings Refer to the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section on page 153 and Protected Setup Page section on page 154 for more detailed information Setup Navigation Button Elements Cont Video Adjustment Press the Video Adjustment button to access the Video Adjustment page where you can set the video properties for incoming video e This button only appears on Color Video CV capable touch panels e Refer to the Video Adjustment Video Adjustment Page section on page 141 for more detailed information Battery Base Press the Battery Base button to access the Battery Base page where you can modify and monitor NXT BP Modero Power Pack parameters e This button only appears when a Modero Table Top panel NXT is connected to an NXA BASE B battery base e Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 151 for more detailed information S
203. ght e RGB COMPONENT In 15 pin HD 15 video connector used to feed in signals from an outside video source through the box and then to NXA RGB card on the panel This signal can also be fed from a BNC connector by using the optional NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 e MIC OUT 4 pin mini Phoenix connector divided into GND OUT and OUT terminal connectors An example of this cable is to strip the terminal ends of a 3 5mm mini jack and insert them into their respective locations on the Mic Out port This signal can be fed as a Line Level In to either an amplifier or an AMX VOL card Either a balanced and GND or unbalanced and GND audio signal can be connected to this output e AUDIO IN 6 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector divided into left and right audio channels Each channel is divided into GND IN and IN terminal cable connectors 2 sets of 3 for each channel An example of this cable is to strip the ends of 2 RCA audio cables and insert them into their respective locations on the Audio In port Either a balanced and GND or unbalanced and GND audio signal can be connected to this input e USB Type B USB device port input connector for pass thru computer control This port provides two way signal between the keyboard and mouse connected to the rear side USB connectors on the Modero panel through the front RGB connector on the breakout box out the rear USB Type B connecto
204. go to Tools gt Firmware Transfers gt Send to NetLinx Device e Locate and select the 2250_XXX_v2 KIT file for the battery base e Enter the Device and System values verify the method of communication IP recommended e Click Send to reload the new base KIT file onto the NXA BASE B If this above steps do not cause the base to be recognized by the NXT touch panel on the Setup page contact AMX Technical Support for further assistance The Battery Base button doesn t appear on the panel s Setup page e Refer to the above troubleshooting symptom My RGB image looks blurry The edges of the characters appear shadowed and or blurry e Refer to the Adjusting the Incoming Signal on the RGB Adjustment Page section on page 145 for more detailed information on adjusting the skew of the incoming image Appendix Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs Joysticks Text formatting codes for bargraphs provide a mechanism to allow a portion of a bargraphs text to be dynamically provided information about the current status of the level multistate and traditional These codes would be entered into the text field along with any other text The following is a code list used for bargraphs Bargraph Text Code Inputs Code Bargraph Multi State Bargraph P Display the current percentage of the Display the current percentage of the bargraph derived from the Adjusted bargraph derived from the Adju
205. guring Communication Overview Communication between the Modero panel and the Master is done using either USB or ETHERNET DHCP or Static IP Ethernet communication can be achieved through either a direct connection Ethernet or through the use of the optional NXA PCI80211G wireless interface card G4 panel is powered up The panel will not detect a USB connection of this type until USB input devices must be plugged into the rear or side USB connectors before the after the unit cycles power firmware Verify you are using the latest versions of AMX s NetLinx Studio and H Before commencing verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero panel TPDesign4 programs WARNING Modero Setup and System Connection 1 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page FIG 71 Exit Setup Connection Status EED Connection Status Dispiav cout Red Connection Status icon Information indicates no connection to a Master Panel gt Information M am No Encryption Green Connection Status icon indicates communication to a Master Time gt Adjustment Connected via Ethernet Inactivity Page ip aime Audio Adjustments Yellow Connection Status icon Protected Ens indicates an unreliable Setup A network connection EEn am Connected To System 4071 v aD A Video PanelBightness 4 Adjustment een Battery Base button doesn t appear ni until NXT is connected to a BASE B LAX
206. h as Full Screen Video UDP Note that although a page cannot directly be setup to display a video stream a user can create a full screen button on that same page which can be configured to fill its contents with a video stream Press the Button Draw Tool CTRL U to begin drawing a square button onto the blank page FIG 132 Press the Selection Tool CTRL L to grab the new button and stretch it to fill a desired area of the page For our procedures we stretched the new button to fill the entire available are of the newly created page FIG 133 With the button currently selected and active navigate to the left section of the Workspace and find the Button Properties Control window FIG 133 test 1P4 TPDesign4 fle Edt Panel Boge Button States Layout Transfer yew Tool Window Help OSH ROXAN v DE vs Button Draw and Selection tools workspace v fest Full Screen Video UDP 100 5 test frect 1700vG Full Screen Video UDE Currently active button Button Properties Control window displays information for the currently active selected button lt gt Brest Ful Screen video LOP test Ful Screen Video LDP F offine Cursor 136 203 Loc 10 17 Sei 1249724 Fak channel FIG 133 Button Properties tab 10 Click the States tab of the Button Properties Control window to show a list of all states associated with the selected button Each state represented in the States tab is a
207. har Character Meaning Start Next Field List End Next Field List An example from the above table or or Tells the system that after a user hits any of these keys proceed to the next text area input box Input mask operations Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in the following way Input Mask Operators Character Meaning lt Forces all characters to be converted to lowercase gt Forces all characters to be converted to uppercase A Sets the overflow flag for this field Input mask literals To define a literal character enter any character other than those shown in the above table including spaces and symbols A back slash causes the character that follows it to be displayed as the literal character For example A is displayed just as the letter A To define one of the following characters as a literal character precede that character with a back slash Text entry operation using Input Masks A keyboard entry using normal text entry is straightforward However once an input mask is applied the behavior of the keyboard needs to change to accommodate the input mask s requirement When working with masks any literal characters in the mask will be skipped by any cursor movement including cursor keys backspace and delete wou character should characters and When operating with a mask the mask should be displayed with
208. he RGB Contrast popup dialog to adjust the overall or individual Red Green and Blue contrast of the incoming image video Increasing the value can increase sharpness This All Contrast bargraph gives a visual representation of the overall contrast level and cycles through an entire turn 9 To correct for a blurry image and adjust the Red Green and Blue signal skew it is recommended that e Skew adjustments should be made at FULL SCREEN mode and use the panel s native resolution In the case of a 1500VG panel as seen above that native resolution is 1024 x 768 Set the RGB Input Resolution value accordingly done via the RGB Input Resolution slider e Do your skew adjustment using an image which contains single pixel wide white vertical lines such as those seen in FIG 113 This allows you to verify that your RGB signals are being received at the same time The lines in circle A of FIG 113 show how all three signals are in sync and overlap to produce the single white line The lines is circle B of FIG 113 show how the Red signal is being delivered with a slight delay and is throwing off the color of the line Altering the Red Skew value can compensate for this delay and re align the image A Green and Blue signal Good i in sync but Red signal is RGB signal not properly synched up overlap RGB Skew Adjust 1 FIG 113 Full Screen Edit Mode showing skew adjustment scenario 10 Once done making t
209. he USB Driver on the PC The first time each AMX touch panel is connected to the PC it is detected as a new hardware device and the USBLAN driver becomes associated with it panel specific Each time thereafter the panel is recognized as a unique USBLAN device and the association to the driver is done in the background When the panel is detected for the first time some user intervention is required during the association between panel and driver 1 After the installation of the USB driver has been completed confirm the proper installation of the large Type A USB connector to the PC s USB port and restart your machine If the panel is already powered continue with steps 3 The panel MUST be powered and configured for USB communication before connecting the mini USB connector to the panel s Program Port 2 Connect the terminal end of the 12 VDC compliant power supply cable to the power connector on the rear side of the touch panel and then apply power 3 After the panel powers up press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page 4 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page FIG 74 ye System Settings No connection is established until 4 the Virtual Master becomes IP Settings active within Studio Master Connection Yellow Connection Status icon indicates an unreliable network co
210. he software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature Therefore there is no guarantee that this software works correctly with Windows AMX USB LAN LINK If you want to search for Microsoft digitally signed software visit the Windows Update Web site at http windowsupdate microsoft com to see if one is available Do you want to continue the installation k No More Info FIG 75 USB driver installation popup window e This window notifies you that the panel has been detected by the PC as a USB compliant device and the PC is installing an appropriate USB driver to establish a proper communication to the panel The driver does not contain a Microsoft digital signature and Windows then informs you of such 9 Click Yes when told that a digital signature was not found This action accepts the installation of the new USB driver The panel is now configured to communicate directly with the PC e This process completes the association between driver and device Each time the same touch panel is connected to the computer the driver is automatically loaded using a unique name example USB LAN LINK 1 2 Each time a different touch panel is connected to the computer the previous procedures will need to be repeated e The previous version of the AMX USBLAN driver showed a USB connection icon in the system tray when a panel was connected The new version of the driver does not show an icon
211. hernet RJ 45 Port Connections and Wiring FIG 65 describes the blink activity for the Ethernet 10 100 Base T RJ 45 connector and cable The Ethernet cable is connected to the rear of Table Top and side of the Wall Mount panels A Activity LED yellow A L L Link LED green lights when lights when receiving or the Ethernet cables are connected transmitting Ethernet and terminated correctly data packets NNN ETHERNET 10 100 FIG 65 Ethernet connector showing communication and connection LEDs The following table lists the pinouts signals and pairing associated with the Ethernet connector Ethernet RJ 45 Pinouts and Signals a N 123 45678 Pin Signals Connections Pairing Color L L 1 TX 1 1 1 2 Orange White 5 5 5 2 TX 2 wana 2 Orange 4 3 RX 3 3 3 6 Green White 2 2 si 4 no connection 4 4 Blue gt gt gt 5 no connection 5 5 Blue White S Q S 6 RX iS 6 Green a 7 no connection 7 7 Brown White 12345678 8 no connection 8 8 Brown S Pi FIG 66 diagrams the RJ 45 pinouts and signals for the Ethernet RJ 45 connector and cable White Orange Stripe Orange f White Green Stripe Blue White Blue Stripe Ta Green White Brown Stripe ii AN ONOUORWNH W ONOUWRWNH
212. hese adjustments press the Done button to temporarily save these modifications and place the grey RGB Adjustments bar back onto the bottom of the screen Pressing the Cancel button returns you to the RGB Adjustments page without temporarily saving your changes 11 Press anywhere on the background image to exit from the Full Screen Edit mode and return to the RGB Adjustment page 12 In the RGB Adjustment Page press the Save Settings button to save your changes to the NXA RGB card Cycling power to the panel before saving your settings can cause your pages to shift back to their original locations 13 Press the Back button to return to the Setup page es Video Adjustment Streaming Adjustment Page The Streaming Video Adjustment page FIG 110 accessed by pressing the Video Adjustment button on the Setup page and then selecting the appropriate button from the option bar adjusts the Video properties of the incoming MPEG video streaming from the external content server Refer to the Displaying Stream Content section on page 169 for the procedures used to configure the TPD4 touch panel pages and media stream source using MAX CSE for example purposes a Streaming Video Adjustment WSettinge Video Settings Brightness Gontrast Incoming Streaming Video signal FIG 114 Streaming Video Adjustment page showing default values The elements of the Streaming Video Adjustment page are described in the table below Streamin
213. hour value 24 hour military e Select the Minute field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the minute value range 0 59 Select the Second field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the second value range 0 59 Modero touch panels do not have an on board clock This page both receives and sets the time date of the NetLinx Master Volume Page The Volume page FIG 108 accessed by pressing the Audio Adjustments button on the Setup page allows you to adjust the master volume parameters and default panel sounds on the panel DA intemal Sotmd Level 4 2 ap Va 1 Linel Level b Default Panel Sounds I TN FIG 108 Volume configuration page The elements of the Volume page are described in the table below Volume Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Volume Page Elements Cont Master Volume This section allows you to alter the current master volume level e Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the volume level range 0 100 e The Master Volume bargraph indicates the curr
214. hronization analog ground 11 N A Not used 12 N A Not used 13 HSYNC Horizontal synchronization signal 14 VSYNC Vertical synchronization signal 15 N A Notused pen ee Installing the NXA AVB RGB A 12 VDC compliant power supply can indirectly provide power to a Modero panel by routing power through the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FIG 3 shows a sample wiring configuration using both an indirect or direct power connection for a VG Series Modero panel Audio In Mic Out Line Level out 6 pin 4 pin to amplifier USB or VOL card pass thru RGB In HD 15 12 VDC power Ethernet supply RJ 45 Indirect Video In Connect BNC rear NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Power supplied via Breakout Box front Ethernet 12 VDC power CAT5 supply Audio Video RGB RGB and touch CAT5 control CAT5 Direct Connect VG Series and Video capable Touch Panels FIG 3 Sample Wiring configuration using the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box NOTE The breakout box unit can be mounted on either a horizontal flat surface or into an equipment rack by removing the front screws and attaching it to an optional AC RkK The power supply being used on the NXA AVB RGB is dependant on the power requirements of the target touch panel Use the NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top cable CA2250 70 to provide both communication and 10 100 network connectivity between the panel NXA AVB RGB NetLinx Master an
215. ia the USB port cccccsessseeseeeeeees 123 Upgrading the Modero Firmware via an IP Address ccccccscscsscreeeeceeeeeeeeees 125 Step 1 Prepare the Master for communication via an IP sccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 125 Step 2 Prepare the panel for communication via an IP ssesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 126 Step 3 Verify and Upgrade the panel firmware via an IP ccccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeees 127 Upgrading Accessory Devices via an IP Addr ess csseessssceeeeeceeesssesssceeeeeeeees 128 Step 1 Prepare the NXA BASE B for firmware transfer secsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 129 Step 2 Upgrade the NXA BASE B firmware via an IP seseseeeeeecereeeeeeseeeeeeee 130 Upgrading the NXA RGB and NXA AVB RGB Firmware cccccccsccsceceeerereeeeees 132 Firmware Pages and Descriptions siesssscsosesssasrseescnnasrasssonsnensdiensensnvenssassetnsvansnis 133 OVEIVICW E E E T E E E E T 133 Setup Navigation BUTIONS scssisssnccssatcssessvcnsonensunss sannseecsnens venssnesseassbesssnessesiousneisnns 133 Setup PAGS ssasnsns sii atcsabinpdentancusiosacawisstmauadnsistanssuiuavoascmvinenatinncposnieiesivinesseueonsienenssunecs 134 Project Information Pages csesssiiciesc socecctietsieccceselvateteccecsotdcencecueatoccsseseuanctssvsvesinocsaevsest 136 Panel Information Page ices ien tiraniei r onae eE eneren e Eas AN S 137 Time amp Date Setup Page cccccccsssss
216. ialog where you must locate your new entry within the List of Addresses section 11 Click the Select button to make that the currently used IP Address communication parameter 12 Click OK to return to the Communications Settings dialog and place a checkmark within the Authentication Required radio box if your Master has been previously secured with a username password 13 Click on the Authentication Required radio box if the Master is secured and then press the User Name and Password button to open the Master Controller User Name and Password dialog 14 Within this dialog you must enter a previously configured username and password with sufficient rights before being able to successfully connect to the Master 15 Click OK to save your newly entered information and return to the previous Communication Settings dialog where you must click OK again to begin the communication process to your Master would want to temporarily stop communication to the Master and apply the new If you are currently connected to the assigned Master a popup asks whether you settings NOTE 16 Click Yes to interrupt the current communication from the Master and apply the new settings 17 Click Reboot from the Tools gt Reboot the Master Controller dialog and wait for the System Master to reboot The STATUS and OUTPUT LEDs should begin to alternately blink during the incorporation Wait until the STATUS LED is the only LED to blink 18 Press Done
217. ideo Fill 1 Composite Video Video Fill Video On 1200V panels only have Slot 1 available 2 Component RGB 3 Streaming Video pass thru Pass thru disable 0 or Pass thru enable 2 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BOS 500 1 1 Sets the button to display Composite video with no pass thru Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BOS 500 1 2 1 Sets the button to display Component video with pass thru enabled Refer to the Video Adjustment Slide Out Option Bar section on page 141 for more informa tion on the slot assignments within a VG Series panel A Button Commands Cont ABPP Set or clear the protected page flip flag of a button Zero clears the flag Syntax BPP lt vt addr range gt lt protected page flip flag value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 protected page flip flag value range 0 4 0 clears the flag Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BPP 500 1 Sets the button to protected page flip flag 1 sets it to password 1 BRD Set the border of a button state states Only if the specified border is not the same as the current border The border names are available through the TPDesign4 border name drop down list Syntax BRD lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt border name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On s
218. ight is Off When battery operated wireless sleep status means the touch panel base is either Off or suspended Microphone e Used for intercom applications requires an optional NXA AVB RGB or NXA AVBIETHERNET Breakout Box Speakers Stereo output with a frequency response of 450 Hz 7 KHz Rear Panel Components Side panel location on NXD Wall Mount panels RGB connector e This connector is only made available only by using an NXA RGB interface card installed within the touch panel This card is sold either as part of an RGB Kit configuration or within the NXA RGBKIT upgrade kit for previous Video Kit fitted VG Series panels Routes RGB and computer control pass thru signals to from a Modero panel up to 200 ft 60 9 m RJ 45 connector provides RGB Component video signals being routed from the rear RGB Component input ports and touch control information to the RJ 45 RGB connector on the NXA RGB card installed within the panel This connector routes VGA and Component video signals Audio Video connector RJ 45 connector for communication of differential audio video signals to from the touch panel panel type dependant This connector receives Composite video Stereo left right audio and microphone audio Video is received via the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Configuring video windows for playback is done using TPDesign4 In bound audio from the Breakout Box gets directed to the speakers Out bound audio
219. ign4 default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt TPDesign4 gt TPDesign4 Refer to the TPDesign4 Instruction Manual for more detailed instructions of these procedures From the menu bar select File gt New or click the New Project toolbar button From within the Step 1 dialog enter a generic Job name and use the Panel Type drop down arrow to choose a VG Series panel 1200VG 1500VG or 1700GVG e For the purpose of these procedures we ve chosen to use a Job Name of Test and have selected an NXD 1700VG touch panel FIG 132 TPDesignd Ble Edt Pael Page Bitton States Layo Transfer yew Tools Window Heb Ow ii gt x Sa s zy s Daan w Button Draw and Selection ADs tools Job name test Panel iype NXT 1700V6 Description 17 inch color sctive matri screen touchpanel with video input Ure system generated fle name Erja FIG 132 Sample VG Series TPD4 panel project 4 Fill in the fields within the remaining New Project Wizard dialogs and click Next at the end of each dialog to proceed final dialog Click the Finish button in the last dialog to close the wizard and proceed to the first generic page which is ready for you to start adding pages popup pages and buttons Add a new page to the project by selecting Page gt Add Page or click the toolbar icon which opens the Add Page dialog where you can then enter a descriptive name for the new page in the Name field suc
220. igning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master 3 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog 4 Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate that you are working as a NetLinx Master 5 Click on the Virtual Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed out because you are not going through the Master s UI 6 Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog FIG 93 a 7 From within this dialog enter the System number default is 1 8 Click OK three times to close the open dialogs save your settings and return to the main NetLinx Studio application 9 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 10 Right click on the Empty Device Tree System entry and select Refresh System to re populate the list The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number in the Online Tree tab until both the system number used in step 7 for the VNM is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page and the panel is restarted Step 3 Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port Use the CC USB Type A to M
221. iguring video windows for playback is done using TPDesign4 In bound audio from the Breakout Box gets directed to the speakers Out bound audio is sent from the on board microphone on the front panel Selecting audio files for playback is configured through TPDesign4 RJ 45 port for 10 100 Mbps communication The Ethernet port automatically negotiates the connection speed 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and whether to use half duplex or full duplex mode Audio Video connector Ethernet 10 100 port These panels communicate with the NetLinx Master using the ICSP protocol over Ethernet PWR connector 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector Stereo output through a 3 5mm mini jack for use with external speakers Stereo Output connector Ethernet 10 100 LEDs LEDs show communication activity and connection information A activity Yellow LED lights when receiving or transmitting Ethernet data packets L link Green LED lights when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly er aS 1700VG Panel Specifications Cont Rear Panel Components Cont USB connector 2 Mini USB connector Side panel location on NXD Wall Mount panels e The two Type A USB ports can connect up to two external keyboard or mouse devices for use with Virtual PC applications e These ports can be used to communicate to a PC and transfer pass thru touch control from the external devices thru the NXA A
222. in damage to the internal components and a possible burn out Apply power to the panels only after installation is complete Preparing captive wires You will need a wire stripper and flat blade screwdriver to prepare and connect the captive wires Never pre tin wires for compression type connections 1 Strip 0 25 inch 6 35 mm of insulation off all wires 2 Insert each wire into the appropriate opening on the connector according to the wiring diagrams and connector types described in this section 3 Tighten the screws to secure the wire in the connector Do not tighten the screws excessively doing so may Strip the threads and damage the connector Wiring a power connection To use the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector with a 12 VDC compliant power supply the incoming PWR and GND wires from the external source must be connected to their corresponding locations on the connector FIG 48 PWR GND Power Supply To the Touch Panel FIG 48 NetLinx power connector wiring diagram 1 Insert the PWR and GND wires on the terminal end of the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix cable Match the wiring locations of the on both the power supply and the terminal connector 2 Tighten the clamp to secure the two wires Do not tighten the screws excessively doing so may strip the threads and damage the connector 3 Verify the connection of the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix to the power supply Audio Video Port Connections and Wir
223. ing The following table shows the signal and pinout pairing information used on the RJ 45 Audio and Video connections Audio Video RJ 45 Pinout Information M 12345678 male Pin Wire Color Function Polarity 1 Orange White Right Audio In Fens 2 Orange Right Audio In Pair 2 RAL PaA 3 Green White Video In 4 Blue Mic Out 5 White Blue Mic Out 6 Green Video In 7 White Brown Left Audio In TIA 568B 8 Brown Left Audio ln m j ko RJ 45 connector pin configurations Refer to the Installing CATS Suppression Ferrites section on page 30 for detailed information on how to install the necessary number of CATS Suppression Ferrites on the Black A V RJ 45 cable connected to the panel Ethernet RJ 45 Port Connections and Wiring FIG 49 describes the blink activity for the Ethernet 10 100 Base T RJ 45 connector and cable The Ethernet cable is connected to the rear of Table Top and side of the Wall Mount panels A Activity LED yellow lights when receiving or __1 T transmitting Ethernet data packets A FIG 49 Layout of Ethernet LEDs A ETHERNET 10 100 L Link LED green lights when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly The following table lists the pinouts signals and pairing associated with the Ethernet connector Ethernet RJ 45 Pino
224. ing components Modero VG Series Touch Panel NXD or NXT FG225X XXRGB NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 pre installed NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 e NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 Product Specifications NXD 1200VG and NXT 1200VG The following table outlines the specifications for VG Series of 12 Modero panels 1200VG Panel Specifications Dimensions HWD NXD 1200VG with faceplate 12 38 x 12 59 x 3 25 31 43 cm x 31 97 cm x 8 25 cm e NXT 1200VG Fully raised 10 91 x 12 34 x 12 50 27 70 cm x 31 33 cm x 31 75 cm e NXT 1200VG Fully lowered 6 77 x 12 34 x 12 50 17 20 cm x 31 33 cm x 31 75 cm CB TP12 conduit wallbox 11 52 x 11 60 x 3 50 29 27 cm x 29 47 cm x 8 89 cm MB TP12 VESA mounting box 12 37 x 12 58 x 3 52 31 42 cm x 31 95 cm x 8 94 cm Power Requirements e Constant current draw 2 3 A 12 VDC stand alone Startup current draw 3 5 A 12 VDC stand alone Memory factory default 256 MB on board memory 128 MB Compact Flash upgradeable to 1 GB factory programmed Weight e NXD 1200VG 10 80 Ibs 4 90 kg NXT 1200VG 10 80 4 90 kg a 1200VG Panel Specifications Cont Panel LCD Parameters e Aspect Ratio 4 x 3 e Brightness luminance 250 cd m e Channel transparency 8 bit Alpha channel transparency
225. ing on the battery this indication lasts a few seconds Battery Life Charge Display Battery Life Indicator button FIG 27 NXT BP showing Battery Life Indicator button and charge 2 Repeat the above step for each NXT BP battery 3 Charge the NXT BP battery by either inserting it into the battery base or from within the optional NXT CHG charger which can sequentially charge up to two batteries If the 25 LED is blinking this indicates there is less than 5 of a charge remaining on the battery NOTE Installing the NXA BASE B to an NXT Modero Panel The battery base must be installed onto the NXT panel without any NXT BP batteries 1 Power Off the panel before attempting to use the NXA BASE B 2 Place the empty battery base onto a flat level surface 3 Verify the alignment of the Panel Interface connectors between the panel male connector and base female connector FIG 28 Battery Compartment OO Captive fasteners pulls outwards AL secure base to panel ias Panel Interface connector female Alignment pegs FIG 28 NXA BASE B showing Panel Interface and connector locations 4 Carefully place the Modero panel over the base alignment pegs FIG 28 and FIG 29 connected 12 VDC compliant power supply cannot have a battery base installed onto the bottom of the panel while powered POWER OFF the panel before installing the CAUTION NXA BASE B Hot swapping could damage the base and cause it not to
226. ing screws 7 Carefully lay the separated LCD from the main unit onto a soft cloth resting on a level surface This soft cloth prevents scratching during the rest of the installation procedure 8 Insert the back box into the surface cutout to check for fit Make any adjustments to the dimension of the cutout to accommodate the back box 9 Cutout the notched beam FIG 62 on page 84 using a height of 13 554 34 43 cm and a depth using the following guideline This notched beam is located on the side of the NXD unit furthest away from the connectors e Calculate the distance from the edge of the mounting ridge FIG 62 to the rear point on the box where the beam touches the back box Our example uses 1 3 8 inches on the deepest point of the rear back box e Calculate the thickness of the surface Our example uses 5 8 inches e The depth of the notch 1 3 8 minus 5 8 6 8 inches This value reflects the cutout depth necessary for the mounting ridge on the back box to be flush against the surface surface The MOUNTING TAB MUST BE FLUSH against the surface and therefore A The determining factor in the depth of the cut into the beam is the thickness of the the depth of the notch depends on that thickness WARNING 10 Thread the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet and any other audio video wiring from their terminal locations through the cutout opening Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1700VG Panels section on page
227. ing to a Master is done via the System Settings page where you configure the IP Address System Number and Username Password information assigned to the target Master If you have previously established a wireless connection to the Internet you must still navigate to the System Settings page and configure the communication parameters for the target Master Until those parameters are configured your Connection Status icon will remain red indicating there is no current connection to a Master e Ifyou have previously configured an internal wireless card for communication to the Internet you do not need to configure the panel s IP Settings fields and can skip the following Step 1 Step 1 Configuring the Panel s Wired IP Settings There are only two available methods of communicating to a target Master over the Internet Wireless via an internal card or Wired direct Ethernet connection If you are not using an internal wireless card you can only configure the connection parameters through the System Settings page This type of communication can be established either via either a Dynamic IP Address DHCP or via a pre reserved Static IP Address typically provided by your System Administrator IP Settings section Configuring a DHCP Address over Ethernet 1 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page 2 Locate the IP Settings section of this page Even though the Host Gateway
228. ini B 5 wire programming cable FG10 5965 to provide communication between the mini USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC This method of communication is used to transfer firmware KIT files and TPD4 touch panel files Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots allows the PC to A mini USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver 1 Verify this direct USB connection Type A on the panel to mini USB on the panel is configured properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections 2 With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within NetLinx Studio its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files 3 After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the Virtual Master and the panel click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window FIG 94 to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 4 Right click on the System entry FIG 94 and select Refresh System to re populate the list Verify the panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window The default Modero panel value is 10001 INE NetLinx Studio test axs Showing a Master firmware version and D os aba S ar A device number File Edit View Project Build Diagnostics Debug Tools Settings Windo System 1
229. ion The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1014 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 22 VALUE3 0 TEXT Double Bevel Raised L TEXT LENGTH 22 2BWW Syntax Get the current 2BWW lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt word wrap flag Variable status f variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1010 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 0 no word wrap 1 word wrap Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel BWW 529 1 Gets the button OFF state word wrap flag status information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1010 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 1 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 Button Query Commands Cont FON Syntax Get the current 2 FON lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt font index Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1007 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Font index Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel FON 529 1 Gets the button OFF state font type index information The resu
230. ired plus and minus signs not allowed Digit or space entry not required plus and minus signs allowed L Letter A to Z entry required Letter A to Z entry optional A Letter or digit entry required a Letter or digit entry optional amp Any character or a space entry required C Any character or a space entry optional The number of the above characters used determines the length of the input masking box Example 0000 requires an entry requires digits to be used and allows only 4 characters to be entered used Refer to the following Send Commands for more detailed information E BIM Sets the input mask for the specified addresses see the BIM section on page 194 BMF subcommand MK sets the input mask of a text area see the BMF section on page 196 Input mask ranges These ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric value for a field Only one range is allowed per field Using a range implies a numeric entry ONLY Input Mask Ranges Character Meaning Start range End range Range Separator An example from the above table 01255 This allows a user to enter a value from 0 to 255 Input mask next field characters These characters allow you to specify a list of characters that cause the keyboard to move the focus to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the text into the text area Input Mask Next Field C
231. is error again before attempting to send the file uncheck the Smart Transfer box It may be necessary do a Full Clean When using G4 WebControl to communicate with a target panel a VNC Server dialog appears on my screen During a WebControl connection to a target panel you are prompted with a G4 Authentication dialog which asks you to enter the assigned password for the panel before gaining access e If you are ever prompted with a VNC Server dialog you must enter the IP Address of the target panel This can be found within the Setup gt Protected Setup gt System Settings page This IP Address of the panel appears within the IP Settings section of this page Enter the IP Address and click OK You will then be prompted with the G4 Authentication popup where you must enter the panel s WebControl password While attempting to communicate directly with the Virtual Master on the PC via a USB connection I can t get my communication icon to turn Green A Green communication icon indicates that a connection has been established to the target Master or target Virtual Master Launch NetLinx Studio and configure the Master Connection communication settings for a Virtual Master Navigate to the System Settings page and toggle the Type field to USB Make sure the Type A USB connector is securely connected to the PC Make sure the panel DOESN T have the mini USB connected and TURN OFF the panel Once the
232. ixel x V pixel Hz An example is 1024x768 85Hz Cable Variance Allows you cycle through a choice of available cable compensation parameters Short Medium and Long e This field adjusts the cable compensation for any signal degradation over a selected cable length e This adjustment is done by using preset calculations to take into account the length and type of cable being used to transmit the signal Toggling the field can correct some signal problems RGB Input Resolution Use the UP DN buttons to alter the input resolution of the RGB signal being routed through the internal NXA RGB card e Supported Input resolutions are Auto automatically detects the incoming signal This is the recommended setting and should be used as the default selection 560 x 192 560 x 384 640 x 350 640 x 416 640 x 480 720 x 532 800 x 600 900 x 720 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 1280 x 800 1152 x 864 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200 HD 480p HD 720p and HD 1080i Note These displayed resolutions correspond to the supported input resolution of the NXA RGB card e Note When using 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 or 1280 x 800 it is recommended that you select those specific resolutions using the input adjustment UPIDN buttons Phase Use either the slider or the UP DN buttons to alter the RGB tracking signal level Range 0 31 default 0 Geometry Provides an on screen RGB Geometry popup dialog that allows you to
233. l Master on your PC via gt Ethernet the Master IP URL field must be configured to match the IP Address of the PC and make sure to use the Virtual System value assigned to the Virtual Master NOTE within NetLinx Studio Before beginning 1 Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable connected from either the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub or wireless to the Wireless Access Point 2 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 3 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master Communication Settings dialog FIG 85 No Active Spin Dein Seting gt Tamma Sehr Praticem Selection Tiarsgon Connection Option TCP AP Sena Marker G Vitus NeiLira Machen o o Nelia Maria C Aseen Mana Enter this IP kamaa aaa Niana Sao rasad ei pyre TA h Freep adn into the Sea ioe ff Master IP URL Tow set the parah te connect efter via USB a TCPAP to System Q or to the above System Number and lokong IP addwieee field on the System Settings IP Addresses of computer page also obtained by using the Start gt Run gt cmd command NOTE Changes to the System Humber of the Vetus MetLinw Manter dl not tah effect urai al commursc saor have been wopped and rentes C ea FIG 85 Assigning Communication Settings an
234. l by either pressing onto the wall or by securing the drywall between the housing and the drywall clip The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD 1700VG Wall Mount is that the outer frame Mounting Ridge must be mounted flush against the mounting surface Most beams have a distance of about 14 to 16 This is too narrow to accommodate the 17 03 43 26 cm wide outer housing back box of the NXD 1700VG 1 Determine which stud beam configuration to use Pre wall framing is done prior to the drywall installation local framing instructions vary based on location and building codes FIG 58 shows show to mount and position the main NXD unit into a pre wall environment for use with drywall clips There is no notching of a beam in this method The center vertical beam is cut out attached and secured to two horizontal beams then further secured into place by an another offset vertical beam that frames the insertion area This framing method provides a space of 1 20 inches 30 63 mm above and below the NXD unit to provide the drywall clips with room to secure themselves against the drywall 17 03 432 66 MM 1 63 MM F290 Enough room must be left for drywall clips to fold and Q collapse above and below the back box Offset vertical beam A a 200 30 48 MM 1 1 0 C 16 000 406 40 NMJ 0 0 16 00 4 Refer to the SP2256 11 engineering
235. l casing nN Se nN S Four pan head Housing Screws Rear plastic cover Four 8 32 screws FIG 34 Location of the attachment screws on the NXD back box and VESA housing Cable Installation for the MP TP12 15 Back Box 1 Connect the cable connectors RJ 45 Ethernet and any other audio video wiring to their respective locations along the side of the touch panel Use the tie wrap 45 0009A to wrap the cables together inside the VESA Mount enclosure This cable tie is used to insure the cable will not pull through or work itself through the new larger strain relief grommet 45 0032 01 over time Thread the incoming cables through the hole on the rear plastic cover and then through the strain relief grommet Slide the grommet along the cable and securely insert it into the opening on the rear plastic cover FIG 34 Finalizing the installation 1 2 Gently place the rear plastic cover over the NXD panel with LCD and MB TP12 15 back box Insert the protruding cables coming out from the opening on the rear plastic cover into the open strain relief grommet Allow some slack length on these cables as a service loop This service loop provides enough cable length so you can later remove the NXD with connected cables from the rear plastic cover DP WARNING CAUTION VERIFY THE LENGTH AND LOCATION OF THE INSERTED CABLES ONCE THE STRAI
236. l field e Use the Dim Mode Max Level bargraph to alter the Maximum DIM level value used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level range 0 100 Use the Dim Mode Min Level bargraph to alter the Minimum DIM level value used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level range 0 100 The position of this bargraph can never exceed that of the Dim Mode Max Level er Oa NOTE NOTE Sensor Setup Page Elements Cont Motion Sensor Provides the following fields e The Motion Detection field displays a reactive button that changes color illuminates and displays the words Motion Detected when motion is detected by the Modero panel s front motion sensor The Motion Sensor Port field indicates the port used to report the motion sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only The Motion Sensor Channel field indicates the channel used to report the motion sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only Wake Panel On Motion The Wake Panel Sensitivity relates to the sensitivity of the motion sensor to Sense detect motion and wake the panel accordingly Toggle the Enable Enabled button to either active inactive this feature Enable activates this feature Activating this feature reactivates the panel from a panel timeout sleep mode Enabled illuminated when selected deactivates this feature and makes the panel use the specified Display Timeout value set
237. lable connectors on the target touch panel o Verify a proper installation of all of the RJ 45 and power connectors between the target touch panel and breakout box 10 Verify a proper installation of all of the RJ 45 HD 15 and power connectors between the rear of the breakout box and the computer 11 Provide power to both the computer and the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box a a NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top Cable CA2250 70 The VG Series of Modero Touch Panels fitted with either an RGB Kit Video RGB or upgraded with an optional NXA RGBKIT FG2255 11 are shipped with a 10 3 048 m NXA MTC RGB Modero cable CA2250 70 that supports both RGB Ethernet Audio Video and Power connections This cable FIG 8 comes terminated with three RJ45 connectors Ethernet AV RGB and a single 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector for power FIG 8 10 Foot NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top Cable Product Specifications NXA MTC RGB Specifications Dimensions HWD e Length 10 feet 3 048 m Connectors Ethernet RJ 45 connector White routes Ethernet signals between the touch panel and the AVB RGB Breakout Box e Audio Video RJ 45 connector Black routes differential audio video signals between the touch panel and the box RGB RJ 45 connector Blue routes RGB Component video signals and touch control information to the RJ 45 RGB connector on the NXA RGB card installed within the panel This connector routes VGA and Component vi
238. le SEND_COMMAND TP SLT 1 Interlace 1 Enables Interlace on the incoming Composite video signal SEND_COMMAND TP SLT 3 Sharpness 1 Enables sharpness on the incoming MPEG video stream if available SEND_COMMAND TP SLT 2 SyncOnGreen 1 Enables the SynOnGreen feature for the incoming RGB signal if available VKS Send one or more virtual keystrokes to the G4 application Key presses and key releases are not distinguished except in the case of CTRL ALT and SHIFT Refer to theEmbedded Codes table on page 227 that define special characters which can be included with the string but may not be represented by the ASCII character set Syntax 4VKS lt string gt Variable string Only 1 string per command only one stroke per command Example SEND COMMAND Panel VKS 8 Sends out the keystroke backspace to the G4 application Embedded Codes The following is a list of G4 compatible embedded codes Embedded Codes Decimal numbers Hexidecimal values Virtual keystroke 8 08 Backspace 13 0D Enter 27 1B ESC 128 80 CTRL key down 129 81 ALT key down 130 82 Shift key down 131 83 F1 132 84 F2 133 85 F3 134 86 F4 135 87 F5 136 88 F6 137 89 F7 138 8A F8 139 8B F9 140 8C F10 141 8D F11 142 8E F
239. lear popup page group from all pages ClearP age Clear all popup pages from a page with the specified page name ClearA Il Clear all popup pages from all pages page name 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel DPF 409 Prev Deletes the assignment of a button from flipping to a previous page ENA Syntax Enable or ENA lt vt addr range gt lt command value gt disable buttons Variable with a set variable text variable text address range 1 4000 range command value 0 disable 1 enable Example SEND_COMMAND Panel ENA 500 504 amp 510 515 0 Disables button pushes on buttons with variable text range 500 504 amp 510 515 NOTE A Button Commands Cont FON Set a font toa specific Font ID value for those buttons with a defined address range Font ID numbers are generated by the TPDesign4 programmers report Syntax PON lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt font value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state font value range 1 XXX Refer to theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on page 187 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel FON 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 4 Sets the font size to font ID 4 for the On and Off states of buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515
240. les WEP encryption at 64 bits In this case all packets will be transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key WEP128 enables WEP encryption at 128 bits All packets are transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key If the key is not the correct size the system will resize it to match the number of bits required for the WEP encryption mode selected ne Wireless Settings Page Elements Cont Wireless Settings Cont Generate Passphrase Pressing the Generate button displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter a passphrase and then AUTOMATICALLY generate all four WEP keys which are compatible only among Modero panels e Note The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula Therefore this same Passphrase generates identical keys when done on any Modero because they all use the same Modero specific generator The Passphrase generator is case sensitive Take these WEP keys and enter them into the target WAP When also working with multiple panels these WEP Keys identical across all Modero panels must be entered manually into the target WAP Once all panels have been setup in this way these WEP keys can then be entered into the associated Wireless Access Point for ease of installation e The Passphrase generator is unique to Modero panels The Key generator on these Modero panels are specific and do not generate the same keys as
241. less of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password IP Settings Sets the IP communication values for the panel and contains DHCP Static Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol assigns IP Addresses from client stations logging onto a TCP IP network via a DHCP server e Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP IP network IP Address Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel Subnet Mask Sets a subnetwork address to the panel e Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages into a particular network segment Subnet Gateway Sets a gateway value to the panel Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between different types of networks applications or acts as a go between two or more networks that use the same protocols Host Name Sets the host name of the panel Primary DNS Sets the address of the primary DNS server used for host name lookups DNS Domain Name System is software that lets users locate computers on a local network or the Internet TCP IP network by host and domain The DNS server maintains a database of host names for its domain and their corresponding IP Addresses Secondary DNS Sets a
242. libration section on page 91 Refer to the NetLinx Studio version 2 x or higher Help file for more information on uploading files via Ethernet e Configure your panel for either direct connect or wireless communication Refer to the Configuring Communication section on page 93 for more detailed information about Ethernet or Wireless communication connection and only when the panel is connected to a power supply If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade the panel WARNING flash file system may become corrupted A It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct Ethernet The process of updating firmware involves the use of a communicating NetLinx Master The required steps for updating firmware to a Modero panel are virtually identical to those necessary for updating Kit files to a NetLinx Master except the target device is a panel instead of a Master Refer to either your Master s literature or Studio 2 x Help file for those procedures communicate with a secured Master If you are updating the firmware on or through a panel which is not using a username or password field you must first remove the WARNING Master Security feature to establish an unsecured connection A A touch panel which is not using a valid username and password will not be able to Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port Before beginning with this section verify your panel is powered and the Type A U
243. lt sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1007 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 72 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 ICO Syntax Get the current 27TCO lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt icon index Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1003 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Icon Index Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel ICO 529 1 amp 2 Gets the button OFF state icon index information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1003 Flag 0 VALUE1 2 VALUE2 12 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 Button Query Commands Cont 2JSB Syntax Get the current 2JSB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt bitmap Variable justification variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1005 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 1 9 justify Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel JSB 529 1 Gets the button OFF state bitmap justification information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 100
244. ly to the four 8 32 screw holes on the back of the rear plastic cover FIG 34 Insert the four provided 8 32 screws through the VESA mount s four holes and then into the pre drilled holes on the rear plastic cover 72 18MM tI 5 3 83 97MM f J l i l i p 3 23 82MM 4 52 115MM lt lt FIG 36 MB TP15 Mounting contact surface area When installing a VESA mount to the rear plastic cover use only the AMX provided 8 32 screws CAUTION 11 Secure these four 8 32 screws to the rear plastic cover by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver This step secures the VESA mount to the rear of the panel A Rear plastic cover rear view Rim of the strain relief grommet should lie flush against enclosure Eh Y CLIP FACING UP SONS gt lt a VESA mount connection location USE ONLY AMX PROVIDED 8 32 screws FIG 37 Installation of grommet into the rear plastic enclosure Refer to your particular VESA mount manufacturer s installation procedures for further surface mounting procedures DP WARNING Pre wall Installation of the Conduit Boxes Wall Mount panels NXDs are contained within a metallic outer housing back box This back box is not removed when installing the NXD into a conduit box CB TP15 or CB TP12 The back box is only removed t
245. m the Stream section of the page locate the Transport Protocol field and use the drop down arrow to select a desired protocol For the purposes of these procedures we ve chosen UDP as the protocol FIG 130 e An UDP protocol is typically used with higher bandwidth streams and only requires the entry of a single Target Port because both the video and audio are combined into a single media stream With this method the Modero panel always utilizes an audio port value of two greater than that used by the Target Port An RTP protocol is typically used both with lower bandwidth streams and when user wants to purposely separate the video and audio information into two distinct streams With this method the Target Audio Port must be manually entered and CAN NOT be the same value as the Target Port used for video 11 Enter the previously obtained IP Address of the target Modero panel FIG 128 into the Target Address field FIG 130 12 Enter a numeric value into the Target Port field This field corresponds to the port on the destination device where the outgoing video audio video stream is being directed to It is recommended that this value not currently be used by another port on the target device It is recommended that the following ports also not be used 21 22 23 80 443 and 1319 e For the purposes of these procedures we ve chosen to use 5000 as the video Target Port 13 If using RTP as a Transport Protocol enter a value
246. make direct contact with the black outer housing FIG 22 Location of the securing screws on an NXD panel Step 2 Install the new 802 11g mini PCI Wireless card NXD Complete the procedures outlined within Step 2 Install the 802 11g mini PCI Wireless Card section on page 38 and then continue with the following step Step 3 Install the new RGB Card Component NXD 1 Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object 2 Locate the RGB card s slot connector on the main board and align it with its counterpart on the bottom of the NXA RGB card 3 Carefully but firmly insert the NXA RGB card into the RGB connector slot on the main board until both the card rests atop the four raised securing holes and the RGB RJ 45 connector is evenly aligned with the other RJ 45 connectors on the back of the panel 4 Use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to secure the four NXA RGB pan head securing screws to the raised securing holes on the main board Refer to the Step 3 Install the NXA RGB Card Component NXT section on page 39 for more information Step 4 Install the new Compact Flash Memory card NXD 1 Complete the procedures outline within Step 4 Install the Compact Flash Memory Card upgrade section on page 40 and then continue with the following step Four Pan head Housing Screws Outer Housing I O connector plate NXA PCI80211G wireless card location Compact Flash card
247. me Use a valid IP Address Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BNN 973 192 168 169 99 Sets the TakeNote button network name to 192 168 169 99 ABNT Syntax Set the TakeNote ABNT lt vt addr range gt lt network port gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 Addresses network port 1 65535 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BNT 973 5000 Sets the TakeNote button network port to 5000 BOP The button opacity can be specified as a decimal between 0 255 where zero 0 is Set the button invisible and 255 is opaque or as a HEX code as used in the color commands by opacity preceding the HEX code with the sign In this case 00 becomes invisible and FF becomes opaque If the opacity is set to zero 0 this does not make the button inactive only invisible Syntax BOP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt button opacity gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state button opacity 0 invisible 255 opaque Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BOP 500 504 amp 510 515 1 200 Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel BOP 500 504 amp 510 515 1 C8 Both examples set the opacity of the buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 and 510 515 to 200 A Button Commands Cont BOR Set a border toa specific border style associated with
248. means that just one set of packets is transmitted to all the destinations e An ideal method of sharing a single stream to several destinations One of the best uses for this method would be if an educator or institution wanted to stream via either UDP or RTP its lecture series to a variety of students simultaneously around the world Every student could connect and receive the stream without having to wait their turn to view the content or see a severe drop in transmission quality Requirements for Receiving Streamed Content To receive and display content via a Modero panel e Verify you have installed the latest version of TPDesign4 on your PC Updates are available from the www amx com gt Tech Center gt Application Files gt Touch Panel Design Tools section of the website This application is needed to create the necessary page popup page used to display the incoming MPEG audio video stream identify the IP of the source MAX CSE and define the target audio video ports on the panel e Verify you have installed the latest firmware on your target Modero panel Updates are available from the www amx com gt Tech Center gt Firmware Files gt Modero Panels section of the website Modero VG Series firmware version 2 55 12 or earlier only supports MPEG 2 streaming media using UDP MPEG 4 is only supported by the VG Series Modero panel firmware version 2 60 25 or higher If using RTP as both the Target Port and the Target Audio P
249. message Calibration successful is the second on screen message that appears Touch each target in ra to calibrate after the calibration process is completed On screen crosshairs used for calibration of the touch device FIG 69 Touch Panel Calibration Screens 3 After the Calibration Successful message appears press anywhere on the screen to continue and return to the Setup page If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration page through the panel s firmware you can access this firmware page via G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the Calibrate button through your VNC window This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above where you can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures Testing your Calibration 1 Press and hold down the on screen Calibration button for 6 seconds to enter the Calibration Test page FIG 70 Calibrate Test On screen crosshairs is used to verify a proper calibration of the panel FIG 70 Calibration Test page 2 Press anywhere on this page to confirm the on screen crosshairs match your touch points 3 If the crosshairs do not appear directly below your LCD touch points press the Back button and recalibrate the panel using the above steps 4 Exit this Calibration Test page by pressing the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page Confi
250. models only e NXT BP FG2250 10 Battery pack for Table Top panels Provides 4 hours of continual operation NXT models only e NXT CHG FG2250 50 Battery charger for NXT BP batteries Charges batteries in 8 hours 1700VG Panel Specifications Cont Other AMX Equipment Cont Upgrade Compact Flash factory programmed with firmware NXA CFTPV256M 256 MB V VG compact flash card FG2116 43 NXA CFTPV512M 512 MB V VG compact flash card FG2116 44 NXA CFTPV1G 1 GB V VG compact flash card FG2116 45 VG Series Modero Connectors FIG 1 shows the connectors on the VG Series Modero panels aax T NXT VG Series p J NXD VG Series connectors located on 7 p lt W connectors located rear panel of the base on left side panel RGB AUDIO VIDEO ETHERNET PWR Stereo p Output Keyboard Mouse Composite RGB Audio Video from vee USB connectors 2 yini USB and pass thru NXA AVB RGB_ Ethernet Program Port control CAT5 CATS CATS FIG 1 Connector layout on sample VG Series Video Touch Panels RGB connector available with RGB Kit Connecting and Using USB Input Devices These panels can have up to tw
251. mponents If a user will be upgrading an NXD panel with a wireless card and an NXA RGB card NOTE NXA RGBKIT it is recommended that these both be done at the same time if possible NXA RGB RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 The NXA RGB FIG 12 is an RGB VGA plug in interface card that allows any of AMX s VG Series Modero Touch Panels to accept either RGB or HDTV Component signals directly from an external source when routed through an optional NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box This card is field upgradeable and works in tandem with the RGB connector on the front of an NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box It is recommended that any upgrade of internal components be done simultaneously FIG 12 NXA RGB RGB VGA Interface Card installed within a VG Series panel The NXA RGB card is an optional accessory already installed within Video RGB panels that can be added to any VG Series Video Modero panel as part of an upgrade kit The NXA RGB card is a daughter card that plugs into the Modero s main board This card provides the ability to display computer graphics RGB or component YCrCb video within a full screen or resizable on screen window on the Modero panel The NXA RGB card must be used with the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box This breakout box allows the Modero to accept and display high bandwidth and high quality RGB as well as HDTV Component video signals This box then converts the RGB or component video so that it can be sent across a UTP unshielded twist
252. mpty Device Tree System entry and select Refresh System to re populate the list 12 Power up your panel and press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page 13 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page FIG 86 a System Settings The System Number is assigned to the Master SHES V MESS EOE within the AMX software application these must match Enter the IP Address information of the PC used as a Virtual Master When using a Virtual Master there is no need to enter a username and or password CHED i CEED CED CD b FIG 86 Sample System Settings page for Virtual Master communication 14 Press the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to the word Ethernet ICSNet communication cannot be used on either 1200V Series or VG Series panels 15 Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL e By selecting URL the System Number field becomes read only grey because the panel pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master virtual or not A Virtual Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as NetLinx Studio TPD4 or IREdit 16 Press the Master IP URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the IP Address of the PC used as the Virtual Master 17 Click Done to accep
253. n and Upgrade of the Internal NXD Components Upgrading the components within a WallMount panel involves removing the rear plastic outer housing back box removing and or installing an existing component and then placing the back box back onto the NXD panel as described in the following sections Step 1 Remove the existing NXD Outer Housing 1 Carefully detach all connectors from the side of the touch panel and remove the front magnetic faceplate from the NXD unit by firmly gripping the faceplate and pulling outwards while applying a small amount of pressure to remove it from the main unit 2 Place the LCD facedown onto a soft cloth to expose the under side of the unit This step helps prevent scratching of the LCD 3 Unscrew the Stereo Output nut from the Stereo Output jack 4 Remove the I O connector plate by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to remove the two screws and slide the I O connector plate away from the back box housing DO NOT REMOVE THE PANEL SECURING SCREWS These screws secure the LCD to the metallic casing 5 Unscrew the four pan head Housing Screws from the rear of the NXD unit FIG 22 and gently remove the outer housing These four screws secure the back box to the internal panel casing DO NOT RENOVE DO NOT REMOVE t ae these panel pane securing screws securing screws x F Unscrew these four Housing Screws to remove the back box These
254. n the Navigation frame This page provides the user with the ability to select the source of the incoming video signal from either the rear Composite or S Video port the format of the incoming video NTSC PAL and the gain given to the incoming audio signal Video m Composite S Video Video Port and Video Format Video Port NTSC PALO Mic Gain value for incoming j Mae Game eg audio signal E ae FIG 131 A V Setup page 3 From within the Video section of this page check off the appropriate Video In and Video Port radio boxes which correspond to both the type of video signal being used and its associated format e For the purpose of these procedures we ve chosen to feed an NTSC signal into the rear Composite video connector As a result a user should check off select both the Composite and NTSC radio boxes If you are feeding a microphone audio signal into the rear MAX CSE microphone connector you could use the Microphone Gain field to enter an audio level 0 99 associated with the gain used by the rear microphone input At any time the user can choose to mute the incoming microphone signal by either toggling the state of the Microphone icon located at the top of the page or entering a value of zero into the Mic Gain field 5 Click the Apply button to save the encoding profiles to the MAX CSE S 1 Or es tep 4 Setup a streaming page within TPDesign4 Launch TPDes
255. nd alter it without having the image blocked by displaying only individual RGB adjustment dialog and specific RGB configuration pop ups Adjusting the Incoming Signal on the RGB Adjustment Page After opening the RGB Adjustment page if the NXA RGB is receiving an RGB signal this signal is then displayed within the incoming signal area By pressing within this area you are provided with a more accurate method of altering the incoming RGB signal by viewing it at full screen resolution and activating only specific RGB configuration pop ups NOTE To adjust these properties 1 Press the incoming signal area of the RGB Adjustments page to launch the Full Screen Edit mode display the incoming image at full screen and place a grey RGB Adjustments bar on the bottom of the screen Press this grey bar to maximize the RGB Adjustments popup menu FIG 112 which provides you with much more accurate adjustments of the incoming signal properties This menu can be dragged across the screen for a better view of the underlying image Once you exit this menu the grey bar is positioned back onto its original location Incoming RGB signal On screen image controls activated by pressing the RGB Adjustments bar RGB Brightness j 115 qi l 7 Once done making your screen adjustments SAVE SETTINGS FIG 112 Full Screen Edit Mode showing controls e Although these same options are available within the main RGB
256. nd communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page Refer to the following section for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or insecure connection Step 2 Configuring the Card s Wireless Security Settings The second step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the Wireless Settings section of the Wireless Settings page The section configures both the communication and security parameters from the internal wireless card to the WAP The procedures outlined within the following sections use an NXA WAP200G and the target WAP navigate to the System Settings page and configure the communication parameters for the target Master Until those parameters are configured your Connection Status NOTE icon will remain red indicating that there is no current connection to a Master Once you have completed setting up the wireless card parameters you must then Configuring the Modero s wireless card for unsecured access to a WAP200G 1 Power down the Modero unit and follow the wireless card installation procedures on NXD panels outlined in the Step 2 Install the 802 11g mini PCI Wireless Card section on page 38 2 Power up the panel this allows it to detect the card Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad Enter 1988 into the Keypad s
257. nd the PC This method of communication is used to transfer firmware KIT files and TPD4 touch panel files A mini USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots allows the PC to detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver 1 Verify this direct USB connection Type A on the panel to mini USB on the panel is configured properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections 2 With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within NetLinx Studio its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files 3 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 4 Right click on the System entry A in FIG 78 and select Refresh System to re populate the list This causes a refresh of all project systems establishes a new connection to the Virtual Master and populates the System list with devices on your particular system Neti ins Studio Ble ER Yew Project Byki Diagnostics Deuy Took Settings Yirdow Help Clos Gua S soe 2 DRO RA Soo sees i G8 Syster 1 Devices JE 00000 VNM AMX Corp VNM Version 1 0 JE 32001 NSX Application AMX Corp 2 30 EE 10509 1700 G Touch Panel AMX Cor 2 57 16 010 2 Kernel AMX Corp 2 4 25 18 01D 3 Root File System AMX Corp 01 02 19 BB 01024 Bootrom AM
258. nector CA2250 70 Included within the Video Kit FGxxxx xV is the following Modero VG Touch Panel NXD NXT 1200 1500 1700VG Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable CA2250 50 NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 1500VG Panel Specifications Cont Other AMX Equipment Several items are included within both the Video and RGB Kits Any items not specifically included within those kits are considered optional e CB TP15 FG032 10 15 metallic conduit box for Wall Mount installations e CC USB Type A to Mini B 5 Wire programming cable FG10 5965 e Kensington Lock Bracket FG2259 10 optional only with NXTs MAX CSE MAX Video Encoder FG2178 70 e MB TP15 Universal VESA Mounting Box for 15 WallMount panels FG032 50 Black metallic VESA back box 62 0032 50 Black plastic cover with grommet opening 60 0032 50 Four Phillips pan head screws 8 32 x 0 50 Black 80 0146 02 Tie Wrap Large 45 0009A for use with NXA MTC RGB Twelve Under cut Phillips head screws 6 32 x 0 500 Black 80 0139 Strain relief grommet 45 0004 03 for use with CA2250 50 Universal VESA Mount grommet 45 0032 01 for use with NXA MTC RGB NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 Also comes included within Video Kits NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 Also comes included within RGB Kits NXA BASE B FG2255 Wireless base for Table Top touch panels NXT models only e NXA
259. ng the default values The elements of the RGB Setup page are described in the table below RGB Adjustment Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active e A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password RGB Adjustment Page Elements Cont Settings e The Default Settings button sets the RGB settings to their default values indicated in this table The Undo Changes button disregards any changes made on the page since the last settings were saved e The Save Settings button saves any changes made to the RGB Adjustment page The Sync on Green button sets the NXA RGB card to search for the sync signal on Green signal Version Displays the firmware version being used by the internal NXA RGB card BOB Version Displays the firmware version of the communicating NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box If firmware is updated to either the panel or the breakout box both units must be power cycled for the panel to detect and display the BOB firmware version Status Displays the input signal properties of the signal routed through the internal NXA RGB card H p
260. nnected power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the attached connectors before being inserted into the conduit box 6 Carefully slide the main unit B in FIG 39 into the conduit box so that all Mounting Tabs lie flush against the conduit box C in FIG 39 Insert and secure the four securing 4 40 Mounting Screws into their corresponding holes located along the sides of the NXD FIG 38 and FIG 39 Place the magnetic faceplate A in FIG 39 back onto the main NXD unit B in FIG 39 Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations outside the conduit box on either the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 10 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing the NXD into drywall using Expansion Clips Expansion clips are mounted through the four oval holes located at the top and bottom of the panel As the screw is tightened the clip bends toward the insertion hole and into the wall This bending creates a grip on the wall by either pressing onto the wall or by securing the drywall between the housing and the drywall clip The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD is that the ou
261. nnecter Opten etn Mate TCR AP F Awen Hader F Seid Modem F Viras NotLin Master F huometcatin Pagans Ura Nene ond P FIG 96 Assigning Master Communication Settings and TCP IP Settings 4 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog 5 Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate you are working with a NetLinx Master such as the NXC ME260 64 or NI Series of Integrated Controllers 6 Click on the TCP IP radio button from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are connecting to the Master through an IP Address 7 Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the TCP IP Settings dialog FIG 96 This dialog contains a series of previously entered IP Address URLs and their associated names all of which are stored within Studio and are user editable A a 8 Click the New button to open the New TCP IP Settings dialog where you can enter both a previously obtained DHCP or Static IP Address and an associated description for the connection into their respective fields 9 Place a checkmark within the Automatically Ping the Master Controller to ensure availability radio box to make sure the Master is initially responding online before establishing full communication 10 Click OK to close the current New TCP IP Settings dialog and return to the previous TCP IP Settings d
262. nnection 192 192 192 192 Red Connection Status icon indicates no connection to a Master Green Connection Status icon indicates communication to a Master FIG 74 System Settings page using a USB Connection Type 5 Toggle the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to USB Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 166 for more information about the fields on this page ALL fields are then greyed out and read only but still display any previous network information 6 Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page 7 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that the panel s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the USB connector 8 ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page THEN insert the mini USB connector into the Program Port on the panel It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the PC indicated by a green System Connection icon If this is your first time installing the USB driver a USB driver installation popup window FIG 75 then appears on the screen Eg AMX USB LAN LINK Found New Hardware S AMX USB Device Digital Signature Not Found The Microsoft digital signature affirms tP been tested with Windows and that the 4 been altered since it was tested T
263. nnector Touch information is sent to and from the panel via this two way connector 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector for in bound power from a 12 VDC compliant power supply RJ 45 connector for Ethernet input from the control system BNC connector female for Composite or Chroma COMP Y Composite NTSC PAL and SECAM video is provided via this connector BNC connector female for luminance C Included Accessories e 4 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector 41 5047 e 6 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector 41 5063 e Rack Mount Kit KA2250 40 with mounting bracket 62 2254 02 Two 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connectors 41 5025 a NXA AVB RGB Specifications Cont Other AMX Equipment AC RK Equipment Rack Kit FG575 NXA MTC RGB Combo Table Top cable CA2250 70 e NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 RGB RJ 45 connection and wiring information This RJ 45 connector is used to route the signals connected to the RGB Component input port on the rear of the AVB RGB Breakout Box to the VG Series Modero panel Standard CATS cable can be used for this connection with short cable runs under 50 feet 15 24 m For cable runs over 50 feet 15 24 m AMX recommends using the Belden Brilliance VideoTwist 7987 This Belden cable is not CATS compliant but is designed to control skew between the red green and blue video signals Therefore for longer cable runs the video quality will be m
264. nsport Stream UDP MPEG 2 Transport Stream Supported Audio Codecs Advanced Audio Coding AAC MPEG Audio Level 2 MP2 MPEG Audio Level 3 MP3 Supported Video Codecs MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Button Assignments Button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels Button channel range 1 4000 button push and Feedback per address port Button variable text range 1 4000 per address port Button states range 1 256 General Button 1 Off State 2 On State Level range 1 600 default level value 0 255 can be set up to 1 65535 Address port range 1 100 1500VG Panel Specifications Cont Front Panel Components Light sensor e Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness a dim room results in a dimmer LCD display and a bright room results in a brighter LCD display Note The light sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup Page section on page 158 Motion sensor PIR e Proximity Infrared Detector to wake the panel when the panel is approached e Activation range 20 vertically from center and 45 horizontally from center Note The motion sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup Page section on page 158 Front setup access button Provides both access to the Setup and Calibration pages and toggles the panel between a sleep and wake state When wired sleep status means the backl
265. nt using a numeric keypad layout for those buttons with a defined address range The alignment of 0 is followed by lt left gt lt top gt The left and top coordinates are relative to the upper left corner of the button Syntax 7SB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text alignment gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text alignment Value of 1 9 corresponds to the following locations 0 1 2 13 4 5 6 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel JSB 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the off on state picture alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 AJSI Set icon alignment using a numeric keypad layout for those buttons with a defined address range The alignment of 0 is followed by lt left gt lt top gt The left and top coordinates are relative to the upper left corner of the button Syntax A7SI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new icon alignment gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new icon alignment Value of 1 9 corresponds to the followin
266. ntax TEF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt text effect name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state text effect name Refer to theText Effects table on page 211 for a listing of text effect names Example SEND_COMMAND Panel TEF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 Soft Drop Shadow 300 Sets the text effect to Soft Drop Shadow 3 for the button with variable text range 500 504 and 510 515 ATXT Sets Non Unicode text Assign a text string to those buttons with a defined address range Syntax TXT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel TXT 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 Test Only Sets the On and Off state text for buttons with the variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 A Button Commands Cont AUNI Set Unicode text For the UNI command UN and BMF command the Unicode text is sent as ASCII HEX nibbles Syntax UNI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt unicode text gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256
267. ntered into the URL List for the connected NetLinx Master 2 Toggle the blue Type field until Ethernet is selected from the Master Connection section of the System Settings page 3 Press the Mode field to set the connection Mode until the choice cycles to the word Listen 4 Enter a username and password into their respective fields if the target Master has been previously secured 5 Select the OnLine Tree tab from the Workspace window a EEE NOTE 6 System Address reflects the value set in the Device Select Diagnostics gt URL Listing from the Main menu FIG 87 Addressing tab PUR Pot IP Address Connection Status Used to obtain an 99 99 99 99 1319 99 99 99 99 lt Looking Up IP gt 88 88 88 88 1319 88 88 88 88 lt Looking Up IP gt CI xi existing URL ua ess o List from Master Port 1319 Cancel Used to set the FIG 7 8 9 10 11 URL List on Master 87 URL List dialog Enter the System and Device number for the specific Master associated with your panel as seen in the Online Tree tab Click Add and enter the IP Address of the Modero touch panel into the Add URL dialog box Click OK to enter your IP Address and add it to the list Click Done once you are finished adding your panel information to the list Press the on screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Auto Mode In this mode
268. nto the main NXD unit Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate 18 Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet and any optional audio video wiring to their respective terminal locations on either the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 19 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing an NXD into an optional Rack Mount Kit NXA RK17 1 Remove the magnetic faceplate bezel from the main NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force 2 Thread the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet and any optional audio video wiring from their terminal locations through the opening in the equipment rack Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1700VG Panels section on page 87 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 3 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector 4 Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation 5 Disconnect the terminal end of
269. o USB capable input devices connected for use both on its different firmware and TPD4 panel pages These input devices can consist of a keyboard or mouse USB connected input devices are detected and recognized by the panel upon connection Refer to the Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master section on page 95 for more information on using a USB connection NOTE 1 Insert the input device USB connectors into the appropriate USB connector on the panel 2 Press the on screen Reboot button Protected Setup page to save any changes and restart the panel 3 After the panel splash screen disappears e IfaUSB mouse has been connected a mouse cursor appears on the panel screen and its location corresponds to the mouse cursor position sent by the external USB mouse Ifa USB keyboard has been connected only on screen keyboards and keypads will reflect any external keystrokes sent from the external USB keyboard Cleaning the Touch Overlay You should clean the touch screen overlay after each day s use Always use clean cotton cloths and a spray bottle containing water Touch Panel Accessories O WARNING D WARNING Overview The following section outlines and describes both the included accessories and other AMX equipment available for both the Video and Video RGB models of touch panels When working with firmware it is important to note that version 1 xx of firmware should only be loaded onto box s using 1 xx series
270. o and set the connection mode to Listen This mode allows the Modero touch panel to listen for the Master s communication signals The System Number and Master IP URL fields are red only Auto In this mode enter the System Number and a username password if applicable This mode is used when both the panel and the NetLinx Master are on the same Subnet and the Master has its UDP feature enabled Master IP URL field is read only System Number Allows you to enter a system number Default value is 0 zero ETHERNET Only disabled when USB is selected Master IP URL Sets the Master IP or URL of the NetLinx Master ETHERNET Only disabled when USB is selected Master Port Number Allows you to enter the port number used with the NetLinx Master Default value is 1319 ETHERNET Only disabled when USB is selected Username Password If the target Master has been previously secured enter the alpha numeric string into each field assigned to a pre configured user profile on the Master This profile should have the pre defined level of access configuration rights Refer to the Step 2 Choosing a Master Connection Mode Setting section on page 110 for more detailed information on using the System Settings page Firmware Pages and Descriptions 168 s Modero Touch Panels Displaying Stream Content 2 NOTE Overview The current build of Modero firmware currently supports the display of both
271. o either gain access for the replacement of the Memory Compact Flash or upgrade the unit with an MB TP Universal VESA Mounting Kit INSTALLER LEAVE A GAP BETWEEN THE STUD AND CONDUIT BOX TO ACCOMMODATE THE DRYWALL SHEETROCK This gap allows the installation of the drywall sheetrock after the conduit box has been installed The most important thing to remember when mounting this conduit box is that the mounting tabs must be mounted flush against the outside of the sheetrock The CB TP12 and CB TP15 conduit wallboxes are optional metallic boxes that are secured onto stud beams prior to the installation of a solid surface Installation procedures and configurations can vary This section describes the installation procedures for the most common installation scenario 1 Fasten the CB TP15 or CB TP12 to a stud through the stud fastening holes located on the inside of the conduit box FIG 38 by using either nails or screws Knockouts should be located on the left side of the conduit box alongside the connectors Drywall sheetrock CB TP Conduit Wallbox Stud fastening holes Use the four 4 40 Mounting Screws to secure the NXD to the conduit box at these locations Mounting tabs for NXD panel should be flush with the outside of the sheetrock FIG 38 Screw locations for conduit box attachment in a pre wall installation 2 Remove any necessary wiring knockouts from the optional conduit box CB TP12 15 C in FIG 39
272. o the Streaming Source field within the TPDesign4 project e If this still doesn t produce a displayed signal cycle the Play Stop buttons and verify that both the encoding Status says Streaming verifying that the process of encoding is underway and that the unit is detecting an incoming signal shown by the word SYNC appearing in the Video Sync section of the UD e The most common error can result from a bad cable not being detected and therefore no signal becomes available for the unit to encode The encoding process can continue on a MAX CSE even without an actual signal being detected Programming You can program the touch panel using the commands in this section to perform a wide variety of operations using Send_Commands and variable text commands A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device Port System in all programming examples Panel is used in place of these values and represents all Modero panels Verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero touch panel firmware Verify you are also using the latest version of TPDesign4 WARNING Button Assignments Button Channel Range 1 4000 Button push and Feedback per address port Button Variable Text range 1 4000 per address port Button States Range 1 256 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state Level Range 1 600 Default level value 0 255 can be set up to 1
273. og of the NetLinx Studio application 4 Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Settings page 5 Do not alter the Master Port Number value this is the default value used by NetLinx 6 Enter a username and password into their respective fields if the target Master has been previously secured 7 Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page 8 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Listen Mode In this mode you must add the Modero panel IP Address into the URL List of the Master using NetLinx Studio This mode sets the Modero panel to listen for broadcasts from the Master using the panel IP from its URL list 1 Obtain either a Static IP for the Modero panel from your System Administrator or a DHCP Address from the IP Settings of the System Settings page e The DHCP Static field in the IP Settings section of the System Settings page must be set to DHCP to get Dynamic IP information for the panel e Press the on screen Reboot from the Protected Setup page to both save any changes and restart the panel e After power up press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to access the Setup page e Navigate to the Setup gt Protected Setup gt System Settings page and note the newly obtained Dynamic IP Address information from the IP Settings section This information is then e
274. once until the Master Reboot Status field reads Reboot of System Complete 19 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System The default System value is one 1 20 Right click the associated System number and select Refresh System This establishes a new connection to the specified System and populates the list with devices on that system The communication method is then highlighted in green on the bottom of the NetLinx Studio window Step 2 Prepare the panel for communication via an IP 1 Press the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to the word Ethernet 2 Press the blue Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL e By selecting URL the System Number field becomes read only grey because the panel pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master virtual or not A Virtual Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as NetLinx Studio TPD4 or IREdit 3 Press the red Master IP URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the NetLinx Master s IP Address obtained from the Diagnostics Networking Address dialog of the NetLinx Studio application Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Configuration page 5 Do not alter the Master Port Number value this is the default value used by NetLinx a i E 6 Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press
275. onduit box This beam acts to support the weight of the box from below and should be secured to both vertical beams at the sides Fasten the CB TP17 to the Notched stud beam through the stud fastening holes located on the inside of the conduit box FIG 56 by using either nails or screws Insert a perpendicular block between the Non Notched stud beam and the Conduit Box This block acts as a bridge to secure the stud beam to the CB TP17 along the stud fastening holes located inside of the box Secure the perpendicular block to the Non Notched stud beam FIG 56 by using either nails or screws Fasten the CB TP17 to the block through the stud fastening holes located on the inside of the Conduit Box FIG 56 by using either nails or screws Remove any necessary wiring knockouts from the optional conduit box CB TP17 FIG 56 where the necessary cables are threaded through for connection to the touch panel Thread the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet and any other audio video wiring through the knockouts use of the top or bottom knockouts are recommended with this installation Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1700VG Panels section on page 87 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel Install the drywall sheetrock before inserting the main NXD unit into the CB TP17 er i EE Inserted block bridges the gap between the Conduit Box and Stud lt _ lt the notched
276. one panel and sent directly to another panel Syntax TPAGEON Example SEND COMMAND Panel TPAGEON Turns On page tracking TPAGEOFF Syntax Turn Off page TPAGEOFF tracking Example SEND COMMAND Panel TPAGEOFF Turns Off page tracking VKB Syntax Popup the VKB o Example SEND COMMAND Panel VKB Pops up the virtual keyboard WAKE Syntax Force the panel WAKE out of screen Example saver mode SEND COMMAND Panel WAKE Forces the panel out of the screen saver mode Input Commands These Send Commands are case insensitive Input Commands ACAL Syntax Put panel in ACAL calibration mode Example SEND COMMAND Panel CAL Puts the panel in calibration mode AKPS Syntax Set keyboard AKPS lt passs data gt pass thru via the Variables RGB card pass data lt blank empty gt Disables the keyboard 0 Pass thru disabled 1 Not used 2 Pass thru enabled 3 amp 4 Not used 5 Sends out data to the Master Example SEND COMMAND Panel KPS 5 Sets the keyboard pass thru to the Master Option 5 sends keystrokes directly to the Master via the Send Output String mechanism This process sends a virtual keystroke command VKS to the Master Example 2 SEND COMMAND Panel KPS 0 Disables the keyboard pass thru to the Master The following point defines how the parameters within this command work e Accepts keystrokes from any of th
277. onnector used for programming firmware update and touch panel file transfer between the PC and the target panel Note When connecting the panel to PC using a CC USB or compatible cable be sure to power the panel On before attempting to connect the USB cable from the PC to the mini USB port on the panel Refer to the Step 5 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections section on page 100 for more information Operating Storage Environment Operating Temperature 10 C 50 F to 40 C 104 F Operating Humidity 20 to 85 RH e Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 to 85 RH Included Accessories e Installation Kit for 15 NXD panels KA2251 02 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Four Drywall clips 62 5924 05 and 6 sheet metal screws Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 e Installation Kit for 15 and 17 NXT panels KA2251 04 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 One CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black e Included within the RGB Kit FGxxxx xxRGB is the following Modero VG Touch Panel NXD NXT 1200 1500 1700VG NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB con
278. ormation will determine what encoder profile can be used on the outgoing media content If the network can only handle a throughput of 4 Mbps from the encoder it is recommended that you use something less than or equal to the High Quality encoder profile Setting up a Modero Panel to Receive and Display a Stream The MAX CSE must first be prepared to stream to the target Modero panel prior to creating the necessary TPDesign4 panel pages later be uploaded to the panel Step 1 Obtaining the IP Address of the target panel 1 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page FIG 127 7y f Setup Connection Status cA a DA e y Red Connection Status icon Information indicates no connection to a Master Panel v ar A Information Time Vy j b 4 Green Connection Status icon Acwainent coner jemet E indicates communication to a Master b Adjustments Audio Connected To System 4071 v GoD A Protected Setup Inactive pg Video Fane Brohiness 4 Adjustment TRN A o ay Base CE FIG 127 Setup page 2 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 3 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished 4 Press the System Settings button located on the Protected Setup page to open the System Settings page and obtain the IP information from the IP Address field FIG 128 S
279. ort for enCOder DECoder or COmpressor DECompressor Sampling Rate Audio Channels This read only field displays the audio streaming information Audio Streaming format sampling rate and number of channels e The properties of this incoming detected audio stream is given as Audio Codec Sampling Rate and Audio Channels e An example would be MP3 44100Hz 2Ch This means that the accompanying audio stream is using a 2 channel MP3 audio stream with sampling rate of 44100 Hz Supported audio codecs AAC MP2 or MP3 AAC Advanced Audio Coding is a digital audio encoding and loss compression format AAC was designed as an improved performance codec relative to MP3 which was specified in MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 Part 3 which is also known as MPEG 2 Audio or ISO IEC 13818 3 MP2 MPEG Audio Layer 2 is used as a file extension for files containing audio data of this type It remains a dominant standard for audio broadcasting This file type allows the coding of audio programs with more than two channels The main difference between these two types is that MP2 audio files are generally larger than their MP3 counterparts and are mostly used with MPEG 2 video streams Note MP2 is recommended for use with a high bandwidth video stream ex MPEG 4 or 6 Mbps 3 Mbps MP3 MPEG Audio Layer 3 is a popular digital audio encoding and loss compression format It was designed to greatly reduce the amount of data required to rep
280. ort for the split stream it is strongly recommended that this port number be an even value Using an odd numbered port value will cause the stream to not be properly recognized by the target Modero panel When using Modero firmware version 2 60 25 or higher a UDP Transport Protocol can use either odd or even ports Itis necessary to understand that Modero firmware is configured to look for audio on a port whose value is two greater than that set for the video port When configuring the Target Video and Target Audio ports within the MAX CSE s UI Stream Profiles page the value entered into the Target Audio field must be exactly 2 above the value entered into the Target Port video field e If you enter a Target Port value of 5000 when using RTP you must enter a value of 5002 into the Target Audio Port field e If using UDP only the Target Port video field is user definable because both the video and audio are sent out by the CSE as one stream and therefore there is no reason to define a separate audio port Entering a value of 5000 into this field will by default cause the target Modero panel to look for the incoming audio portion of the stream on the same port as the video port 5000 e Obtain the IP Address being used by the target Modero panel by locating the IP Address field on the firmware s System Settings page e Determine what is the available data rate for the network on which the encoder currently resides This inf
281. other external non AMX wireless devices Example If you enter the word apple into the Passphrase generator on a 3rd party Wireless Access Point it comes back with 1a 2b 3c 4d etc Entering the same apple in the Passphrase generator of any Modero panel generates a different key a1 b2 c3 d4 etc Only AMX Modero panels generate the same Current Key by using a unique Passphrase key generation technology A Current Key string when generated anywhere else will not match those created on the Modero panels Note The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula The passphrase generator is case sensitive Default Key Cycles through the four available WEP key identifiers in order to select a WEP key to use As the Default Key value is altered through selection the corresponding Current Key is displayed Each of these corresponds to a WEP key e This feature is useful for accessing different networks without having to re enter that networks WEP key Itis also sometimes used to set up a rotating key schedule to provide an extra layer of security WEP Keys This feature provides you with another level of security by selecting a Key value A single button is available for each WEP key up to a maximum of four keys e Pushing any of these buttons brings up an on screen keyboard Keys should be entered in hexadecimal notation It is common practice for every two characters representing a single byte to
282. oting Information Cont Symptom Solution updated my panel firmware but my Battery Base page doesn t seem to be working properly e Cycle power manually to the panel and check the Battery Base page after startup If downloading the firmware to the panel via a COM port try using an IP Address and retry the download of the firmware to the panel There is a crawling dashed line on the left border of the graphics On some units at some resolutions there are wavy lines across the entire screen This has been seen on middle resolutions and is referred to as the Mid Range Fallout problem e This is due to the graphics controller settings in the firmware Update firmware to the latest v2 XX firmware e Visit the www amx com gt Tech Center gt Downloadable Files gt Firmware Files gt Modero panels Then Download the KIT file to your computer My Modero panel isn t appearing in my Workspace window e Verify that the System number is the same on both the NetLinx Workspace window and the System Settings page on the Modero panel e Verify you have entered the proper NetLinx Master IP and connection methods into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page e Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 166 for more information My Modero panel can t obtain a DHCP Address In requesting a DHCP Address the DHCP Server can take up to a few minutes to provide the address
283. pad 1 AKEYR Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKEYR Removes the Keyboard Keypad ee N Panel Runtime Operation Commands Cont AKP Pop up the keypad icon and initialize the text Keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost The Prompt Text is optional Syntax AKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt string to that specified Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKP 12345678 ENTER PASSWORD Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 12345678 with prompt text ENTER PASSWORD AKR Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using AKEYB AKEYP PKEYP Remove the AKB AKP PKP EKP or TKP commands Keyboard Syntax Keypad 1 AKRI Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKR Removes the Keyboard Keypad BEEP Syntax Output a beep BEEP Example SEND COMMAND Panel BEEP Outputs a beep BRIT Syntax Set the panel BRIT lt brightness level gt brightness Variable brightness level 0 100 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BRIT 50 Sets the brightness level to 50 BRT Syntax Set the panel BRT lt brightness level gt brightness Variable brightness level 0 100 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BRT 70 Sets the brightness level to 70 DBEEP Syntax Output a DBEEP double beep Example SEND COMMAND Panel
284. page 142 NOTE NOTE RGB RJ 45 Connector Pinouts and Signals Pin Color Function Polarity 1 Orange White Blue Video Pair 3 Orange Blue Video Pair 2 Pair 1 Pair 4 Green White Data bidirectional Blue Green Video Blue White Green Video 6 Green Data TIA 568B bidirectional Brown White Red Video Brown Red Video It is important that the correct pairing is observed NXA CFTP Compact Flash FG2116 22 Every Modero panel is shipped with two factory default modules an EXM Memory Module and a Compact Flash card These panels are shipped with a 256 memory module which is not upgradeable The default 128 MB Compact Flash card is factory programmed with specific panel firmware and is the only upgradeable memory component This component can be ordered from AMX in several different upgrade sizes as listed in the following table Optional Compact Flash Memory Upgrades Compact Flash NXA CFTP256M 256 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 23 NXA CFTP512M 512 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 24 NXA CFTP1G 1 GB Compact Flash card FG2116 25 Upgrading the internal components involves opening the panel enclosure outer housing to access the internal circuit board removing the existing part and replacing them with the upgrade components as described in the following sections It is recommended that any upgrade of internal equipment be don
285. page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPON Popupl Main Activates the popup page Popup1 on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPON Popup1 Activates the popup page Popup1 on the current page Programming Numbers The following information provides the programming numbers for colors fonts and borders Colors can be used to set the colors on buttons sliders and pages The lowest color number represents the lightest color specific display the highest number represents the darkest display For example 0 represents light red and 5 is dark red RGB triplets and names for basic 88 colors RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors Index No Name Red Green Blue 00 Very Light Red 255 0 0 01 Light Red 223 0 0 02 Red 191 0 0 03 Medium Red 159 0 0 04 Dark Red 127 0 0 05 Very Dark Red 95 0 0 06 Very Light Orange 255 128 0 07 Light Orange 223 112 0 08 Orange 191 96 0 09 Medium Orange 159 80 0 10 Dark Orange 127 64 0 11 Very Dark Orange 95 48 0 12 Very Light Yellow 255 255 0 13 Light Yellow 223 223 0 14 Yellow 191 191 0 15 Medium Yellow 159 159 0 16 Dark Yellow 127 127 0 17 Very Dark Yellow 95 95 0 18 Very Light Lime 128 255 0 19 Light Lime 112 223 0 20 Lime 96 191 0 21 M
286. panel has turned ON THEN connect the mini USB to the Program Port The USB icon should appear in your system tray If it doesn t refer to the Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master section on page 95 The panel can take a few minutes to detect the connection to the PC keep getting a yellow exclama tion point on my USB in the Sys tem Tray Make sure you have installed the latest USB driver for the AMX LAN Even if you have loaded the latest NetLinx Studio it is recommended that if you are working with the new 1200V and or VG Series of panels that you install the updated USB executable available at www amx com Refer to the Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master section on page 95 Calibration is not working After the Modero touch panel has been updated with a new firmware kit downloaded to the panel through NetLinx Studio the calibration could need to be reset e Cycling power to the panel should provide a baseline calibration for the particular touch panel Proceed to the Calibration page and reset the on screen calibration Panel doesn t respond to my touches e The protective cover acts to press on the entire LCD and makes calibration difficult because the user can t calibrate on specific crosshairs when the sheet is pressing on the whole LCD Verify that the protective laminate coating on the LCD is removed before beginning any calibration process Troublesho
287. password field and press Done when finished 5 Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page 6 From within the Wireless Settings section of the Wireless Settings page touch the Network Name SSID field FIG 80 Wireless Settings IP Settings Wireless Settings Mini PCI settings Fair Good Very Good Excellent S FIG 80 Wireless Settings page showing default values 7 From the Service Set Identifier keyboard enter the SSID name used by your target Wireless Access Point case sensitive e The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP If this field is left blank the unit will attempt to connect to the first available WAP By default all WAP200Gs use AMX as their assigned SSID value One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the SSID was not entered properly You must maintain the same case when entering the SSID information ABC is not the same as Abc 8 Toggle the Authentication field to an Open System default e Open System Authentication allows any device to join the network if the panel s SSID matches the WAP s SSID 9 Toggle the Encryption field until it reads Clear Text default a ES NOTE V NOTE The remaining Wireless Settings fields are then greyed out and become read only All NXA WAP200Gs are factory shipped as an unsecured WAP with no WEP encryption The WAP200G ini
288. pecifications Cont Other AMX Equipment Cont NXT BP FG2250 10 Battery pack for Table Top panels Provides 4 hours of continual operation NXT models only e NXT CHG FG2250 50 Battery charger for NXT BP batteries Charges batteries in 8 hours e Upgrade Compact Flash factory programmed with firmware NXA CFTPV256M 256 MB V VG compact flash card FG2116 43 NXA CFTPV512M 512 MB V VG compact flash card FG2116 44 NXA CFTPV1G 1 GB V VG compact flash card FG2116 45 Product Specifications NXD 1700VG and NXT 1700VG The following table outlines the specifications for VG Series of 17 Modero panels 1700VG Panel Specifications Dimensions HWD NXD 1700VG with faceplate 14 44 x 18 09 x 3 31 36 68 cm x 45 95 cm x 8 41 cm e NXT 1700VG Fully raised 13 29 x 17 84 x 12 44 35 31 cm x 45 31 cm x 31 60 cm e NXT 1700VG Fully lowered 6 23 x 17 84 x 12 44 15 82 cm x 45 31 cm x 31 60 cm CB TP17 conduit wallbox 13 55 x 17 07 x 3 49 34 43 cm x 43 38 cm x 8 85 cm MB TP17 VESA mounting box 14 44 x 18 09 x 3 48 36 68 cm x 45 95 cm x 8 84 cm Power Requirements e Constant current draw 4 5 A 12 VDC stand alone Startup current draw 6 5 A 12 VDC stand alone Memory factory default 256 MB on board memory 128 MB Compact Flash upgradeable to 1 GB factory programmed Weight NXD 1700VG 18 20 Ibs 8 26 kg NXT 1700VG 22 00 Ibs
289. placeholders The display where you should enter a character The arrow keys will move between the allow you to replace them The text entry code operates as if it is in the overwrite mode If the cursor is positioned on a character already entered and you type in a new and valid character the new character replace the old character There is no shifting of characters When working with ranges specified by the mask the keyboard allows you to enter a number between the values listed in the ranges If a user enters a value that is larger than the max the maximum number of right most characters is used to create a new acceptable value e Example 1 If you type 125 into a field accepting 0 100 then the values displayed will be m I2 25 e Example2 If the max for the filed was 20 then the values displayed will be 1 12 5 When data overflows from a numerical field the overflow value is added to the previous field on the chain if the overflow character was specified In the above example if the overflow flag was set the first example will place the 1 into the previous logical field and the second example will place 12 in the previous logical field If the overflow filed already contains a value the new value will be inserted to the right of the current characters and the overflow field will be evaluated Overflow continues to work until a filed with no overflow value is set or there are no more fields left i e reached first
290. ple SEND_COMMAND Panel PPK Popup1 Kills the popup page Popup on all pages Page Commands Cont PPM A Modal popup page when active only allows you to use the buttons and features on that Set the modality POPUP page All other buttons on the panel page are inactivated of a specific Syntax popup page to PPM lt popup page name gt lt mode gt Modal or NonModal Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page mode NONMODAL converts a previously Modal popup page to a NonModal MODAL converts a previously NonModal popup page to Modal modal 1 and non modal 0 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPM Popup1 Modal Sets the popup page Popup1 to Modal SEND_COMMAND Panel PPM Popup1 1 Sets the popup page Popup1 to Modal PPN If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is Activate a already on do not re draw it This command works in the same way as the Show Popup specific popup page to launch on either a specified page or the current page command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPN lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPN Popup1 Main Activates Popup on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPN Popup1
291. popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPF Popup1 Main Deactivates the popup page Popup on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPF Popup1 Deactivates the popup page Popup1 on the current page PPG Toggle a specific popup page on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 Toggling refers to the activating deactivating On Off of a popup page This command works in the same way as the Toggle Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPG lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPG Popup1 Main Toggles the popup page Popup7 on the Main page from one state to another On Off Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPG Popup1 Toggles the popup page Popup7 on the current page from one state to another On Off PPK Kill a specific popup page from all pages Kill refers to the deactivating Off of a popup window from all pages If the pop up page is part of a group the whole group is deactivated This command works in the same way as the Clear Group command in TPDesign 4 Syntax PPK lt popup page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page Exam
292. popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PSP Popup1 100 0 Sets the Popup1 show effect x coordinate value to 100 and the y coordinate value to 0 PST Set the show effect time for the specified popup page Syntax PST lt popup page name gt lt show effect time gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On show effect time Given in 1 10ths of a second Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PST Popup1 50 Sets the Popup1 show effect time to 5 seconds PAGE Flip to a specified page Flips to a page with a specified page name If the page is currently active it will not redraw the page Syntax PAGE lt page name gt Variable page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PAGE Pagel Flips to page1 Page Commands Cont PPOF Deactivate a specific popup page on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is part of a group the whole group is deactivated This command works in the same way as the Hide Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPOF lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters
293. previous AMX Breakout Boxes in that it is firmware upgradeable feeds high quality video signals via RJ 45 cables and provides keyboard and mouse pass through functionality via the rear USB connector If the PWR Activity LED on the front of the unit is blinking rapidly this indicates there is currently an activity in progress such as a download DO NOT unplug the unit during a download as long as the LED is blinking in this manner Product Specifications NXA AVB RGB Specifications Dimensions HWD e 1 52 x 5 54 x 4 93 3 86 cm x 14 07 cm x 12 52 cm e Width when attached to mounting ears 6 65 16 86 cm Power Consumption 240mA e Routed through AVB using a 12 VDC compliant power supply Certifications e FCC Part 15 Class B CE and EN60950 Features e Accepts either Composite or S Video inputs 1200V or VG Series panels e Accepts RGB or Component inputs e Integrates USB Type B connector for keyboard and mouse communication from the panel through to the PC Accepts 6 wire stereo audio with 4 wire microphone output Provides video audio distribution to the video capable panels over CAT5 cable up to 200 ft 60 9 m Provides audio distribution to audio capable touch panels over a CAT5 cable up to 200 ft 60 9m Routes RGB and computer control pass thru signals to from a Modero panel up to 200 ft 60 9 m This unit is included with VG Series panels using RGB Kits and as part of the NXA RGBKIT upgrade kit
294. protected 1 QRPP password Example SEND COMMAND Panel RPP Resets the protected Setup page password to 1988 AVOL Syntax Set the panel 4VOL lt volume level gt volume Variable volume level 0 100 100 is maximum volume setting Example SEND_COMMAND Panel VOL 50 Set the panel volume to 50 Dynamic Image Commands The following is a listing and descriptions of Dynamic Image Commands Dynamic Image Commands BBR Set the bitmap of a button to use a Syntax BBR lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt resource name gt Force a refresh for a given resource i Variable particular resource variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state resource name 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BBR 700 1 Sports_Image Sets the resource name of the button to Sports_Image RAF See page 230 RFR Syntax RFR lt resource name gt Variable resource name 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel RFR Sports_Image Forces a refresh on Sports_Image RMF Modify an existing resource Syntax A lt RMF lt resource name gt lt data gt Variable resource name 1 50 ASCII characters data Refer to the table in the RAF command for more information Example SEND_COMMAND P
295. r Communication Settings dialog FIG 77 4 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog ea EE Avedathe Sytem Contgurstion Seang It No Active Spite Det Seting Sytem eS errs ees Terma Seling Mo Actore Sytem Dela Settings Configurator Virtual NetLinx Master Settings The Viet Ne rt Master connection allows G4 kuch panes jo connect deact to Nerline Stado instead of a physical Netw Mindan bos Me Mmrshees Syren Nantes il To woe zet the panels to correct efter via USB ae TCPAP to System 0 or tp the above System Number and fokowwng IP addressee B NOTE Changes to the Siystews Number of the Vitus Nellyn Manter dl not take eflect urai al commursc shone have been wopped and found EE ose IP Address of computer not needed as this is a direct USB connection FIG 77 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master 5 Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate that you are working as a NetLinx Master 6 Click on the Virtual Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed out because you are not going through the Master s UI 7 Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Set
296. r and then to from the connected computer PWR 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector that connects to a 12 VDC compliant power supply This port can be used to provide power to a Modero panel by sending it through the NXA AVB RGB rear power connector through to the front power connector ETHERNET RJ 45 connector routes data to the G4 panel through the front Ethernet port These connections use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable to provide communication between the target panel box and Master e Video In BNCs Feeds either Composite S Video Luma or S Video Chroma signals into the NXA AVB RGB This feed is then redirected out to a Modero panel through the front Audio Video CATS5 port Note Although the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box can accept either a Composite or S Video input signal type only one input source can be used at a time This unit does not auto detect the incoming signal type Using S Video would require a cable split and a simultaneous connection to both the COMP Y and C connectors which would prevent an additional Composite signal from being fed into the unit A user should not try to connect two Composite video signal cables to the COMP Y and C connectors Wiring the NXA AVB RGB for Unbalanced Audio Most domestic audio equipment has unbalanced audio inputs and outputs This means that the audio output left right or mono appears on a single wire and is referenced to 0 V or Ground Typical connectors used are RCA
297. r and two batteries The optional NXT CHG Modero Power Station FIG 31 is a two slot stand alone battery charger that can be used to recharge up to two NXT BP batteries The batteries are charged in the order they are inserted into the charger The NXT CHG Slot 1 has the feature of being able to completely discharge and recharge recalibrate a battery Battery Life indicator NXT BP Modero Power Pack battery NXT CHG Modero Power Station charger FIG 31 NXT CHG Kit consists of one NXT CHG charger and two NXT BP batteries Product Specifications NXT BP and NXT CHG Specifications Dimensions HWD e 1 13 x 8 63 x 11 81 2 86 cm x 21 91 cm x 30 00 cm Power Requirements e NXT BP Battery Voltage 11 1 Volts e NXT CHG 90 264 VAC 47 63 Hz Single Phase using the included 24 VDC power supply Weight 0 57 Ibs 0 26 kg Features e Charge time for two depleted batteries 5 hours Charge Rate 2 5 A 12 VDC e 2 Bays Sequential charging e LED One LED indicator in front of each bay which conveys the status of that bay Refer to the Reading NXT CHG LED Indicator section for more information e Recalibration pushbutton located between the bays Initiates recalibration sequence in the left bay only e Recalibration Time less than 9 hours Other AMX Equipment e NXT BP battery pack FG2255 10 additional The batteries are charged in the order they are inserted into the NXT
298. r how large your installation is how it is laid out and how it is constructed e Wireless Equivalent Privacy WEP Security is a method by which WLANs protect wireless data streams A data stream encrypted with WEP can still be intercepted or eavesdropped upon but the encryption makes the data unintelligible to the interloper The strength of WEP is measured by the length of the key used to encrypt the data The longer the key the harder it is to crack 802 11b implementations provided 40 bit and 104 bit WEP keys This is known respectively as 64 bit and 128 bit WEP encryption 64 bit is generally not regarded as adequate security protection Both key lengths are supported by the Modero product line Whichever level of WEP you use it s crucial to use identical settings CASE SENSITIVE the key length and the key itself on all devices Only devices with common WEP settings will be able to communicate Similarly if one device has WEP enabled and another doesn t they won t be able to talk to each other Although the calculations required to encrypt data with WEP can impact the performance of your wireless network it s generally seen only when running benchmarks and not large enough to be noticeable in the course of normal network usage Configuring a Wireless Connection When working with a wireless card the first step is to configure wireless communication parameters within the Wireless Settings page This page only configures the card to
299. r limit GL lt bargraph low gt Set the bargraph lower limit GN lt bargraph slider name gt Set the bargraph slider name Joystick cursor name GC lt bargraph slider color gt Sets the bargraph slider color Joystick cursor color Gl lt bargraph invert gt Set the bargraph invert noninvert or joystick coordinate 0 1 2 3 GIV section on page 204 more information GU lt bargraph ramp up gt Set the bargraph ramp up time in intervals of 1 10 second GD lt bargraph ramp down gt Set the bargraph ramp down time in 1 10 second GG lt bargraph drag increment gt Set the bargraph drag increment Refer to the GDI command on page 204 for more information lt video On Off gt Set the Video either On value 1 or Off value 0 OT lt feedback type gt Set the Feedback Output Type to one of the following None Channel Invert On AlwaysOn Momentary or Blink SM Submit a text for text area button SF lt 1 or 0 gt Set the focus for text area button OP lt 0 255 gt Set the button opacity to either Invisible value 0 or Opaque value 255 OP lt 00 FF gt Set the button opacity to either Invisible value 00 or Opaque value FF UN lt Unicode text gt Set the Unicode text See the UN section on page 210 for the text format LN lt 0 240 gt Set the lines of video being removed See the BLN section on page 194 for more information
300. rarchy errors etc indicating problems with the Compact Flash e Panel will not boot or gets stuck on AMX splash screen e Other problems also started after downloading to a new panel or a panel with a TPD4 file that takes up a considerable amount of the available Compact Flash Cause If the G4 device already contains a large enough file subsequent downloads will take up more space than is available and could often corrupt the Compact Flash The demo file that typically ships with G4 panels is one such file Solution DO NOT download TPD4 files of large size over the demo pages or any other large TPD4 file First download a small blank one page file to the G4 panel using the Normal Transfer option to send download the page Reboot the device then do your regular file or firmware download My NXA BASE B Battery Base isn t being recognized by the NXT touch panel The battery base CAN NOT be hot swapped This swapping occurs when an NXT panel is currently being powered by a PSN6 5 and then is connected to a battery base containing NXT BP batteries Introducing a new power source onto an existing configuration can damage the NXA BASE Solution If your base is not being recognized by the touch panel but is still providing power e Launch the latest NetLinx Studio e Refresh the particular System from within the OnLine Tree tab e Identify the NXT panel using the battery base e From the Main menu
301. rate increases and as the quality degrades this rate decreases Data rates for 802 11g communication are 1 2 5 5 11 and 54 Mbps Ex 802 11g has a max data rate is 54 Mbps Refer to both the Wireless Settings Page Wireless Access Overview section on page 101 and Configuring a Wireless Connection section on page 102 for more detailed information of setting up the Modero panel for wireless network access System Settings Page The System Settings page FIG 126 sets the Secondary DNS Address information with its corresponding IP communication parameters NetLinx Master communication settings and reads the device number assigned to the Modero panel System Settings IP Settings Master Connection IP Settings section Master Connection section NetLinx Master properties Master Connection features are not saved until the panel is rebooted L d Hea SS Ses Red fields are user editable Blue fields cycle through choices Grey fields are read only Hi FIG 126 System Settings page showing default values reads and assigns values to the panel and Master The elements of the System Settings page are described in the table below System Settings Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regard
302. resent the original audio data yet still sound like a faithful reproduction of the original uncompressed audio to most listeners Note MP3 is recommended for use with a low bandwidth video stream ex MPEG 2 or lt 3 Mbps This is the sampling rate used by the incoming audio stream Sampling rate defines the number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make it a discrete signal e Rate is measured in KHz KiloHertz e Available audio sampling rates 32KHz 44 1KHz and 48KHz Some of the common uses for these rates include 32 000 KHz miniDV digital video camcorder 44 100 KHz compact disc also most commonly used with MPEG 1 audio VCD SVCD MP3 48 000 KHz digital sound used for digital TV DVD DAT films and professional audio Note Currently 32KHz is not supported within the Modero firmware The number of audio channels encoded within the incoming audio stream Modero only supports 2CH 2 channel audio Brightness Use the UP DN buttons to alter the brightness level of the incoming signal e Range 0 255 default 128 Contrast Use the UP DN buttons to alter the contrast level of the incoming signal e Range 0 255 default 128 Saturation Use the UP DN buttons to alter the color saturation level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Hue Use the UP DN buttons to alter the hue level of the incoming signal e Range 0 255 default
303. ressions path A lt path gt Set Directory path The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus the protocol host and filename The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape sequences and in the case of the FTP protocol regular expressions refresh R lt refresh 1 65535 gt The number of seconds between refreshes in which the resource is downloaded again Refreshing a resource causes the button displaying that resource to refresh also The default value is 0 only download the resource once newest N lt 0 1 gt Set the newest file A value of 1 means that only the most recent file matching the pattern is downloaded preserve V lt 0 1 gt Set the value of the preserve flag Default is 0 Currently preserve has no function Example SEND_COMMAND Panel RAF New Image PO HAMX COM ALab Test_filetFtest jpg Adds a new resource The resource name is New Image P protocol is an HTTP H host name is AMX COM A file path is Lab Test file and F file name is test jpg Troubleshooting This section describes the solutions to possible hardware firmware issues that could arise during the common operation of a Modero touch panel Troubleshooting Information Symptom Solution Manifest xma can not be found An error occurs when sending a file to a G4 panel Manifest xma is the file that contains the listing for all the files If you see th
304. rews in a clockwise direction 8 Insert the NXA RK with connected NXD unit into the equipment rack making sure to align the screw holes along the sides on the NXA RK with the holes in the equipment rack CAUTION DP WARNING 9 Use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to secure the NXA RK with connected NXD unit to the equipment rack using 10 32 screws not included 10 Place the magnet faceplate back onto the main NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and placing it on the housing with gentle force Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate 11 Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations on either the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 12 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Wiring Guidelines for the 1200VG and 1500VG Panels These Modero panels use a 12 VDC compliant power supply to provide power to the panel via the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix PWR connector Use the previously referenced power requirements to determine the power draw The incoming PWR and GND wires from the power supply must be connected to the corresponding locations within the PWR connector These units should only have one source of incoming power Using more than one source of power to the touch panel can result
305. rged through either the base when connected to the Modero panel or through an optional NXT CHG Modero Power Station Extra NXT BP Power Packs can be purchased separately as an optional accessory FIG 25 NXT BP Power Pack Product Specifications NXT BP Specifications Dimensions HWD 0 69 x 3 50 x 5 81 1 75 cm x 8 89 cm x 14 76 cm Power Voltage e 11 1 Volts nominal Weight Single NXT BP Power Pack 1 0 Ibs 0 45 kg Features e Battery Usage 3 to 8 hours time is panel type and usage dependant Charge Capacity 6300mAh Operating Storage Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F Environment Operating Humidity 20 85 RH Storage Discharge Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 85 RH NXA BASE B Battery Base Kit FG2255K The NXA BASE B Battery Base is a Modero accessory that allows the Modero Table Top touch panels NXT to function off the collective charge of two internally connected NXT BP batteries FG2255 10 The base provides both power and battery information to the panel via the panel interface connector FIG 26 The NXT BP batteries can be charged through either the base only when connected to the NXT touch panel or through an optional NXT CHG Modero Power Station Panel Interface Connector NXT BP NXA BASE B Battery Pack Battery Base FIG 26 NXA BASE B and NXT BP combo This base also comes as par
306. ring a DHCP Address over Ethernet cccsssseeeeresseee 109 IP Settings section Configuring a Static IP Address over Ethernet ssssccsssseee 110 Step 2 Choosing a Master Connection Mode Setting cccccccsssssssssssessseeeees 110 Step 3 Configuring the Ethernet Connection Type sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssssee 111 Master Connection Virtual Master communication over Ethernet ccccscccsseeees 112 Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address URL Mode 114 Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Listen Mode 114 Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Auto Mode 115 Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel eee eeeececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 Using your NetLinx Master to control the G4 panels cceececeeseeeseseeceeeeeeeeee 118 Upgrading Modero Firmware sivessisscsssisnacccsecsacioninvececasansnescsioneseonciwereassxenneaned 121 OVGFVIOW sssssissasscsdsssunsesncnnsussianssnnsssnnessadenessonnaseanesanubanspennss sennnasaveqannasdynsaaunssnanseonss 121 Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port c ssscssscecsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 121 Step 1 Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type sseeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 Step 2 Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication via the USB port s06 122 Step 3 Confirm and Upgrade the firmware v
307. rt for extended input devices and panel programming via a mini USB port The new G4 graphics and Video RGB technology is supported by the release of the latest TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design Program These video capable panels support several video formats NTSC SECAM and PAL Color Active CA panels don t support video Multimedia Streaming Video Touch Panels VG Series Although these panels are similar to the 1200V models in that they both share connectors for USB communication and Audio Video distribution the VG Series far exceed those panels by additionally providing RGB Component video display MPEG streaming technology and pass thru computer control These panels are capable of NTSC PAL SECAM video formats within variable sized video windows These VG Series panels display HDTV Component video fed from an external NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box and then through an internal NXA RGB card In addition to composite video support the new VG Series of panels now feature USB connectivity for mouse and keyboard and pre installed antennas for all Table Top models Powered by a cutting edge DSP core the VG Series has the muscle to handle digital streaming both video and audio in wired or wireless configurations These Moderos feature full support for standard MPEG 2 streaming video as well as MP3 and AAC streaming audio The NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 facilitates the installation and distribution of video Composite and Component
308. s ccisccsccccsssescccctcassecveesestaseusctectssanseesevecdaacersssesseecestusessetssausdaceesssee 32 Supported Component VGA Video Resolutions and Formats ssssssssssssssseeees 33 RGB RJ 45 connection and wiring information scccccssssecescssseessssssseecsessesseeeeeees 33 NXA CFTP Compact Flash FG21116 22 csciscssssesssicisccsnesssssedscicvosnsveccssussesdevecsevnecontes 34 NXA PCI80211G Wireless Card FG2255 04 cccssssccsssscsssecsssceeescecesceceeceeees 35 Product Specifications c isssiciesesssiciicececcesniedenseccnevvedestoecersvseusecesdavoctdecsecdoutbedpervocaeneeens 35 Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXT Components ssssssssessessseeseessesee 37 Step 1 Remove the existing NXT Outer Housing ssessssssseserereeerssssssseeeeeeesesssssssesee 37 Step 2 Install the 802 11g mini PCI Wireless Card cccsssessssscccessssssssessssnseesseeens 38 Step 3 Install the NXA RGB Card Component NXT c cccccccsscessssssssessessessessssssseeeens 39 Step 4 Install the Compact Flash Memory Card upgrade sscscccsccssssssssssssssesceseees 40 Step 5 Close and Resecure the NXT Panel Enclosure cscsccssssscesseessessesssesssesseeeees 41 OO Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXD Components sccccesesseeeeeeeees 42 Step 1 Remove the existing NXD Outer HOusing ccccccsssssssssssssssseecesesesesseseseees 42 Step 2 Install the ne
309. s the System Settings page where you can alter the communication parameters of both the NetLinx Master and Modero panel e Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 166 for more detailed information ee Protected Setup Page The Protected Setup page FIG 117 centers around the properties used by the panel to properly communicate with the NetLinx Master Enter the factory default password 1988 into the password keypad to access this page Var Back Protected Setup ET L Device Number Control Options anm o ineton anon Keyboard Layout Provides access to the panel firmware aa pages by enabling the grey front Tracking setup access button Wee b mays Setup page after a 3 second press hold Calibration page after a 6 second press hold Settings LAR am JN FIG 117 Protected Setup page showing default values The elements of the Protected Setup page are described in the table below Protected Setup Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Device Number Opens a ke
310. sccesecteiets det cowsdssdecousessessizeceeeestectecctesessesendeceessteseencosbesarediecossess 87 Wiring a power CONNECHION ccccccceseeseesseeeseeeeesascesaeaceeeeeeeseesecasssseeseeseeessesseesensenes 87 Audio Video Port Connections and Wiring sssseesscsssessssssssscssssssssssesssesesesens 88 Ethernet RJ 45 Port Connections and Wiring ccccsssssssssesssesssecessesseesssssseeees 88 Panel Calibration sesagssceicssetoniavvantleateciv ease esas tissasieva aeniases Pacts ete Hanaciohaasaaes 91 COVEPVICW ssisc seins scensiccesusessuesanscnninennsdeaichieasnpasssanshbenntocssqnstentbioatibecensetebnneonsts neesssstencners 91 Calibrating the Modero Patellsscs scisscssssscsssisssavsassasssanssiencaasscnssonsnstsssnsusassesenensueseens 91 Testing your Calibration sce c2 s2sceisescessceseazaecestcscececsnei ecccussseenssessteseessvesdasestessdsccsevepausoueces 92 Configuring CommMunicauGh sasiinsninassimominsomicnsiiesiamaaasiaenaienniierwss 93 OVEN VIG W E E A E E EE E E E E 93 Modero Setup and System Connection sssssseseeeeesseseererersssrreeseseseeecersesesssseseseereeeees 93 Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master s ssssesesssssssesesesesessssesesessssess 95 Step 1 Setting up the USB Driver on the PC eessssssesssssssssesesesseeeeeereseesosssssssssssesssssse 95 Step 2 Confirming the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC seseeeeeeeeeees 96 Step 3 Confirm and View the current AMX
311. secondary DNS value to the panel Domain Sets the unique name on the Internet to the panel for DNS look up e The panel belongs to the DNS domain System Settings Page Elements Cont Master Connection Cont Ethernet Mode Sets the speed of the Ethernet connection to the panel Choices are Auto 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex MAC Address Displays a read only field that is factory set by AMX for the built in Ethernet interface Type Sets the NetLinx Master to communicate with the panel via either USB or Ethernet This is based on the cable connection from the rear IC SNet is not a supported option on this panel e Ethernet is a CAT 5 cable 10 100Base T terminated in an RJ 45 connector used to network computers together and is used in most LAN local area networks This description is also used to refer to both wired and wireless communication USB option cannot be used on Modero panels which are not equipped with a rear USB port Mode Cycles between the different connection modes URL Listen and Auto ETHERNET Only disabled when USB is selected e URL In this mode enter the IP URL Master Port Number and username password if used on the Master The System Number field is read only because the panel obtains this information from the communicating Master e Listen In this mode add the Modero panel address into the URL List in NetLinx Studi
312. sed for communication to the web This is the default setting if either no wireless interface card is detected or if both an Ethernet and wireless card connection is detected by the panel e Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card slot This method provides an indirect communication to the web via a pre configured Wireless Access Point 8 Press the Web Control Name field to open the Web Name keyboard NOTE 9 From the Web Name keyboard enter a unique alpha numeric string to identify this panel This information is used by the NetLinx Security Web Server to display on screen links to the panel The on screen links use the IP Address of the panel and not the name for communication FIG 89 ing eee oe a ee Manage WebControl Connections Back G4 Web Control C Gawes conrolsetings V G4Web Contre Timeout N ew FIG 89 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and Mange WebControl Connections window 10 Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string for the Web Control name 11 Press the Web Control Password field to open the Web Password keyboard 12 From the Web Password keyboard enter a unique alpha numeric string to be assigned as the G4 Authentication session password associated with VNC web access of this panel 13 Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string for the Web Control password 14 Press the Web Control Port field to open the
313. sesscessssssesseeseescesesenseeeseeseesceessseusceceesoeeasesseeseeeeees 138 Ld Volume Pasiria E E a ssvsssebeepsceseessssavessvoesstescssteess 139 Supported sampling rates for WAV ssscccccsssseecssssssccescesseeeesessssseeesscssseesessosees 140 Protected Setup Pag eG ic cccccscivesssecccapberccecesdvevavesecscsupsdececdeaceussveusssusenseeeecteassueeess vetosepbes 140 Video Adjustment Slide Out Option Bar ccsssscssscccessssssscesssssssssseseeeesssessesesseeseees 141 Video Adjustment Video Adjustment Page cscccccssscsssssssssssssceseessessesssseseseeeees 141 Video Adjustment RGB Adjustment Page sssscccccsssscsscsssssessssesessssssessssssseeeees 142 Adjusting the Incoming Signal on the RGB Adjustment Page cccccssseeeeseeeeeeee 145 Video Adjustment Streaming Adjustment Page cccsssssssssssessscceeseseessesseseneeeees 148 Battery Base Page sssscccssssssssssececeeceseceecceeeensssessceeeceeessesssesceeessessesseceeesesseseeeeees 151 Protected Setup Navigation Buttons sssssscscscsccccssscsssssssseseseesessesssesssssseees 153 Protected Setup Page vsiicsccscssssnsintvanwniansnnwias iewssisiay suns baaunnpes snes eaessvneteinstenosesstesveessonses 154 G4 Web Control Pages i s cciscecccs ccvseevesiveiessuuesecccetivesceesvetsebonseesoeecevevsenvodseosuuuceoeceeeyies 156 Sensor Setup Page cccescessssssesseseesccesensenseseeseeseceesaaceuaauaces
314. small amount of pressure to remove it from the main unit 3 Place the LCD face down on a soft cloth to expose the back of the panel and prevent scratching of the LCD DO NOT REMOVE THE PANEL SECURING SCREWS These screws secure the LCD to the metallic casing underneath WARNING Unscrew the Stereo Output nut from the Stereo Output jack Remove the I O connector plate by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to remove the two screws and slide the I O connector plate away from the back box housing 6 Remove the four pan head Housing Screws from the rear of the NXD unit FIG 51 These screws secure the back box to the internal panel casing 16 3 K a DO NOT REMOVE DO NOT REMOVE these h l el these pane par f securing screws securing screws Se these four Housing Screws to remove the back box These make direct contact with the black outer housing FIG 51 Location of the attachment screws on the NXD back box DO NOT REMOVE THE FOUR PANEL SECURING SCREWS These screws secure the LCD to the metallic casing underneath WARNING 7 Lift the back box housing to separate it from the internal panel casing Installing the MP TP17 Back Box 1 Unscrew the four pan head Housing Screws 8 32 from the MB TP17 rear plastic cover 2 Gently place the MB TP17 back box over the internal panel casing with the cable routing hole on
315. specific elements described in the following table Protected Setup Navigation Button Elements G4 Web Control Press the G4 Web Control button to access the G4 Web Control page where you can enable or disable display and control of your panel via the web by a PC running a VNC client Refer to the Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel section on page 116 for more detailed information Sensors Press the Sensors button to access the Sensors Setup page where you can modify monitor both the light and motion sensor settings e Refer to the Sensor Setup Page section on page 158 for more detailed information Passwords Press the Passwords button to access the Passwords Setup page where you can specify up to five security passwords Default password is 1988 e Refer to the Password Setup Page section on page 160 for more detailed information Calibrate Press the Calibrate button to access the Calibration page where you can use the displayed set of crosshairs to calibrate a touch panel e Refer to the Calibration Page section on page 161 for more detailed information Wireless Settings Press the Wireless Settings button to access the Wireless Settings page where you can setup the wireless connection parameters used by the optional NXA PC180211G wireless card Refer to the Wireless Settings Page section on page 162 for more detailed information System Settings Press the System Settings button to acces
316. ss Settings gt IP Settings section within the ZP Address field e If you do not get this field continue to step 9 nic taee SY Oe gt fen IP Address of touch panel Seine yO obtained from IP Settings section of the System Settings page FIG 92 Connection Details dialog 9 Ifa WebControl password was setup on the G4 WebControl page a G4 Authentication Session password dialog box appears on the screen within the secondary browser window ee 10 Enter the Web Control session password into the Session Password field FIG 91 This password was previously entered into the Web Control Password field within the G4 Web Control page on the panel 11 Click OK to send the password to the panel and begin the session A confirmation message appears stating Please wait Initial screen loading The secondary window then becomes populated with the same G4 page being displayed on the target G4 panel A small circle appears within the on screen G4 panel page and corresponds to the location of the mouse cursor A left mouse click on the computer displayed panel page equates to an actual touch on the target G4 panel page Upgrading Modero Firmware Overview Before beginning the Upgrade process e Setup and configure your NetLinx Master Refer to your particular NetLinx Master instruction manual for detailed setup procedures e Calibrate and prepare the communication pages on the Modero panel for use Refer to the Panel Ca
317. ssoostteveiaieatertss 49 Powering the NXT CHG sici seiiecccetecctevcezeeesescutecuh cece cesbeseras sacbecneeecee desheebevevedoseucecsedecevees 50 Reading NXT CHG LED Indicator ccccssssssssccceesesesscsssssssseseecesesesssssesssssssseseesoeseees 50 Charging the NXT BP batteries using the NXT CHG ccsesssssssseeeeceesesesssesseseeeees 50 Recalibrating the batteries sic c2c050 ccsccccespenccsccebectesteosseccevsussecccsesceeesecccedsusvssegeesedeseesveres 51 Installation Procedures 12 and 15 Panels ssscscssssssssssceesssseesessesseeeeees 53 OVEPVIBW ccs cscisicersscisecincaccniad csedaniconenensacudsaatendesicensanssendhacessaaddecconmedanenssactiananeanssagers 53 Unpacking the Panel ciacicasoccascccusspovenuossensunckeamounsnuenauonbansnarexsdednactausuunanssenensensnesenapoe 53 Installing Internal Components s ssssssssssisosssssscassssssissasisssssesisisssesiscssaesosessassssisdssssss 53 Upgrading to the MB TP12 MB TP15 VESA Mounting Kit cccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 53 Removing the Original Modero Back Box ccccccccsssssssssssssssssssececessessescesessnseesesceseess 54 Installing the MP TP12 15 Back Box cccsssssssssssssccssssssesssssssssscecccessscscscesssssseseeceseess 54 Cable Installation for the MP TP12 15 Back Box sscccccssssssscsscsssseesssssseeeeesssseeeeseess 55 Finalizing the installationiccsicccccsccececcccsescsvesevcessesecccterscasecesbeveseccdteoconseedeacenssctenee
318. sted Level Value as it falls between the Level Value as it falls between the Range Values Range Values V Raw Level Value Raw Level Value L Range Low Value Range Low Value H Range High Value Range High Value S N A Current State A Adjusted Level Value Range Low Value Adjusted Level Value Range Low Value subtracted from the Raw Level Value subtracted from the Raw Level Value R Low Range subtracted from the High Low Range subtracted from the High Range Range Dollar sign Dollar sign Buy changing the text on a button via a VT command you can modify the codes on a button When one of the Text Formatting Codes is encountered by the firmware it is replaced with the correct value These values are derived from the following operations Formatting Code Operations Code Operation P Current Value Range Low Value Range High Value Range Low Value x 100 V Current Level Value L Range Low Value H Range High Value S Current State if regular bargraph then resolves to nothing A Current Value Range Low Value R Range High Value Range Low Value Given a current raw level value of 532 a range low value of 500 and a high range value of 600 the following text formatting codes would yield the following strings as shown in the table below Format Display P 32 A out of R 32 out of 100 A of 0 R 32 of 0 100 V of L H 532 of 500 600
319. t Protocol will be used to encode the outgoing media stream 7 Access Stream Profiles page FIG 129 by clicking the Stream Profiles link from within the Navigation frame This page allows a user to both configure the properties of the outgoing media stream and setup the properties associated with communicating the stream to an external IP enabled device capable of receiving and processing the data Apply Cancel Encoder Profile Prot Encoding Presets including Custom Rate Resolution Sits in tau Video Encoding Parameters Mode Audio i haec Audio Encoding Parameters Sampling Rate Effective Rate Stream oe Transport UDP Stream Destination Protocol A tet 230 1342108 i Communication Connection i Parameters Target sooo is use even port values t Audio Port 8 From the Profile field click on the drop down arrow and from the available list choose the desired encoder setting which conforms to the available data throughput on your network Although the default selection is Home Theater Max the user can choose from up to 6 pre created entries and one Custom entry which makes every field user definable e For the purpose of these procedures we ve been informed that our network can handle the full 6 Mbps data throughput so we ll select Home Theater Max er EE 9 Click the Apply button to save the encoding profiles to the MAX FIG 130 10 Fro
320. t all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter Test the incoming wiring by attaching the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the attached connectors before being inserted into the drywall 14 15 16 Follow the procedures outlined within Steps 1 5 on page 42 thru page 43 to carefully reinstall the LCD panel back into the back box housing Install the four sets of drywall screws and expansion clips into the four oval notch locations along the top bottom edges of the main unit FIG 60 Make sure the top drywall clip grooves face upwards and the bottom clip grooves face downwards so they extend away from the Main unit Carefully insert the main unit with expansion clips into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs on the NXD unit lie flush against the wall FIG 60 Make sure to have the right side of the box resting against the non notche
321. t masking button Syntax A lt BML lt vt addr range gt lt max length gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 max length 2000 0 no max length Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BML 500 20 Sets the maximum length of the text area input button to 20 characters BMP Assign a picture to those buttons with a defined address range Syntax ABMP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt name of bitmap picture gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state name of bitmap picture 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMP 500 504 amp 510 515 1 bitmap png Sets the OFF state picture for the buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 BNC Clear current TakeNote annotations Syntax BNC lt vt addr range gt lt command value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 command value 0 clear 1 clear all Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BNC 973 0 Clears the annotation of the TakeNote button with variable text 973 A Button Commands Cont SBNN Set the TakeNote network name for the specified Syntax BNN lt vt addr range gt lt network name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 network port for the specified Addresses network na
322. t of a NXA BASE B Kit that contains one 1 battery base and two batteries The accompanying batteries can be charged through either the base or optional NXT CHG Battery Charger FG2250 50 Refer to the Installing the NXA BASE B to an NXT Modero Panel section on page 46 for more detailed installation and usage instructions Product Specifications NXA BASE B Specifications Dimensions HWD e 1 13 x 8 63 x 11 81 2 86 cm x 21 91 cm x 30 00 cm Power Requirements 2 7 A 12 VDC max power draw while charging Weight e Base unit 1 25 Ibs 0 567 kg Base and 2 batteries 3 23 Ibs 1 47 kg Features Charge time for two depleted batteries 5 8 hours when NXT panel is in Sleep mode e Must be connected to the Modero unit utilizing a 12 VDC compliant power supply Operating Storage Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F Environment Operating Humidity 20 85 RH Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 85 RH Other AMX Equipment NXT CHG Kit FG2250 50K 1 charger FG2250 50 and 2 NXT BP batteries FG2255 10 NXT BP battery pack FG2255 10 e NXT CHG battery charger FG2250 50 It is recommended to fully charge the batteries before their initial use NOTE Checking the NXT BP battery charge 1 Press the Battery Life Indicator button FIG 27 once to illuminate the Battery Life LEDs and display the percent charge remain
323. t of the listed panel NOTE 4 If the panel firmware being used is not current download the latest Kit file by first logging in to www amx com and then navigate to Tech Center gt Firmware Files and from within the Modero section of the web page locate your Modero panel 5 Click on the desired Kit file link and after you ve accepted the Licensing Agreement verify you have downloaded the Modero Kit file to a known location 6 From within Studio select Tools gt Firmware Transfers gt Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog FIG 98 Verify the panel s System and Device number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window 7 Select the panel s KIT file from the Files section FIG 98 8 Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window The Port field is greyed out 9 Click the Reboot Device checkbox This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update process is complete The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has finished 10 Click Send to begin the transfer The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom right of the dialog FIG 98 Z Selected Firmware file Description field for selected KIT file end to Ne
324. t the new value and return to the System Settings page 18 Do not alter the Master Port Number value this is the default value used by NetLinx 19 Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page 20 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address URL Mode In this mode enter the System Number zero for an unknown System Number and the IP URL of the Master Master Port Number is defaulted to 1319 1 Press the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to the word Ethernet Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 166 for more information about the fields on this page 2 Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL e By selecting URL the System Number field becomes read only grey because the panel pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master virtual or not A Virtual Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as NetLinx Studio TPD4 or IREdit NetLinx Studio check to make sure that the NetLinx Master System Number from If the panel does not appear within the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window of within the Device Addressing dialog is correctly assigned NOTE 3 Press the Master IP URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the Master IP Address obtained from the Diagnostics Networking Address dial
325. target panel Note When connecting the panel to PC using a CC USB or compatible cable be sure to power the panel On before attempting to connect the USB cable from the PC to the mini USB port on the panel Refer to the Step 5 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections section on page 100 for more information Operating Storage Environment Operating Temperature 10 C 50 F to 40 C 104 F Operating Humidity 20 to 85 RH Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 to 85 RH Included Accessories e Installation Kit for 12 and 17 NXD panels KA2251 01 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Four Drywall clips 62 5924 05 and 6 sheet metal screws One CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black e Installation Kit for 12 NXT panels KA2251 03 2 pin mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Three Phillips head screws 4 20 x 0 250 Black Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites 04 0014 e Included within the RGB Kit FGxxxx xxRGB is the following Modero VG Touch Panel NXD NXT 1200 1500 1700VG NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 NXA RGB internal RGB VGA Interface Card FG2260 NXA RGBCBL 15 pin to 5X BNC RGB Breakout cable FG2250 80 NXA MTC RGB Modero 10 foot Table Top Cable with RGB connector CA2250 70 Included within the Video Kit FGxxxx xV is the following Modero VG Tou
326. tate border name Refer toTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 188 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BRD 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 Quad Line Sets the border by name Quad Line to those buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 Refer to the TPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 188 ABSF Set the focus to the text area Note Select one button at a time single variable text address Do not assign a variable text address range to set focus to multiple buttons Only one variable text address can be in focus at a time Syntax BSF lt vt addr range gt lt selection value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 selection value Unselect 0 and select 1 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BSF 500 1 Sets the focus to the text area of the button BSM Submit text for text area buttons This command causes the text areas to send their text as strings to the NetLinx Master Syntax BSM lt vt addr range gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BSM 500 Submits the text of the text area button A Button Commands Cont BSO Set the sound played when a button is pressed If the sound name is blank the sound is then cleared If the sound name is not matched the button sound is not changed Syntax BSO lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt sound name gt Variable
327. ted with the target panel A secondary web browser window appears on the screen FIG 91 inital and run AM JADI N AM and Setiated by MS Comann Pibiicher ausherticty vend by Verbi Oas 3 Code Siging 200 CA Caon AMX Comporahon arsts that the contert s sahe You shoukd ariy instak this contant yous huit AMX Comasan to nae thal arsenon IT apes trast content tram AM Corpneation oa e s E renna neg https 192 IRD M 5 irinen zore FIG 91 Web Control VNC installation and Password entry screens 7 Click Yes from the Security Alert popup window to agree to the installation of the G4 WebControl application on your computer This application contains the necessary Active X and VNC client applications necessary to properly view and control the panel pages from your computer communication Once the application is installed this popup will no longer appear This popup will only appear if you are connecting to the target panel using a different NOTE computer The G4 Web Control application is sent by the panel to the computer that is used for 8 In some cases you might get a Connection Details dialog FIG 92 requesting a VNC Server IP Address This is the IP Address not the IP of the Master but of the target touch panel Depending on which method of communication you are using it can be found in either the e Wired Ethernet System Settings gt IP Settings section within the ZP Address field e Wireless Wirele
328. ter frame Mounting Tabs must be installed flush against the mounting surface e It is recommended that you cutout the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments Prepare the area by removing any screws or nails from the drywall before beginning the cutout process Cut out the surface for the 12 inch Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG 40 and for the 15 inch Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG 41 Be sure to cut out the four notches along the top and bottom areas to accommodate the four drywall expansion clips provided haat 12 5850 319 7MM atl 11 5070 292 3MM j 1 0000 25 4MM 1 0000 25 4MM Le TYP TYP 1 7540 44 6MM il e 1 7530 44 5MM E 9390 13 7MM 1 o g i f by a T F jj 2500 6 4MM _ TYP EY R13 R3 MM MAX RADIUS ALLOWED N IN CORNERS OF NOTCHES o o R13 R3 2MM MAX RADIUS N 4 CORNERS 112970 286 9MM CUTOUT 12 3750 314 3MM BEZEL 5 CUTOUT f i z 4 LJ J K J 1 S L 2140 5 4MM 2130 5 4MM FRONT BEZEL 1 7540 44 6MM 1 7530 44 5MM 11 9340 303 1MM FIG 40 NXD 1200VG 12 inch Wall Mount panel dimensions using expansion clips 3 Remove the magnetic faceplate bezel A in FIG 42 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 42 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force 4 Thread the in
329. th save any changes and restart the panel NOTE IP Settings section Configuring a Static IP Address over Ethernet 1 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page 2 Locate the IP Settings section of this page Check with your System Administrator for a pre reserved Static IP Address assigned to the panel This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel continues 3 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to Static Press the ZP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address provided by your System Administrator Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name H 0 N 1 Gt Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard enter the Primary DNS Address provided by your System Administrator and press Done when compete Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS field 10 Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard enter the resolvable domain Address this is provided by your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel and press Done when complete 11 Navigate to the Master Connection section of this pag
330. the on screen Reboot button to restart the panel and save any changes Step 3 Verify and Upgrade the panel firmware via an IP 1 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System The default System value is one 2 Right click the associated System number from the Workspace window and select Refresh System to detect of all devices on the current system establish a new connection to the Master and refresh the System list with devices on that system 3 After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the PC and the Master verify the panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window FIG 97 The default Modero panel value is 10001 INE NetLinx Studio test axs Showing a Master firmware version and Dlod anglas Tte device number Eie Edit view Project Build Diagnostics Debug Tools Settings Windo System 1 Devices JB 00000 NXC ME260 64M AMX Corp v3 00 316 Showing the current Modero H E 10501 12004 Touch Panel AMX Corp v2 55 78 lt panel firmware version and E 10506 1700VG Touch Panel AMX Corp v2 56 12 device number 5 32001 NSX Application AMX CX yp 2 30 Shows NetLinx Studio Master s Devices Ports version number J 1 J 4 J 13 Display Ci Workspace T OnLine Tree FIG 97 NetLinx Workspace window showing connected Modero panel The panel firmware is shown on the righ
331. the power cable from the connected power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with s the attached connectors before being inserted into the equipment rack NOTE 6 Insert the main 17 inch Modero unit into the NXA RK17 FIG 63 a Ea Ta a tees CT ron O ry ix z 7m im aes i gN Faceplate H Eir nes Ka D o O 1 ma SP e FIG 63 NXD 1700VG Wall Mount panel installed into an NXA RK17 Rack Mount Kit 7 Secure the panel to the NXA RK17 mount frame by first inserting and then tightening the four 4 40 screws 8 Insert the NXA RK17 with connected NXD unit into the equipment rack making sure to align the screw holes along the sides of the NXA RK17 with the holes in the equipment rack a E CAUTION DP WARNING 9 Use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to secure the NXA RK17 to the equipment rack using 10 32 screws not included 10 Place the magnetic faceplate back onto the main NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and placing it on the housing with gentle force Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate 11 Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet and any optional audio video wiring to their respective terminal locations on either the NXA AVB RGB Breako
332. the setup port information value being used by the panel High Port Displays the high port port count value for the panel High Address Displays the high address address count value for the panel High Channel Displays the high channel channel count value for the panel High Level Displays the high level level count value being used by the panel Serial Number Displays the specific serial number value assigned to the panel Setup Pages Version Displays the type and version of the Setup pages being used by the panel Screen Width Displays the pixel width being used to display the incoming video signal on the Modero panel e Maximum available screen width on 12 panels is 800 pixels e Maximum available screen width on 15 panels is 1024 pixels e Maximum available screen width on 17 widescreen panels is 1280 pixels Screen Height Displays the pixel height being used to display the incoming video signal on the Modero panel e Maximum available screen height on 12 panels is 600 pixels Maximum available screen height on 15 and 17 panels is 768 pixels Screen Refresh Rate Displays the video refresh rate applied to the incoming video signal from the panel Screen Rotation Displays the degree of rotation applied to the on screen image Panel Information Page Elements Cont Power Up Pages Displays the first touch panel page assigned for display after the device is pow
333. through the rear USB port on the breakout box and finally to the target PC Refer to FIG 7 for a visual representation Pass thru must be enabled to control devices through the NXA RGB card when using USB compatible control devices Refer to the following commands to enable pass thru on the RGB card MPS on page 225 for Mouse pass thru and KPS on page 225 for the keyboard pass thru The two available USB input connections on the touch panel can be used to provide either Keyboard and or Mouse signals between the PC and the panel You are no longer limited to one mouse and one keyboard You can use USB hubs and multiple mice keyboards in any configuration When setting up pass thru computer control its important to focus on the following areas 1 Properly connect the NXA AVB RGB to both a target PC and touch panel using the appropriate cabling Refer to the following Wiring for Pass Thru Computer Control section on page 27 for more detailed information Enable pass thru via the use of either the MPS or KPS commands page 225 3 Set up a touch panel page via TPDesign4 with the necessary Video Fill gt Component RGB video properties selected Video Fill allows you to select from a drop down list of video formats that are supported by the touch panel specified in your project VG Series Modero panels 1200VG 1500VG and 1700VG support Composite video Component RGB video and Streaming video formats e Selecting Component RGB allo
334. tial Status page will display the status of both the WEP and WPA both disabled 10 Verify the fields in the ZP Settings section have been properly configured Refer to the Step 1 Configuring the Panel s Wireless IP Settings section on page 102 for detailed information 11 Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that you will need to navigate to the System Settings page and configure the connection to a target Master 12 After the panel restarts return to the Wireless Settings page to verify the Link Quality and Signal Strength e The bargraphs have been replaced with descriptions None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent FIG 80 The signal strength field should provide some descriptive text regarding the strength of the connection to a Wireless Access Point If there is no signal or no IP Address displayed configuration of your network could be required Refer to the NXA WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration procedures Configuring the Modero s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G After logging into the WAP200G the default Status page appears within the web browser These read only values are pulled from some of the other user configurable Configuration Utility pages By default wireless Modero panels are configured for unsecured communication to a Wireless Access
335. tings dialog FIG 77 8 From within this dialog enter the System number default is 1 9 Click OK three times to close the open dialogs save your settings and return to the main NetLinx Studio application 10 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 11 Right click on the Empty Device Tree System entry and select Refresh System to re populate the list The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number in the Online Tree tab until both the system number used in step 7 for the VNM is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page and the panel is restarted e The Connection status turns green after a few seconds to indicate an active USB connection to the PC Virtual Master No Lock icon is displayed because this USB connection is not secured requiring a username password e Ifafew minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green repeat the USB connection and Virtual Master setup procedures outlined in this section Refreshing the System sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication turning the System Connection icon green NOTE Step 5 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections Use the CC USB Type A to Mini B 5 wire programming cable FG10 5965 to provide communication between the mini USB Program port on the touch panel a
336. ton OFF state bitmap information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1002 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT Buggs png TEXT LENGTH 9 BOP Syntax Get the overall 2BOP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt button opacity Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1015 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Opacity Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel BOP 529 1 Gets the button OFF state opacity information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1015 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 200 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 Button Query Commands Cont BRD Syntax Get the current 2BRD lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt border name Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1014 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Zero Text String that represents border name Text length Border name length Example SEND COMMAND Panel BRD 529 1 Gets the button OFF state border informat
337. touch panel such as IP Addresses Device Number assignments Passwords and other presets Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog FIG 118 which asks you to confirm your selection This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES button for 5 seconds This delay provides an additional amount of time for the user to confirm their decision The Remove User Pages button allows you remove all current TPD4 touch panel pages currently on the panel including the pre installed AMX Demo pages Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog FIG 118 which asks you to confirm your selection This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES button for 5 seconds This delay provides an additional amount of time for the user to confirm their decision Keyboard Layout Displays the listing of supported international keyboard settings The following build 2 60 or higher list allows the end user to specify which international keyboard is being connected to the Modero touch panel and then which characters should be reflected within the G4 Computer Control and TakeNote applications None default Spanish Italian French German Swiss UK and US Note You must be using a standard 101 button keyboard to accurately utilize this feature e Modero uses the open source VNC character standards to transmit the character information to a target device such as a PC
338. tter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed an operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body Table of Contents IRGPODUCHION M E E E T 1 Multimedia Streaming Video Touch Panels VG Series sssseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 Product Specifications NXD 1200VG and NXT 1200VG sseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeees 2 Product Specifications NXD 1500VG and NXT 1500VG sseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 7 Product Specifications NXD 1700VG and NXT 1700VG secccceceeeseeeeseseseeeeeeee 12 VG Series Modero Connectors scicsisscssisssecssscssscssasensesnondscsscossnnsadsansesssbcendscosensessenee 17 Connecting and Using USB Input Devices ssssesscsececcesccssseseseeeeesesseessssseseees 17 Cleaning the Touch OV ety woz cesicctcuee tees scvcsyedosvecesnasqu tse coenoveretedceonstoiantalieuencsseusuene 18 Touch Panel Accessories sssiscsscosssssvisnsssnioversiiansdnesncassdsnsosssonanvanpousiuonasneansuamionaies 19 OVEPVIOW sisssssisssvnsssssannsssavensesssanssnasasanseuspnnsasensaasnnssasebeonssnescinsasoonsnenebuadsnonebesssunnsnses 19 NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box FG2254 11 ccssccsssscessscecsscecsssccssscecssecenseceecseees 19 Product Specifications ieiccissscsccscsteiwi
339. ttonGet Id 529 Type 1012 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT FF8000FF TEXT LENGTH 9 BCT Syntax Get the current 2BCT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1013 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BCT 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text color information The result sent to Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1013 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT FFFFFEFF TEXT LENGTH 9 Button Query Commands Cont BMP Syntax Get the current 2BMP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt bitmap name Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1002 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Zero Text String that represents the bitmap name Text length Bitmap name text length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BMP 529 1 Gets the but
340. ture Frame Menu Right Rounded 185 Quad Line Menu Right Rounded 195 Single Line Menu Rounded Spacer Vertical Windows Style Popup Menu Rounded Spacer Horizontal Windows Style Popup Status Bar Menu Top Rounded 55 A Button Commands These Button Commands are used in NetLinx Studio and are case insensitive All commands that begin with have the capability of assigning a variable text address range and button state range A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device Port System in all programming examples Panel is used in place of these values Variable text ranges allow you to target 1 or more variable text channels in a single command e Button State ranges allow you to target or more states of a variable text button with a single command e Character is used for the through notation also the amp character is used for the And notation A Button Commands ANI Syntax Run a button ANI lt vt addr range gt lt start state gt lt end state gt lt time gt animation in 1 10 second Variable variable text address range 1 4000 start state Beginning of button state 0 current state end state End of button state time In 1 10 second intervals Example SEND_COMMAND Panel ANI 500 1 25 100 Runs a button animation at text range 500 from state 1 to state 25 for 10 second APF
341. uch higher using the Belden VideoTwist 7987 cable versus standard CATS or other Ethernet compliant cables The pinout of this RGB connector is given in the table below properly for cable length by using the Cable Variance setting on the RGB Adjustment The Belden cable only adjusts for RGB skew but may still need to be configured page Video Adjustment RGB Adjustment Page section on page 142 NOTE RGB RJ 45 Connector Pinouts and Signals Pin Color Function Polarity 1 Orange White Blue Video z Pair 3 Orange Blue Video Pair 2 Pair 1 Pair 4 Green White Data bidirectional 4 Blue Green Video Blue White Green Video Green Data TIA 568B bidirectional Brown White Red Video Brown Red Video It is important that the correct pairing is observed NOTE Using the HD 15 high density connector Connect the RGB Comp source equipment HD 15 male connector to the RGB COMPONENT HD 15 high density connector female on the rear of the NXA AVB RGB Breakout Box The following table below lists the HD 15 connector pinouts HD 15 Connector Pinouts Pin Signal Function 1 Red Red signals Cr 2 Green Green signals Y 3 Blue Blue signals Cb 4 N A Not used 5 GND Signal Ground 5 6 RAGND Red analog ground 7 GAGND Green analog ground 8 BAGND Blue analog ground 9 N A Not used 1 10 SAGND Sync
342. unded 65 Diamond 25 Menu Left Rounded 75 Diamond 35 Menu Left Rounded 85 Diamond 45 Menu Left Rounded 95 TPD4 Border Styles by Name Cont Border styles Border styles Menu Left Rounded 105 Menu Top Rounded 65 Menu Left Rounded 115 Menu Top Rounded 75 Menu Left Rounded 125 Menu Top Rounded 85 Menu Left Rounded 135 Menu Top Rounded 95 Menu Left Rounded 145 Menu Top Rounded 105 Menu Left Rounded 155 Menu Top Rounded 115 Menu Left Rounded 165 Menu Top Rounded 125 Menu Left Rounded 175 Menu Top Rounded 135 Menu Left Rounded 185 Menu Top Rounded 145 Menu Left Rounded 195 Menu Top Rounded 155 Menu Right Rounded 15 Menu Top Rounded 165 Menu Right Rounded 25 Menu Top Rounded 175 Menu Right Rounded 35 Menu Top Rounded 185 Menu Right Rounded 45 Menu Top Rounded 195 Menu Right Rounded 55 Neon Active L Menu Right Rounded 65 Neon Active S Menu Right Rounded 75 Neon Inactive L Menu Right Rounded 85 Neon Inactive S Menu Right Rounded 95 Oval V 30x60 Menu Right Rounded 105 Oval V 50x100 Menu Right Rounded 115 Oval V 75x150 Menu Right Rounded 125 Oval V 100x200 Menu Right Rounded 135 Oval H 60x30 Menu Right Rounded 145 Oval H 100x50 Menu Right Rounded 155 Oval H 150x75 Menu Right Rounded 165 Oval H 200x100 Menu Right Rounded 175 Pic
343. up name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup group Example SEND_COMMAND Panel DPG Popup1 Group1 Deletes the popup page Popup1 from the popup group Group1 PDR Set the popup location reset flag If the flag is set the popup will return to its default location on show instead of its last drag location Syntax PDR lt popup page name gt lt reset flag gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On reset flag 1 Enable reset flag 0 Disable reset flag Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PDR Popup1 1 Popup1 will return to its default location when turned On PHE Set the hide effect for the specified popup page to the named hide effect Syntax QPHE lt popup page name gt lt hide effect name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On hide effect name Refers to the popup effect names being used Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PHE Popup1 Slide to Left Sets the Popup1 hide effect name to Slide to Left PHP Set the hide effect position Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect however the command will specify both This command sets the location at which the effect will end at Syntax PHP lt popup page name gt lt x coordinate gt lt y coordinate gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the pag
344. urate control you will have to go into the Full Screen Edit Mode described in the following section RGB Adjustment Page Elements Cont Skew The process of skewing involves applying a convergence control to the Red not an issue if using a Green and Blue signal delivery through the terminal end of a cable The skew Video Twist 7987 cable value conforms to a nanosecond signal delay of the individual RGB signals Different CAT5 6 cables use different materials and come in different cable lengths Often the terminal ends of these individual cable pairs are not always equal in length and can therefore result in the signal being delivered to the terminal end of the cable at a different time This time can be a difference of a up to 30 nano seconds 200ft and that can be more than enough to cause the image to appear off or blurry For this reason AMX recommends using the Belden Brilliance VideoTwist 7987 cable Although this cable is not CAT5 compliant it is designed to control skew between the red green and blue video signals Therefore for longer cable runs the video quality will be much higher if this cable is used With other cables the interplay between Cable Variance cable length and Skew Control must be taken into account when adjusting for image quality Skew control provides an on screen RGB Skew Adjustment popup dialog that allows you to select from several RGB specific signal delay skew adjustment settings Not
345. ut Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 12 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Wiring Guidelines for the 1700VG Panels 1700VG panels use a 12 VDC compliant power supply to provide power to the panel via the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix PWR connector Use the previously referenced power requirements to determine the power draw The incoming PWR and GND wires from the power supply must be connected to the corresponding locations within the PWR connector These units should only have one source of incoming power Using more than one source of power to the touch panel can result in damage to the internal components and a possible burn out Apply power to the panels only after installation is complete Preparing captive wires You will need a wire stripper and flat blade screwdriver to prepare and connect the captive wires Never pre tin wires for compression type connections 1 Strip 0 25 inch 6 35 mm of insulation off all wires 2 Insert each wire into the appropriate opening on the connector according to the wiring diagrams and connector types described in this section 3 Tighten the screws to secure the wire in the connector Do not tighten the screws excessively doing so may strip the threads and damage the connector Wiring a power connection To use the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector for use with a 12 VDC compliant power supply the incoming PWR and GND wires
346. ution of current panel mode file PY Y Resolution of current panel mode file BX X Resolution of current button BY Y Resolution of current button BN Name of button ST Current state AC Address Code AP Address Port CC Channel Code CP Channel Port LC Level Code LP Level Port Appendix Appendix an EA It s Your World Take ControlI 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE RICHARDSON TX 75082 USA e 800 222 0193 e 469 624 8000 469 624 7153 fax e 800 932 6993 technical support www amx com 10 08 2008 AMX All rights reserved AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time
347. uts and Signals Pin Signals Connections Pairing Color 1 TX 1 1 1 2 Orange White 2 TX 2 2 Orange 3 RX 3 3 3 6 Green White 4 no connection 4 4 Blue 5 no connection 5 5 Blue White 6 RX 6 6 Green 7 no connection 7 7 Brown White 8 no connection 8 8 Brown 123 45678 Ly Wd 24s Q QDR Q I Q QPR S 2 2 2 gt gt gt 123 45678 6 FIG 50 diagrams the RJ 45 pinouts and signals for the Ethernet RJ 45 connector and cable AMS White Orange Stripe Orange IA White Green Stripe A Blue SS _ White Blue Stripe oT Green White Brown Stripe FIG 50 RJ 45 wiring diagram Brown Stripe Installation Procedures 17 Panels NOTE NOTE Overview NXT panels are mounted onto flat horizontal surfaces in either a stand alone or combo NXT atop an NXA BASE B battery base configuration NXD panels are installed into either a pre wall surface using the CB TP17 conduit wallbox or a solid surface using either solid surface or drywall screws Unpacking the Panel 1 Inspect and confirm the contents of the shipment box to verify that you have all specified parts Refer to the Specifications section on page 12 for more information about included accessories and other AMX equipment Carefully remove the panel from the shipping box
348. values may require more frequent battery charging Inactivity Page Flip Timeout Sets the number of minutes of inactivity before the panel automatically flips to a pre selected touch panel page When the device goes into this inactivity mode the LCD does not power down Press the UP DN buttons to increase decrease the time the panel can remain inactive before it flips to the preset page Range 0 240 minutes Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the inactivity page flip mode e The touch panel page used for the Inactivity page flip is shown within a small Inactivity Page field Panel Brightness Sets the display brightness level of the panel Press the UP DN buttons to adjust the brightness level Range 0 100 The on screen bargraph can be dragged to adjust the Brightness level which is then reflected as a corresponding numeric value within the Panel Brightness field Project Information Page The Project Information page displays the TPDesign4 TPD4 project file properties currently loaded on the selected Modero panel FIG 105 Refer to the TPDesign4 Touch Panel Program instruction manual for more specific information on uploading TPDesign4 files to a panel Project Information Wa AMX 1234 1500VG Tech Pubs Project i xt Properties Prapct amaton Pare sat rdemancr Sermon _ CESES om EAs ED o CHEM a E aae gt Wied Feb 23 11 45 32 2005
349. variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state sound name blank sound cleared not matched button sound not changed Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BSO 500 1 amp 2 music wav Assigns the sound music wav to the button Off On states ABVL Log On Log Off the computer control Syntax ABVL lt vt addr range gt lt connection gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 connection connection 0 Log Off connection and 1 Log On connection Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVL 500 0 Logs off the computer control connection of the button ABVN Syntax Set the computer control remote host for the specified address SEND_COMMAND lt DEV gt BVN lt vt addr range gt lt remote host gt Variables variable text address range 1 4000 remote host 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVN 500 191 191 191 191 Sets the remote host to 191 191 191 191 for the specific computer control button ABVP Set the network password for the specified address Syntax lt BVP lt vt addr range gt lt network password gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 network password 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVP 500 PCLOCK Sets the password to PCLOCK for the specific PC control button ABVT
350. w 802 11g mini PCI Wireless card NXD ccssccsccccccceerreereeeeees 43 Step 3 Install the new RGB Card Component NXD ccccssessssssseeseeeesesesesesseeseees 43 Step 4 Install the new Compact Flash Memory card NXD cceccccccccrrcereeeereeeseeeeee 43 Step 5 Close and Resecure the NXD Panel Enclosure ccccsccscceeceeccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 43 NXT BP Power Pack FG2255 10 sssscssssscosscccsssccssscecsscencseceessceesseceesseeeceeeeses 44 Product Specifications iiiciicicisescscideescussdceteettegeests dos setdecdeaudt peecdesdelseensecusenestesupeones saauseetee 44 NXA BASE B Battery Base Kit FG2255K sssssscsosssssvessesorsesnonssevsersnnenncsnenss 45 PFOCUct SPScifiCatiOns sie ceisces cecescesebnecdedsocusesissseasderevesendesevseseassccseavouteedeussebscsesensiacecese 45 Checking the NXT BP battery charge cccccssssssssssssccsesesssssssssssseeseeesessessseseseseeeees 46 Installing the NXA BASE B to an NXT Modero Paniel sssssssssccesssescessssnsesseeeseees 46 Installing an NXT BP into the NXA BASE B ccccccssssssssssssssssscecssssssescessssssesseeeseess 47 Charging the NXT BP batteries with the NXA BASE B csssssssssssssceesenesssessenseeees 48 NXT CHG Battery Charger Kit FG2255 50K essssssseeeeesseseeeesesrsessssesereeererssseseseeee 49 Prod ct Specifications icc cecssicss cicsesstscccorseeceecesesetscecheuseeasocesexeuedetsesbeuseced
351. where the necessary cables are threaded through for connection to the touch panel 3 Thread the incoming RJ 45 Ethernet and any other audio video wiring through the knockouts Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1200VG and 1500VG Panels section on page 68 for pinout descriptions Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 4 Install the drywall sheetrock before inserting the main NXD unit into the CB TP12 15 Installation of the NXD Touch Panel The NXD panel can be installed either directly into the optional CB TP12 15 or other solid surface environment using the two different mounting options drywall clips or solid surface screws The following sections describe mounting the touch panel directly into a pre wall installed conduit box a solid surface or drywall and optional NXA RK Rack Mount Kit Installing the NXD panel within a Conduit Box The conduit box must be mounted prior to continuing this section Refer to the procedures in the Pre wall Installation of the Conduit Boxes section on page 58 for detailed pre wall installation instructions Verify that all necessary cables have been threaded through the knockouts on the conduit box and the connections have been tested prior to installation of the NXD panel 1 Remove the magnetic faceplate bezel A in FIG 39 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 39 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force Stud Cable C
352. wn this Current Key string value for later entry into your WAP s WEP Key field typically entered without colons and into the communicating panel s Current Key field FIG 81 14 If you are entering a Current Key generated either by your target WAP or another Modero panel within the WEP Keys section touch the Key button to launch the WEP Key keyboard FIG 83 enter the characters and press Done when finished e This Key value corresponds to the Default WEP Key number used on the Wireless Access Point and selected in the Default Key field described in the previous step If your target Wireless Access Point does not support passphrase key generation and has previously been setup with a manually entered WEP KEY you must manually enter that same WEP key on your panel 15 Verify the fields within the IP Settings section have been properly configured Refer to the Step 1 Configuring the Panel s Wireless IP Settings section on page 102 for detailed information 16 Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that you will need to navigate to the System Settings page and configure the connection to a target Master 17 After the panel restarts return to the Wireless Settings page to verify the Link Quality and Signal Strength e The bargraphs have been replaced with descriptions None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Exc
353. wo available choices Disable activates the brightness limit set on the Modero panel and is used to conserve battery power Activating this feature causes the panel to function at 80 of full brightness and overrides the Panel Brightness value set on the Setup page This extends the battery usage time Disabled illuminated when selected deactivates this power save feature and makes the panel use the specified Panel Brightness level set on the Setup page The term quality in the context of a battery refers to the current capacity relative to the batteries rated capacity For example after constant use a battery may be operating at 75 of its rated capacity even though it might be fully charged In this case the battery could be incorrectly reporting its information back to the battery base and then consequently relating this information back to the Battery Base page A battery can be recalibrated using an optional NXT CHG battery charger Protected Setup Navigation Buttons The Protected Setup Navigation Buttons FIG 116 appear on the left of the panel screen when the Protected Setup page is currently active Back Ta Pa G4 Web D Control Sensors Modero Protected Setup Navigation Passwords Buttons Calibrate Wireless Settings System Settings LAMX FIG 116 Protected Setup Navigation Buttons These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include the panel
354. ws SA FIG 54 Installation of grommet into the rear plastic enclosure Refer to your particular VESA mount manufacturer s installation procedures for further surface mounting procedures Pre wall Installation of the CB TP17 Conduit Box Wall Mount panels NXDs are contained within a metallic outer housing back box This back box is not removed when installing the NXD into a Conduit Box CB TP17 The back box is only removed to gain access for the replacement of the Compact Flash component or upgrade to the VESA housing ACCOMMODATE THE DRYWALLISHEETROCK This gap allows the installation of A INSTALLER LEAVE A GAP BETWEEN THE STUD AND CONDUIT BOX TO the drywall sheetrock after the CB TP17 has been mounted onto the beams WARNING The CB TP17 Conduit wallbox is an optional metallic box that is secured onto a beam in a pre wall setting where no walls or present Installation procedures and configurations can vary This section describes the installation procedures for the most common installation scenario The stud notching and conduit box installation must be done prior to any wall installation NOTE The most important thing to remember when mounting this conduit box is that the mounting tabs must be mounted flush against the outside of the sheetrock This step determines whether or not the mounting stud is notched cutout out to fit the conduit box 1 Measure the distance between the inside of the two sele
355. ws you to route a video signal from your computer through the NXA AVB RGB and then to the panel e Selecting Streaming Video requires that you enter the URL or IP Address of the server that will provide the video stream Note that Streaming Source is only available as a Video Fill option if the project specifies a touch panel that supports streaming video NXD NXT 1200VG NXDINXT 1500VG and NXD NXT 1700VG only 4 Set up a touch panel page via TPDesign4 with the necessary Video Touch Pass thru property yes selected e Video Pass Thru allows you to pass touch control information from a touch input device touch panel mouse or keyboard through an NXA AVB RGB to a controlled device with video out capabilities Select Yes from the drop down menu to enable video pass thru disabled by default This feature is also used in conjunction with the MPS mouse pass thru and KPS keyboard pass thru commands Wiring for Pass Thru Computer Control 1 Discharge any acquired static electricity by touching a grounded metal object 2 Turn off your computer and remove any installed power cables Review FIG 7 for an overview of the overall wiring configuration surrounding pass thru control RGB Component In lt HD 15 USB lt l l l l g994 JAV YXN AZODM Type A o w oO g S RGB a gt gt CATS USB ee P Type B lt gt 12 VDC power p Ethernet T supply Ethernet Out CAT5 RJ 45 Power to
356. x e Threading cables through the strain relief grommet opening in the rear plastic cover e Finalizing the installation of the NXD with VESA back box and cables into the plastic cover securing both components and finalizing the strain relief grommet installation The installation procedures found in this section are identical for both sizes of panels 12 and 15 Only overall dimensions and FG product numbers are different The new MB TP Universal VESA Mounting Box uses a standard VESA installation pattern of 75 mm between holes VESA mounts that conform to this pattern can be used on the MB TP Housing Removing the Original Modero Back Box 1 Detach all connectors from the side of the touch panel 2 Remove the magnetic faceplate from the NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and pulling outwards while applying a small amount of pressure to remove it from the main unit 3 Place the LCD face down on a soft cloth to expose the back of the panel and prevent scratching of the LCD Unscrew the Stereo Output nut from the Stereo Output jack 5 Remove the I O connector plate by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to remove the two screws and slide the I O connector plate away from the back box housing 6 Remove the four pan head Housing Screws from the rear of the NXD unit FIG 33 These screws secure the back box to the internal panel casing DO NOT REMOVE DO NOT REMOVE these these panel panel securing screws securing s
357. xt address of 150 A Button Commands Cont BMF Syntax Set any all button BMF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt data gt parameters by Variables sending embedded codes variable text address char array 1 4000 and data button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state level range 1 600 level value is 1 65535 data B lt border style gt Set the border style name See the TPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 188 B lt border 0 27 40 41 gt Set the borer style number See the TPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 188 DO lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt Set the draw order Listed from bottom to top Refer to the BDO command on page 193 for more information F lt font 1 8 10 11 20 29 32 xx gt Set the font See theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on page 187 F lt font 01 08 10 11 20 29 32 xx gt Set the font See theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on page 187 Ml lt mask image gt Set the mask image Refer to the BMI command on page 198 for more information T lt text gt Set the text using ASCII characters empty is clear P lt bitmap gt Set the picture bitmap filename empty is clear l lt icon 01 9900 O clear gt Set the icon using values of 01 9900 icon numbers are assigned in th
358. ypad that is used to set and display the current device number Options Allows you to select various touch panel features The Function Show button enables the display of the channel port and channel code in the top left corner of the button the level port and level code in the bottom left corner and the address port and address code in the bottom right corner see FIG 119 for an example of the function locations e Use the Page Tracking button to toggle page tracking When enabled the touch panel sends page data back to the NetLinx Master or vice versa depending on the touch panel settings Use the Telnet button to enable or disable the telnet server on the panel This feature focuses on direct telnet communication to the panel Use the Front Button Setup Access button to activate the grey Front Setup Access button located below the LCD to access the firmware pages Default condition is On Press and hold this grey button for 3 seconds to access the Setup page Press and hold this grey button for 6 seconds to access the Calibration page Reboot Panel Pressing this button causes the panel to restart after saving any changes Protected Setup Page Elements Cont System Recovery Allows you to either reset the touch panel to factory default settings and or wipe out all existing touch panel pages The Reset System Settings button allows a user to wipe out all current configuration parameters on the
359. ystem Settings IP Settings Master Connection ICSNET Modero Ehomet IP Address ee 192 168 168 41 Mode information Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 System Number Gateway 192 168 168 2 Master IP URL Master Port Number Host Name Primary ONS 192 168 168 7 Username Secondary DNS 192 168 168 9 Password FIG 128 System Settings page Step 2 Configuring the MAX CSE for communication 1 Complete the procedures outlined within the Configuring the MAX Communication Parameters section of the MAX CSE Instruction Manual to establish an active connection to the source MAX CSE 2 Confirm the MAX CSE is properly configured to use the newly established Static IP Address by launching your browser and entering the MAX s new Static IP Address into the browser s Address field 3 Press the Enter key on your keyboard to initiate the communication process and launch the initial on screen Enter Network Password security dialog 4 Enter the words administrator and password if using the default login profile into the corresponding User Name Password fields This is the factory default security login information 5 Click OK to enter the information and proceed to the Administration page which provides both a descriptive overview of the program stream and lists the currently used firmware 6 Determine the data throughput available on the network being used by the source encoder This information determines which Encoder Profile and Transpor

AMX NXD/NXT-1200VG Computer Monitor User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents